untitled

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300125-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-7T Pg 1 1115 1-14 Replaces: 30RB-6T

Controls, Start-Up, Operation, Service

and Troubleshooting

CONTENTS

Page

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2,3

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

Basic Control Usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

• SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY

• ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE

CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Main Base Board (MBB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Scroll Protection Module (SPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Fan Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10

Reverse Rotation Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

• DIAL SETTINGS

• PHASE REVERSAL PROTECTION

• PHASE LOSS AND UNDER-VOLTAGE

PROTECTION

Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Emergency On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Energy Management Module (EMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Energy Management Module

Heat Reclaim (EMM HR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Local Equipment Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Board Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Control Module Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

• RED LED

• GREEN LED

• YELLOW LED

Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) Interface . . . . . . . . . .17

Configuration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

• MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL

• RAMP LOADING

• MINUTES OFF TIME

Dual Chiller Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Capacity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

• BRINE CHILLER OPERATION

• CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES

Head Pressure Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

• STANDARD UNIT

• LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE

CONTROL OPTION

High-Efficiency Variable

Condenser Fans (HEVCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

Cooler Pump Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Machine Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

• SWITCH CONTROL

• TIME SCHEDULE

• CCN CONTROL

• UNIT RUN STATUS

Cooling Set Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

• SET POINT 1

• SET POINT 2

• 4 TO 20 mA INPUT

• DUAL SWITCH

• SET POINT OCCUPANCY

Temperature Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Page

Demand Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

• SWITCH CONTROLLED

• EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 to 20 mA Controlled)

• CCN CONTROLLED

Remote Alarm and Alert Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Broadcast Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Alarm Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

PRE-START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

System Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

START-UP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43-45

Actual Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Operating Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44

• TEMPERATURES

• VOLTAGE

• MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME

• FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS

OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45-52

Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Optional Heat Reclaim Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53-61

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

• EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE

Cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

• FREEZE PROTECTION

• LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE

• LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION

• TUBE PLUGGING

• RETUBING

• TIGHTENING COOLER HEAD BOLTS

• CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH

RTPF Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57

• REMOVE SURFACE LOADED FIBERS

• PERIODIC CLEAN WATER RINSE

• ROUTINE CLEANING OF COIL SURFACES

MCHX Condenser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning

Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Condenser Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Refrigerant Circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

• LEAK TESTING

• REFRIGERANT CHARGE

Safety Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

• COMPRESSOR PROTECTION

• CRANKCASE HEATERS

Relief Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

• HIGH-SIDE PROTECTION

• LOW-SIDE PROTECTION

Compressors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

• COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT

• OIL CHARGE

• SYSTEM BURNOUT CLEANUP PROCEDURE

MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,62

Recommended Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

AquaSnap

30RB060-390 Air-Cooled Chillers and

30RB080-390 Air-Cooled Chillers with

Greenspeed

Intelligence

CONTENTS (cont)

Page

TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62-93

Alarms and Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

• DIAGNOSTIC ALARM CODES AND POSSIBLE

CAUSES

Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Thermistors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

• COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR

• COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR

• DUAL CHILLER LWT

• COMPRESSOR SUCTION GAS TEMPERATURE

• OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE

• CONDENSER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR

• CONDENSER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR

• SUBCOOLED CONDENSER GAS TEMPERATURE

• REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE

Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Service Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

APPENDIX A — LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES . . . . . 94-106

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107-121

APPENDIX C — CCN ALARM DESCRIPTION . . 122-125

APPENDIX D — R-410A PRESSURE VS.

TEMPERATURE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND

LOG SHEETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127-130

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION

OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131-142

APPENDIX G — SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW

AMBIENT DRIVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143-148

INDEX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149,150

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RB

LIQUID CHILLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CL-1 to CL-10

SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

Installing, starting up, and servicing this equipment can be

hazardous due to system pressures, electrical components, and

equipment location (roof, elevated structures, etc.). Only

trained, qualified installers and service mechanics should

install, start up, and service this equipment. When working on

this equipment, observe precautions in the literature, and on

tags, stickers, and labels attached to the equipment, and any

other safety precautions that apply. Follow all safety codes.

Wear safety glasses and work gloves. Use care in handling,

rigging, and setting this equipment, and in handling all electri-

cal components.

WARNING

Electrical shock can cause personal injury and death. Shut

off all power to this equipment during installation. There

may be more than one disconnect switch. Tag all discon-

nect locations to alert others not to restore power until work

is completed.

WARNING

DO NOT VENT refrigerant relief valves within a building.

Outlet from relief valves must be vented outdoors in

accordance with the latest edition of ANSI/ASHRAE

(American National Standards Institute/American Society

of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers)

15 (Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration). The

accumulation of refrigerant in an enclosed space can

displace oxygen and cause asphyxiation. Provide adequate

ventilation in enclosed or low overhead areas. Inhalation of

high concentrations of vapor is harmful and may cause

heart irregularities, unconsciousness or death. Misuse can

be fatal. Vapor is heavier than air and reduces the amount

of oxygen available for breathing. Product causes eye and

skin irritation. Decomposition products are hazardous.

WARNING

DO NOT USE TORCH to remove any component. System

contains oil and refrigerant under pressure.

To remove a component, wear protective gloves and gog-

gles and proceed as follows:

a. Shut off electrical power to unit.

b. Recover refrigerant to relieve all pressure from sys-

tem using both high-pressure and low pressure ports.

c. Traces of vapor should be displaced with nitrogen

and the work area should be well ventilated. Refrig-

erant in contact with an open flame produces toxic

gases.

d. Cut component connection tubing with tubing cutter

and remove component from unit. Use a pan to catch

any oil that may come out of the lines and as a gage

for how much oil to add to the system.

e. Carefully unsweat remaining tubing stubs when nec-

essary. Oil can ignite when exposed to torch flame.

Failure to follow these procedures may result in personal

injury or death.

GENERAL

This publication contains Controls, Operation, Start-Up,

Service and Troubleshooting information for the 30RB060-390

air-cooled liquid chillers with electronic controls. The 30RB

chillers are equipped with ComfortLink controls and electronic

expansion valves.

NOTE: Unit sizes 315-390 are modular units that are shipped

in separate sections as modules A or B as noted in position 8 of

the unit model number. Installation directions specific to these

units are noted in these instructions. For modules 315A, 315B,

330A, 330B, 345A, 345B, and 360B, follow all general

instructions as noted for unit sizes 30RB160,170. For modules

360A, 390A, and 390B, follow instructions for 30RB190. See

Table 1 for a listing of unit sizes and modular combinations.

NOTE: The nameplate for modular units contains only the first

two digits in the model number. For example, 315A and 315B

nameplates read 31A and 31B.

Table 1 — Modular Unit Combinations

Conventions Used in This Manual — The follow-

ing conventions for discussing configuration points for the

local display (scrolling marquee or Navigator™ accessory)

will be used in this manual.

Point names will be written with the mode name first, then

any sub-modes, then the point name, each separated by an

arrow symbol (. Names will also be shown in bold

and italics. As an example, the Lead/Lag Circuit Select Point,

which is located in the Configuration mode, Option sub-mode,

would be written as Configuration OPTNLLCS.

This path name will show the user how to navigate through

the local display to reach the desired configuration. The user

would scroll through the modes and sub-modes using the

and keys. The arrow symbol in the path name repre-

sents pressing to move into the next level of the

menu structure.

When a value is included as part of the path name, it will be

shown at the end of the path name after an equals sign. If the

value represents a configuration setting, an explanation will

CAUTION

This unit uses a microprocessor control system. Do not

short or jumper between terminations on circuit boards or

modules; control or board failure may result.

Be aware of electrostatic discharge (static electricity) when

handling or making contact with circuit boards or module

connections. Always touch a chassis (grounded) part to dis-

sipate body electrostatic charge before working inside con-

trol center.

Use extreme care when handling tools near boards and

when connecting or disconnecting terminal plugs. Circuit

boards can easily be damaged. Always hold boards by the

edges and avoid touching components and connections.

This equipment uses, and can radiate, radio frequency

energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, it may cause interference to radio com-

munications. It has been tested and found to comply with

the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Inter-

national Standard in North America EN 61000-2/3 which

are designed to provide reasonable protection against such

interference when operated in a commercial environment.

Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to

cause interference, in which case the user, at his own

expense, will be required to take whatever measures may

be required to correct the interference.

Always store and transport replacement or defective boards

in anti-static shipping bag.

CAUTION

To prevent potential damage to heat exchanger, always run

fluid through heat exchanger when adding or removing

refrigerant charge. Use appropriate brine solutions in cooler

fluid loop to prevent the freezing of heat exchanger,

optional hydronic section and/or interconnecting piping

when the equipment is exposed to temperatures below 32 F

(0° C). Proof of flow switch and strainer are factory

installed on all models. Do NOT remove power from this

chiller during winter shutdown periods without taking pre-

caution to remove all water from heat exchanger and

optional hydronic system. Failure to properly protect the

system from freezing may constitute abuse and may void

warranty.

CAUTION

Compressors and optional hydronic system pumps require

specific rotation. Check reverse rotation board. If lower

(red) LED is blinking, the phase sequence is incorrect.

Swap any two incoming power leads to correct condenser

fan rotation before starting any other motors. Operating the

unit without verifying proper phasing could result in equip-

ment damage.

CAUTION

Refrigerant charge must be removed slowly to prevent loss

of compressor oil that could result in compressor failure.

CAUTION

Puron

refrigerant (R-410A) systems operate at higher

pressures than standard R-22 systems. Do not use R-22 ser-

vice equipment or components on Puron refrigerant equip-

ment. If service equipment is not rated for Puron

refrigerant, equipment damage or personal injury may

result.

CAUTION

DO NOT re-use compressor oil or any oil that has been

exposed to the atmosphere. Dispose of oil per local codes

and regulations. DO NOT leave refrigerant system open to

air any longer than the actual time required to service the

equipment. Seal circuits being serviced and charge with

dry nitrogen to prevent oil contamination when timely

repairs cannot be completed. Failure to follow these proce-

dures may result in damage to equipment.

UNIT SIZE MODULE A MODULE B

30RB315 30RB160 30RB160

30RB330 30RB170 30RB160

30RB345 30RB170 30RB170

30RB360 30RB190 30RB170

30RB390 30RB190 30RB190

ENTER

be shown in parenthesis after the value. As an example,

ConfigurationOPTNLLCS = 1 (Circuit A leads).

Pressing the and keys simultaneously

will scroll an expanded text description of the point name or

value across the display. The expanded description is shown in

the local display tables but will not be shown with the path

names in text.

The CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

) point names are also

referenced in the local display tables for users configuring the

unit with CCN software instead of the local display. The CCN

tables are located in Appendix B of the manual.

Basic Control Usage

SCROLLING MARQUEE DISPLAY — The scrolling mar-

quee display is the standard interface display to the ComfortLink

control system for 30RB units. The display has up and down ar-

row keys, an key, and an key. These keys

are used to navigate through the different levels of the display

structure. Press the key until the highest operating

level is displayed to move through the top 11 mode levels indi-

cated by LEDs (light-emitting diodes) on the left side of the dis-

play. See Fig. 1.

Once within a mode or sub-mode, pressing the

and keys simultaneously will put the scrolling

marquee display into expanded text mode where the full mean-

ing of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed

for the current selection. Press the and

keys to return the scrolling marquee display to its default menu

of rotating display items (those items in Run StatusVIEW).

In addition, the password will be disabled, requiring that it be

entered again before changes can be made to password

protected items. Press the key to exit out of the ex-

panded text mode.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration

DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display

expansions will immediately change to the new language. No

power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring

languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name alternates

with the value. Press the key at a changeable item

and the value will be displayed. Press again and the

value will begin to flash indicating that the value can be

changed. Use the up and down arrow keys to change the value,

and confirm the value by pressing the key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in

the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to

change the value or state and press the key to accept

it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of

structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass-

word protected. The words ‘PASS’ and ‘WORD’ will alternate

on the display when required. The default password is 0111.

Press and the 1111 password will be displayed. Press

again and the first digit will begin to flash. Use the

arrow keys to change the number and press to accept

the digit. Continue with the remaining digits of the password.

The password can only be changed through CCN operator in-

terface software such as ComfortWORKS

, ComfortVIEW™

and Service Tool.

See Table 2 and Appendix A for further details.

ACCESSORY NAVIGATOR™ DISPLAY MODULE —

The Navigator module provides a mobile user interface to the

ComfortLink control system, which is only available as a field-

installed accessory. The display has up and down arrow keys,

an key, and an key. These keys are used

to navigate through the different levels of the display structure.

Press the key until ‘Select a Menu Item’ is dis-

played to move through the top 11 mode levels indicated by

LEDs on the left side of the display. See Fig. 2.

Once within a Mode or sub-mode, a “>” indicates the cur-

rently selected item on the display screen. Pressing the

and keys simultaneously will put the Nav-

igator module into expanded text mode where the full meaning

of all sub-modes, items and their values can be displayed. Press-

ing the and keys when the display says

‘Select Menu Item’ (Mode LED level) will return the Navigator

module to its default menu of rotating display items (those items

in Run StatusVIEW). In addition, the password will be dis-

abled, requiring that it be entered again before changes can be

made to password protected items. Press the key to

exit out of the expanded text mode.

NOTE: When the Language Selection (Configuration

DISPLANG), variable is changed, all appropriate display

expansions will immediately change to the new language. No

power-off or control reset is required when reconfiguring

languages.

When a specific item is located, the item name appears on the

left of the display, the value will appear near the middle of the

display and the units (if any) will appear on the far right of the

display. Press the key at a changeable item and the

value will begin to flash. Use the up and down arrow keys to

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

Run Status

Service Test

Temperature

Pressures

Setpoints

Inputs

Outputs

Configuration

Time Clock

Operating Modes

Alarms

Alarm Status

ENTER

MODE

ESCAPE

Fig. 1 — Scrolling Marquee Display

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESC

MODE

Alarm Status

Comfort

Link

Fig. 2 — Accessory Navigator Display Module

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

change the value, and confirm the value by pressing the

key.

Changing item values or testing outputs is accomplished in

the same manner. Locate and display the desired item. Press

so that the item value flashes. Use the arrow keys to

change the value or state and press the key to accept

it. Press the key to return to the next higher level of

structure. Repeat the process as required for other items.

Items in the Configuration and Service Test modes are pass-

word protected. The words Enter Password will be displayed

when required, with 1111 also being displayed. The default

password is 0111. Use the arrow keys to change the number

and press to enter the digit. Continue with the re-

maining digits of the password. The password can only be

changed through CCN operator interface software such as

ComfortWORKS, ComfortVIEW and Service Tool.

Adjusting the Contrast — The contrast of the display can be

adjusted to suit ambient conditions. To adjust the contrast of

the Navigator module, press the key until the dis-

play reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move

to the Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to

this mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF

METR OFF

LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

or down arrow to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the view

screen. Pressing and simultaneously

allows the user to adjust the display contrast. Use the up or

down arrows to adjust the contrast. The screen’s contrast will

change with the adjustment. Press to accept the

change. The Navigator module will keep this setting as long as

it is plugged in to the LEN (local equipment network) bus.

Adjusting the Backlight Brightness — The backlight of the

display can be adjusted to suit ambient conditions. The factory

default is set to the highest level. To adjust the backlight of the

Navigator module, press the key until the display

reads, “Select a menu item.” Using the arrow keys move to the

Configuration mode. Press to obtain access to this

mode. The display will read:

> TEST OFF

METR OFF

LANG ENGLISH

Pressing will cause the “OFF” to flash. Use the up

or down arrow keys to change “OFF” to “ON.” Pressing

will illuminate all LEDs and display all pixels in the

view screen. Pressing the up and down arrow keys simultane-

ously allows the user to adjust the display brightness. Use the

up or down arrow keys to adjust screen brightness. Press

to accept the change. The Navigator module will

keep this setting as long as it is plugged in to the LEN bus.

Table 2 — ComfortLink Display Menu Structure

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

MODE

RUN

STATUS

SERVICE

TEST

TEMPERATURE PRESSURE

SET

POINTS

INPUTS OUTPUTS CONFIGURATION

TIME

CLOCK

OPERATING

MODES

ALARMS

Auto

Display

(VIEW)

Manual

Test Mode

(TEST)

Unit

Temperatures

(UNIT)

Circuit A

Pressures

(PRC.A)

Cooling

Setpoints

(COOL)

General

Inputs

(GEN.I)

Circuit A

Outputs

(CIR.A)

Display

Configuration

(DISP)

Time of Day

(TIME)

Operating

Control

Type

(SLCT)

Reset

Current

Alarms

(R.ALM)

Remote

User

Interface

(R.CCN)

Quick

Test

Mode

(QUIC)

Circuit A

Temperatures

(CIR.A)

Circuit B

Pressures

(PRC.B)

Heating

Setpoints

(HEAT)

Circuit B

Outputs

(CIR.B)

Unit

Configuration

(UNIT)

Day, Date

(DATE)

Operating

Modes

(MODE)

Current

Alarms

(ALRM)

Machine

Starts/

Hours

(RUN)

Circuit B

Temperatures

(CIR.B)

Circuit C

Pressures

(PRC.C)

Misc.

Setpoints

(MISC)

Circuit C

Outputs

(CIR.C)

Service

Configurations

(SERV)

Schedule 1

(SCH1)

Alarm

History

(H.ALM)

Compressor

Run Hours

(HOUR)

Circuit C

Temperatures

(CIR.C)

General

Outputs

(GEN.O)

Options

Configuration

(OPTN)

Schedule 2

(SCH2)

Compressor

Starts

(STRT)

Reset, Demand

Limit, Master/Slave

(RSET)

Holidays

(HOLI)

Fan Run

Hours

(FAN)

Service

Maintenance

Configuration

(MCFG)

Compressor

Disable

(CP.UN)

Predictive

Maintenance

(MAIN)

Software

Versions

(VERS)

CONTROLS

General —

The 30RB air-cooled liquid chillers contain the

ComfortLink electronic control system that controls and moni-

tors all operations of the chiller. The control system is com-

posed of several components as listed in the following sections.

All machines have at the very least a main base board (MBB),

scrolling marquee display, electric expansion valve board

(EXV), fan board, one scroll protection module (SPM) per

compressor, Emergency On/Off switch, an Enable-Off- Re-

mote Contact switch and a reverse rotation board.

Main Base Board (MBB) — The MBB is the heart of

the ComfortLink control system, which contains the major

portion of operating software and controls the operation of the

machine. See Fig. 3. The MBB continuously monitors input/

output channel information received from its inputs and from

all other modules. The MBB receives inputs from status and

feedback switches, pressure transducers and thermistors. The

MBB also controls several outputs. Some inputs and outputs to

control the machine are located on other boards, but are trans-

mitted to or from the MBB via the internal communications

bus. Information is transmitted between modules via a 3-wire

communication bus or LEN (Local Equipment Network). The

CCN (Carrier Comfort Network

) bus is also supported. Con-

nections to both LEN and CCN buses are made at TB3. For a

complete description of main base board inputs and outputs

and their channel identifications, see Table 3.

221

195

CH1 CH2 CH3

CH4

CH11 CH12

LOCATION OF

SERIAL NUMBER

CH13

CH14

15A

ANALOG

INPUTS

J2C

J2B

J15

J1A

J9D

+ G –

DISCRETE

INPUTS

J5A

16A

15B

CH16B

C16

J2A

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5

CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26

CH17

CH18

J5B

J5C

THERMISTORS PRESSURES

CH5

CH6 CH7 CH8

CH9

J7A J7B

J7C

J7D

RELAY

OUTPUTS

MOV1

C41

C42 C43

C32

C33

C34

C35

12/11

J10

19 J12

J13

+ G -

S TATU S

J9A

D15

CCN

CH10

+ G –

SIO

(LEN)

J9C

J9B

+ G –

Fig. 3 — Main Base Board

Table 3 — Main Base Board Inputs and Outputs

* Controls discharge and liquid line isolation solenoids for 30RB120-190 brine units only.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

SCROLLING MARQUEE

POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

MBB-J1A, MBB-J1B

11 24 vac

12 Ground

Local Equipment Network —— —

MBB-J9A, MBB-J9B,

MBB-J9C, MBB-J9D

Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN)

—— —

MBB-J12

External Chilled

Water Pump Interlock

PMPI Switch INPUTSGEN.ILOCK MBB-J4-CH15A

Chilled Water Flow Switch CWFS Switch INPUTSGEN.ILOCK

MBB-J5A-CH15B

15B

Demand Limit Switch #1 Demand Limit SW1 Switch INPUTSGEN.IDLS1 MBB-J4-CH13

Circuit A Discharge

Pressure Transducer

DPTA

Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC)

PRESSUREPRC.ADP.A

MBB-J7A-CH6

5V 5 vdc Ref.

S Signal

R Return

Circuit B Discharge

Pressure Transducer

DPTB

Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC)

PRESSUREPRC.BDP.B

MBB-J7C-CH8

5V 5 vdc Ref.

S Signal

R Return

Dual Chiller

LWT Thermistor

DUAL 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITCHWS MBB-J6-CH3

Dual Set Point Input Dual Set Point Switch INPUTSGEN.IDUAL MBB-J4-CH12

Entering Water Thermistor EWT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITEWT MBB-J6-CH2

Leaving Water Thermistor LWT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITLWT MBB-J6-CH1

Outdoor Air Thermistor OAT 5k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITOAT MBB-J6-CH4

Pump #1 Interlock

Pump #2 Interlock

PMP1

PMP2

Switch INPUTSGEN.IPUMP

MBB-J5C-CH18

Reverse Rotation Board Reverse Rotation Board Switch INPUTSGEN.IELEC

MBB-J5A-CH16B

16B

Circuit A Suction

Pressure Transducer

SPTA

Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC)

PRESSUREPRC.ASP.A

MBB-J7B-CH7

5V 5 vdc Ref.

S Signal

R Return

Circuit B Suction

Pressure Transducer

SPTB

Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC)

PRESSUREPR.BSP.B

MBB-J7D-CH9

5V 5 vdc Ref.

S Signal

R Return

Unit Status Remote Contact-Off-Enable Switch INPUTSGEN.IONOF MBB-J4-CH11

Alarm Relay ALM R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OALRM MBB-J3-CH24

Alert Relay ALT R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OALRT MBB-J3-CH25

Cooler Heater CL-HT TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OCO.HT MBB-J2B-CH21

Circuit A Minimum

Load Control*

MLV-A TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.AHGB.A MBB-J2C-CH22

Circuit B Minimum

Load Control*

MLV-B TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.BHGB.B MBB-J2C-CH23

Pump #1 Starter

PMP1 TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OPMP.1 MBB-J2A-CH19

Pump #2 Starter PMP2 TRIAC OUTPUTSGEN.OPMP.2 MBB-J2A-CH20

Ready Relay RDY R Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OREDY MBB-J3-CH26

Scroll Protection Module (SPM) — There is one

SPM per compressor and it is responsible for controlling that

compressor. See Fig. 4. The device controls the compressor

contactor and the compressor crankcase heater. The SPM mod-

ule also monitors the compressor motor temperature, and cir-

cuit high pressure switch. The SPM responds to commands

from the MBB (main base board) and sends the MBB the

results of the channels it monitors via the LEN (Local

Equipment Network). See below for SPM board address infor-

mation. See Table 4 for SPM inputs and outputs.

SPM-A1 DIP

Switch

12345678

Address: ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-A2 DIP

Switch

123 456 7 8

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-A3 DIP

Switch

1 23456 7 8

Address: OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-A4 DIP

Switch

12345678

Address: OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF

SPM-B1 DIP

Switch

12 3 4 567 8

Address: ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-B2 DIP

Switch

123 4 567 8

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-B3 DIP

Switch

1 234 567 8

Address: OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-B4 DIP

Switch

12345678

Address: OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

SPM-C1 DIP

Switch

12345678

Address: ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

SPM-C2 DIP

Switch

123 4 5 678

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

SPM-C3 DIP

Switch

1 234 5 678

Address: OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

SPM-C4 DIP

Switch

12345678

Address: OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF

103

LOCATION OF

SERIAL NUMBER

QC1

QC2

JP4

JP1

JP2

JP5

JP6

C19

D8 Q3

SMD

JP3

C46

D13

D14

LED1

LED2

Fig. 4 — Scroll Protection Module

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) Board —

At least one EXV board is used in all machines. There is one

EXV board for 2-circuit machines. Three-circuit machines

have two EXV boards. See Fig. 5. The board is responsible for

monitoring the return gas temperature thermistors. The board

also signals the EXV motors to open or close. The electronic

expansion valve board responds to commands from the MBB

and sends the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via

the LEN (local equipment network). See below for DIP switch

information for EXV1 and EXV2. See Tables 5 and 6 for EXV

inputs and outputs.

Table 4 — Scroll Protection Module Inputs and Outputs*

* “x” denotes the circuit, A, B or C. “n” denotes the compressor number, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

Table 5 — EXV1 Board Inputs and Outputs

EXV1 DIP Switch 123456 7 8

Address: ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON

EXV2 DIP Switch 1 23456 7 8

Address: OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ON

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

SCROLLING MARQUEE

POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

SPM-xn-J1

QC1 24 vac

QC2 Ground

Local Equipment Network —— —

SPM-xn-JP1

SPM-xn-JP2

Circuit x High Pressure Switch HPS-x Switch Not available

SPM-xn-JP3

Compressor xn Motor Temperature MTR-xn PTC Thermistor Not available

SPM-xn-JP4

Compressor xn Contactor Cxn Relay OUTPUTSCIR.xCP.xn

SPM-xn-JP5

Crankcase Heater CCH Relay OUTPUTSCIR.xHT.xn

SPM-xn-JP6

Circuit x High Pressure Switch HPS-x Switch Not available

SPM-xn-JP2

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

SCROLLING MARQUEE

POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

EXV1-J1

11 24 vac

12 Ground

Local Equipment Network —— —

EXV1-J4

3–

Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor SGTA 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.ASGT.A

EXV1-J3

THA

Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor SGTB 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.BSGT.B

EXV1-J3

THB

Circuit A EXV EXV-A Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.AEXV.A

EXV1-J2A

Circuit B EXV EXV-B Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.BEXV.B

EXV1-J2B

Fan Boards — At least one fan board is installed in each

unit (see Fig. 6 and 7), except for 30RB080-190 units with the

high-efficiency variable condenser fan (HEVCF) option; fan

boards are not used with this option on these units. There are

two types of fan boards, with and without an analog output sig-

nal for the low ambient head pressure control fan speed con-

trollers. If a unit does not have low ambient head pressure con-

trol installed, it will not have the analog connection terminals.

The fan board responds to commands from the MBB and sends

the MBB the results of the channels it monitors via the LEN.

See below for fan board 1, 2 and 3 DIP switch addresses. See

Tables 7-9 for inputs and outputs.

100

257-01

712

100K

100

J2A EXVA

J2B EXVB

24VAC

STATUS

MOV1

LOCATION OF

SERIAL NUMBER

4321

THA THB

C15

C16

Q2 Q1

12/11

C17

Q45

Q42Q37

Q35

Q25

Q27

Q30

Q20

Q22

Q17

Q15

Q12

Q10

C10

C11

C37C39

D15

C25

C49

R3 L3

TEMP

D29

D9 D8

SI0

(LEN)

COMM J4

Fig. 5 — EXV Board

FAN BOARD 1

DIP Switch

123 45678

Address: OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FAN BOARD 2

DIP Switch

12345678

Address: ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

FAN BOARD 3

DIP Switch

1 2345678

Address: OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Table 6 — EXV2 Inputs and Outputs

NOTE: EXV2 inputs and outputs are only used on 30RB210-300.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

SCROLLING MARQUEE

POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

EXV2-J1

11 24 vac

12 Ground

Local Equipment Network ——

—

EXV2-J4

3–

Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor SGTC 5k Thermistor TEMPERATURECIR.CSGT.C

EXV2J3

THA

Circuit C EXV EXV-C Stepper Motor OUTPUTSCIR.CEXV.C

EXV2-J2A

100K

CH1

CH2 CH3

CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

STATUS SIO (LEN)

LOCATION OF

SERIAL NUMBER

24 VAC

CH13 CH14

CH9

CH10

CH11

CH12

JP2

C61

CH13

D12

JP1

U21

Q10

Q11

U10

Q12

Q60

3 2 1

– G +

3 2 1

– G +

DIP SWITCH

J7 J8

Fig. 6 — Fan Board (AUX 1) with Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control

Table 7 — Fan Board 1 (AUX1, AUX2) Outputs*

*Fan boards 1 and 2 will use the AUX1 board when the low ambient temperature head pressure control option is installed.

†Supplied on AUX1 board only

NOTES:

1. Fan board 1 is used on 30RB060-390.

2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is

de-energized.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

SCROLLING MARQUEE

POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

FB1-J1

11 24 vac

12 Ground

Local Equipment Network —— —

FB1-J9

Circuit A Low Ambient

Temperature Head Pressure

Control Speed Signal

MM-A† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.ASPD.A

FB1-CH9

Circuit B Low Ambient Temperature

Head Pressure Control Speed Signal

(sizes 060-150, 210-250)

MM-B† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.BSPD.B

FB1-CH10

Outdoor Fan Motor 1 OFM1

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH1

(sizes 060-110)

FB1-J2-CH2

(sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH3

(sizes 160-190, 275, 300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 2 OFM2

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH2

(sizes 060-110)

FB1-J2-CH3

(sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH4

(sizes 160-190, 275, 300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 3 OFM3

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH3

(sizes 060,070,090-110)

FB1-J3-CH5

(size 080)

FB1-J2-CH1

(sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH2

(sizes 160-190, 275, 300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 4 OFM4

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J2-CH4

(sizes 060,070,130,

150,210-250)

FB1-J3-CH6

(size 080)

FB1-J3-CH7

(sizes 090-110)

FB1-J3-CH5

(sizes 160-190, 275-300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 5 OFM5

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH5

(sizes 090-110)

FB1-J3-CH6

(sizes 120-150, 210-250)

FB1-J2-CH1

(sizes 160-190, 275-300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 6 OFM6

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH6

(sizes 090-110,

160-190, 275-300,

Duplex sizes 315-390)

FB1-J3-CH7

(sizes 120-150, 210-250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 7 OFM7

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH5

(sizes 120-150, 210-250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 8 OFM8

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB1-J3-CH8

(sizes 120-150, 210-250)

Table 8 — Fan Board 2 (AUX1, AUX2) Outputs*

*Fan boards 1 and 2 will use the AUX1 board when the low ambient temperature head pressure control option is installed.

†Output only on units with low ambient temperature head pressure control installed (AUX1).

NOTES:

1. Fan board 2 used on 30RB160-190, 275-300, 315-390.

2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is

de-energized.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

SCROLLING MARQUEE

POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

FB2-J1

11 24 vac

12 Ground

Local Equipment Network —— —

FB2-J9

Circuit B Low Ambient Temperature

Head Pressure Control

Speed Signal

(sizes 160-190, 275-300, 315-400)

MM-B† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.BSPD.B

FB2-CH9

Outdoor Fan Motor 7 OFM7†

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH2

(sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J2-CH3

(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 8 OFM8

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH3

(sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J2-CH4

(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 9 OFM9

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH1

(sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J2-CH2

(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 10 OFM10

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH4

(sizes 160, 170, 315-345, 360B)

FB2-J3-CH5

(sizes 190, 275, 300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 11 OFM11

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB2-J2-CH1

(sizes 190, 275-300, 360A, 390)

Outdoor Fan Motor 12 OFM12

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB2-J3-CH6

(sizes 190, 275-300, 360A, 390)

100K

LOCATION OF

SERIAL NUMBER

TR1 TR2 TR3 TR4 TR5 TR6 TR7 TR8

CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8

STATUS SIO (LEN)

24 VAC

Q10

Q11Q12

Q13

3 2 1

– G +

3 2 1

– G +

DIP SWITCH

Fig. 7 — Fan Board (AUX 2) without Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control

Table 9 — Fan Board 3 (AUX1) Inputs and Outputs

*Controls discharge and liquid line isolation soleniods for 30RB210-300 brine units.

†Low ambient temperature head pressure control output is on AUX1 board only.

NOTES:

1. Fan board 3 used on 30RB210-300.

2. 24 vac TRIAC outputs may indicate 12-13 vac when output is

de-energized.

DESCRIPTION INPUT/OUTPUT I/O TYPE

SCROLLING MARQUEE

POINT NAME

CONNECTION POINT

(Unit Size)

Pin Notation

Power (24 vac supply) —— —

FB3-J1

11 24 vac

12 Ground

Local Equipment Network —— —

FB3-J9

Circuit C Discharge

Pressure Transducer

DPTC

Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC)

PRESSUREPRC.CDP.C FB3-J7-CH13

Circuit C Suction

Pressure Transducer

SPTC

Pressure Transducer

(0-5 VDC)

PRESSUREPRC.CSP.C FB3-J8-CH14

Minimum Load

Value Circuit C

MLV-C* TRIAC OUTPUTSCIR.CHGB.C

FB3-J3-CH7

(sizes 210-300)

Circuit C Low Ambient

Temperature Head Pressure

Control Speed Signal

(sizes 210-300)

MM-C† 0-10 VDC OUTPUTSCIR.CSPD.C

FB3-CH9

Outdoor Fan Motor 9 OFM9

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH2

(sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH3

(size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 10 OFM10

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH3

(sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH4

(size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 11 OFM11

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1

(sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH2

(size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 12 OFM12

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH3

(sizes 210, 225)

FB3-J2-CH4

(size 250)

Outdoor Fan Motor 13 OFM13

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1

(size 250)

FB3-J2-CH2

(size 275)

FB3-J2-CH3

(size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 14 OFM14

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J3-CH6

(size 250)

FB3-J2-CH3

(size 275)

FB3-J2-CH4

(size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 15 OFM15

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1

(size 275)

FB3-J2-CH2

(size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 16 OFM16

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH4

(size 275)

FB3-J3-CH5

(size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 17 OFM17

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J2-CH1

(size 300)

Outdoor Fan Motor 18 OFM18

TRIAC

24 VAC

FB3-J3-CH6

(size 300)

Reverse Rotation Board — The reverse rotation

board monitors the three-phase electrical system to provide

phase reversal, phase loss and under-voltage protection. See

Fig. 8. The reverse rotation board has two LEDs (light-emitting

diodes) and two adjustable dial settings. Under normal condi-

tions, the upper LED will light up green. The lower LED is red

and will flash (phase reversal) or turn on solid (phase loss and

under-voltage) according to the conditions sensed.

DIAL SETTINGS — The reverse rotation board has two di-

als. See Fig. 8. The upper dial should be set to match the in-

coming three-phase voltage to the chiller with no compressors

running. This dial must be adjusted for 208/230-v chillers oper-

ating on 208-v power supply. The dial should be adjusted to

200-v minimum setting for this case. The lower dial is used for

trip delay and should be set fully counterclockwise to the mini-

mum 0.1 second setting.

PHASE REVERSAL PROTECTION — The control moni-

tors the three-phase power sequence supplied at terminals L1,

L2, and L3. If the control senses an incorrect phase relation-

ship, the relay contacts (11/14) on the board will open. The re-

lay contacts will automatically reset when the correct phase se-

quence is applied.

PHASE LOSS AND UNDER-VOLTAGE PROTEC-

TION — If the reverse rotation board senses that any one of

the three phase inputs has no AC voltage or that any one phase

has dropped more than 20% below the voltage dial setting, the

relay contacts (11/14) on the board will open. Contacts will re-

set automatically when all three phases are present, in the cor-

rect sequence and are within the limits of the voltage dial

setting.

NOTE: Normal operation of the reverse rotation board (for

example, no faults are detected) results in a closed contact

being applied to the MBB (plug J5A, channel 16B) through the

closed 11/14 relay contact.

Enable-Off-Remote Contact Switch — This switch

is installed in all units and provides the owner and service

person with a local means of enabling or disabling the

machine. It is a 3-position switch used to control the chiller.

When switched to the Enable position the chiller is under its

own control. Move the switch to the Off position to shut the

chiller down. Move the switch to the Remote Contact position

and a field-installed dry contact can be used to start the chiller.

The contacts must be capable of handling a 24-vac, 20-mA

load. In the Enable and Remote Contact (dry contacts closed)

positions, the chiller is allowed to operate and respond to the

scheduling configuration, CCN configuration and set point

control.

Emergency On/Off Switch — This switch is installed

in all units. The Emergency On/Off switch should only be used

when it is required to shut the chiller off immediately. Power

to the MBB, energy management module, and scrolling

marquee display is interrupted when this switch is off and all

outputs from these modules will be turned off.

Energy Management Module (EMM) — The EMM

is available as a factory-installed option or as a field-installed

accessory. The EMM receives 4 to 20 mA inputs for the

temperature reset, cooling set point reset and demand limit

functions. The EMM also receives the switch inputs for the

field-installed second stage 2-step or 3-step demand limit, ice

done, occupancy overrides, and remote lockout functions. The

EMM communicates the status of all inputs with the MBB, and

the MBB adjusts the control point, capacity limit, and other

functions according to the inputs received. The EMM gener-

ates a 0 to 10 vdc output that directly corresponds to the unit

percent total capacity. Contacts indicating unit run status and

shutdown status are provided. See Table 10 and Fig. 9.

LED STATUS FUNCTION

Upper (green) LED on

continuously

Relay contacts closed (normal

operation)

Lower (red) LED blinking Relay contacts open (phase rever-

sal has occurred)

Lower (red) LED on

continuously

Relay contacts open (phase loss

or under-voltage has occurred)

Upper (green) LED off Power not present at L1, L2, L3

(off)

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other manufac-

turer’s control systems due to possible power supply differ-

ences, full wave bridge versus half wave rectification,

which could lead to equipment damage. The two different

power supplies cannot be mixed. ComfortLink controls use

half wave rectification. A signal isolation device should be

utilized if incorporating a full wave bridge rectifier signal

generating device is used.

Fig. 8 — Reverse Rotation Board (RRB)

Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim

(EMM HR) — The EMM HR is available as a factory-in-

stalled option. The EMM HR communicates the status of all of

the inputs with the MBB. The MBB then determines the

appropriate operating mode. Operating modes are: normal

cooling, heat reclaim, and simultaneous one circuit cooling/one

circuit heat reclaim. See Table 11 and Fig. 9.

Table 10 — Energy Management Module (EMM) Inputs and Outputs

* 250 ohm, 1/2 watt resistor required for 4-20 mA input.

INPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT

4-20 mA or 0-5 vdc Demand Limit 4-20 mA Demand Limit 0-5 vdc* INPUTSGEN.IDMND EMM-J7B-CH6

4-20 mA or 0-5 vdc Temperature Reset/Setpoint

4-20 mA Temperature Reset/

Set point

0-5 vdc* INPUTSGEN.IRSET EMM-J7A-CH5

Demand Limit SW2 Demand Limit Step 2 Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IDLS2 EMM-J4-CH9

Ice Done Ice Done Switch Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IICE.D EMM-J4-CH11A

Occupancy Override Occupied Schedule Override Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IOCCS EMM-J4-CH8

Remote Lockout Switch Chiller Lockout Switch Input INPUTSGEN.IRLOC EMM-J4-CH10

SPT

Space Temperature

Thermistor

10k Thermistor TEMPERATUREUNITSPT EMM-J6-CH2

OUTPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT

% Total Capacity 0-10 vdc OUTPUTSGEN.OCATO EMM-J8-CH7

RUN R Run Relay Relay OUTPUTSGEN.ORUN EMM-J3-CH24

SHD R Shutdown Relay Relay OUTPUTSGEN.OSHUT EMM-J3-CH25

221

100K

24 VAC

12 11

11b

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

SIO LEN

+ G -

SIO LEN

J7B

J7A

J4 J3 J2B

J2A

Fig. 9 — Energy Management Module and Energy Management Heat Reclaim Module

a30-4465

Table 11 — Energy Management Module Heat Reclaim (EMM HR) Inputs and Outputs

Local Equipment Network — Information is trans-

mitted between modules via a 3-wire communication bus or

LEN (Local Equipment Network). External connection to the

LEN bus is made at TB3.

Board Addresses — All boards (except the main base

board and the energy management module) have 8-position

DIP switches. Addresses for all boards are listed with the input/

output tables for each board.

Control Module Communication

RED LED — Proper operation of the control boards can be

visually checked by looking at the red status LEDs (light-

emitting diodes). When operating correctly, the red status

LEDs will blink in unison at a rate of once every 2 seconds. If

the red LEDs are not blinking in unison, verify that correct

power is being supplied to all modules. Be sure that the main

base board (MBB) is supplied with the current software. If nec-

essary, reload current software. If the problem still persists, re-

place the MBB. A red LED that is lit continuously or blinking

at a rate of once per second or faster indicates that the board

should be replaced.

GREEN LED — All boards have a green LEN (Local Equip-

ment Network) (SIO) LED which should be blinking whenever

power is on. If the LEDs are not blinking as described check

LEN connections for potential communication errors at the

board connectors. See Table 3 for LEN connector designations.

A 3-wire bus accomplishes communication between modules.

These 3 wires run in parallel from module to module. The J9A

connector on the MBB provides communication directly to the

scrolling marquee display or the Navigator™ display module.

YELLOW LED — The MBB has one yellow LED. The

Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) LED will blink during times

of network communication.

Carrier Comfort Network (CCN) Interface — All

30RB units can be connected to the CCN, if desired. The com-

munication bus wiring is a shielded, 3-conductor cable with

drain wire and is field supplied and installed. The system ele-

ments are connected to the communication bus in a daisy chain

arrangement. The positive pin of each system element commu-

nication connector must be wired to the positive pins of the

system elements on either side of it, that is also required for the

negative and signal ground pins of each system element. Wir-

ing connections for CCN should be made at TB3. Consult the

CCN Contractor’s Manual for further information. See Fig. 10.

NOTE: Conductors and drain wire must be 20 AWG (Ameri-

can Wire Gage) minimum stranded, tinned copper. Individual

conductors must be insulated with PVC, PVC/nylon, vinyl,

Teflon*, or polyethylene. An aluminum/polyester 100% foil

shield and an outer jacket of PVC, PVC/nylon, chrome vinyl,

or Teflon with a minimum operating temperature range of

–20 C to 60 C is required. See Table 12 for recommended wire

manufacturers and part numbers.

INPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT

PD.B Circuit B Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pressure Transducer PRESSURECIR.BPD.B EMM-J8-CH6

PD.A Circuit A Pumpdown Pressure Transducer Pressure Transducer PRESSURECIR.APD.A EMM-J8-CH5

HRS.B Circuit B Liquid Subcooling — TEMPERATURECIR.BHRS.B —

HRS.A Circuit A Liquid Subcooling — TEMPERATURECIR.AHRS.A —

HRT.B Circuit B Liquid Temperature Temperature TEMPERATURE CIR.BHRT.B EMM-J5-CH4

HRT.A Circuit A Liquid Temperature Temperature TEMPERATURE CIR.AHRT.A EMM-J5-CH3

HEWT Heat Reclaim Entering Fluid Temperature TEMPERATUREUNITHEWT EMM-J5-CH2

HLWT Heat Reclaim Leaving Fluid Temperature TEMPERATUREUNITHLWT EMM-J5-CH1

C.FLO Condenser Flow Switch Status Switch INPUTSGEN.IC.FLO EMM-J5-CH15

— Power (24 vac supply) — — EMM-J1-CH11,12

— Local Equipment Network — — EMM-J9

OUTPUT DESCRIPTION I/O TYPE I/O POINT NAME CONNECTION POINT

Condenser 0-10 VDC Water Valve Output 0-10 VDC — EMM-J8-CH7

CND.P Heat Reclaim Condenser Pump Status Contactor OUTPUTSGEN.OCND.P EMM-J2-CH16

CN.HT Heat Reclaim Condenser Heater Contactor OUTPUTSGEN.OCN.HT EMM-J2-CH17

HR2.A Circuit A, Leaving Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR2.A EMM-J2-CH18

HR2.B Circuit B, Leaving Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR2.B EMM-J2-CH19

HR3.A Circuit A, Entering Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR3.A EMM-J2-CH20

HR3.B Circuit B, Entering Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR3.B EMM-J2-CH21

HR4.A Circuit A, Leaving Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR4.A EMM-J2-CH22

HR4.B Circuit B, Leaving Water-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR4.B EMM-J2-CH23

HR1.A Circuit A, Entering Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.AHR1.A EMM-J3-CH24

HR1.B Circuit B, Entering Air-Cooled Cond Solenoid Contactor OUTPUTSCIR.BHR1.B EMM-J3-CH25

Fig. 10 — ComfortLink CCN Communication Wiring

*Registered trademark of DuPont.

Table 12 — CCN Communication Bus Wiring

When connecting to a CCN communication bus, use a col-

or-coding scheme for the entire network to simplify the instal-

lation. It is recommended that red be used for the signal posi-

tive, black for the signal negative, and white for the signal

ground. Use a similar scheme for cables containing different

colored wires.

At each system element, tie the shields of its communica-

tion bus cables together. If the communication bus is entirely

within one building, the resulting continuous shield must be

connected to a ground at one point only. If the communication

bus cable exits from one building and enters another, the

shields must be connected to grounds at the lightning suppres-

sor in each building where the cable enters or exits the building

(one point per building only). To connect the unit to the net-

work:

1. Turn off power to the control box.

2. Cut the CCN wire and strip the ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black (–) conductors. (Substitute appropri-

ate colors for different colored cables.)

3. Connect the red wire to (+) terminal on TB3 of the plug,

the white wire to COM terminal, and the black wire to the

(–) terminal.

4. The RJ14 CCN connector on TB3 can also be used, but is

only intended for temporary connection (for example, a

laptop computer running Service Tool).

Configuration Options — The unit Remote-OFF-En-

able switch must be in the OFF position while making changes.

If the unit switch is not in the OFF position, REJECTED may

be displayed on the scrolling marquee display.

MINIMUM LOAD CONTROL (ConfigurationUNIT

HGBP) reduces the capacity of the 30RB chiller below the

lowest standard capacity step by use of hot gas bypass. This

capacity step reduction provides more precise control of the

leaving water temperature. The minimum load valve acces-

sory cannot be used on units configured for brine as the

cooler fluid type (Configuration→ SERV→FLUD). Refer

to Brine Chiller Operation for additional information.

Minimum Load Control can be configured in three different

ways. If Minimum Load Control is not used, HGBP must be

set to 0. If HGBP is set to 1, the control will activate the mini-

mum load control valve when the machine is started only. This

will be the first step of capacity. If HGBP is set to 2, all stages

of capacity can utilize the minimum load control valve. If

HGBP is set to 3, the minimum load control valve will be used

only when the circuit has a high pressure override active. This

will reduce the capacity of the circuit.

RAMP LOADING (ConfigurationOPTNRL.S) limits

the rate of change of leaving fluid temperature. If the unit is in

a Cooling mode and configured for Ramp Loading, the control

makes 2 comparisons before deciding to change stages of

capacity. The control calculates a temperature difference

between the control point and leaving fluid temperature. If the

difference is greater than 4° F (2.2° C) and the rate of change

(°F or °C per minute) is more than the configured Cool Ramp

Loading (SetpointsCOOLCRMP), the control does not

allow any changes to the current stage of capacity.

MINUTES OFF TIME (ConfigurationOPTNDELY) is

a time delay added to the start when the machine is com-

manded ON. This is a field configurable item from 1 to

15 minutes. The factory default is 1 minute. This feature is

useful when multiple units are installed. Staggering the start

will reduce the inrush potential.

Dual Chiller Control — The dual chiller routine is

available for the control of two parallel units supplying chilled

fluid on a common loop. This control is designed for a parallel

fluid flow arrangement only. One chiller must be configured as

the master chiller, the other as the slave chiller. An additional

leaving fluid temperature thermistor (dual chiller LWT) must

be installed in the common chilled water piping as described in

the Installation Instructions for both the master and slave

chillers. See the Field Wiring section in the 30RB Installation

Instructions for dual chiller LWT sensor control wiring. A

chilled water flow switch is factory-installed for each chiller.

Parallel chiller control with dedicated pumps is recom-

mended. Chiller must start and stop its own water pump locat-

ed on its own piping. If pumps are not dedicated for each

chiller, chiller isolation valves are required: each chiller must

open and close its own isolation valve through the control

(valve shall be connected to the pump outputs). Pump Control

is enabled as described in the Cooler Pump Control section on

page 29. One additional parameter is set for the dual chiller

control. Lag Unit Pump Select (ConfigurationRSET

LAGP) allows the user to configure the control to energize

the pump for the lag chiller once the unit enters an occupied

time period or delay the control until the lag chiller is started. It

is recommended that this parameter be set to 0, OFF IF UNIT

STOPPED. The control of the slave chiller is directed through

commands emitted by the master chiller. The slave chiller has

no action in master/slave operations; it shall only verify that

CCN communication with its master is present. See the Dual

Chiller Sequence of Operation section on page 45.

Use dual chiller control to designate a lead chiller between

the master and slave chiller. Configure the Lead/Lag Balance

Select (ConfigurationRSETLLBL) to ENBL to base the

selection on the Lead/Lag Balance Delta (Configuration

RSETLLBD) between the master and slave run hours. If

the run hour difference between the master and the slave

remains less than LLBD, the chiller designated as the lead will

remain the lead chiller. The Lead/Lag changeover between the

master and the slave chiller due to hour balance will occur dur-

ing chiller operating odd days, such as day 1, day 3, and day 5

of the month, at 12:00 a.m. If a lead chiller is not designated,

the master chiller will always be designated the lead chiller.

The dual chiller control algorithm has the ability to delay

the start of the lag chiller in two ways. The Lead Pulldown

Time (ConfigurationRSETLPUL) provides a field con-

figurable time delay of 0 to 60 minutes. This time delay gives

the lead chiller a chance to remove the heat that the chilled wa-

ter loop picked up while being inactive during an unoccupied

period. The Lead Pulldown Time parameter is a one-time time

delay initiated after starting the lead chiller, manually or by a

schedule, before checking whether to start an additional chiller.

This routine provides the lead chiller an opportunity to pull

down the loop temperature before starting another chiller. The

second time delay, Lead/Lag Delay (Configuration

RSETLLDY) is a time delay imposed between the last

stage of the lead chiller and the start of the lag chiller. This pre-

vents enabling the lag chiller until the lead/lag delay timer has

expired. See Tables 13 and 14.

MANUFACTURER

PART NUMBER

Regular Wiring Plenum Wiring

Alpha 1895 —

American A21451 A48301

Belden 8205 884421

Columbia D6451 —

Manhattan M13402 M64430

Quabik 6130 —

IMPORTANT: A shorted CCN bus cable will prevent

some routines from running and may prevent the unit

from starting. If abnormal conditions occur, discon-

nect the CCN bus. If conditions return to normal,

check the CCN connector and cable. Run new cable if

necessary. A short in one section of the bus can cause

problems with all system elements on the bus.

Table 13 — Configuring the Master Chiller

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

CCNA CCN Address

Confirm address of chiller. The master and slave chiller

must have different addresses.

1 Factory default address is 1.

CCNA

CCNB CCN Bus Number

Confirm the bus number of the chiller. The master and slave

chiller must be on the same bus.

0 Factory default is 0.

CCNB

OPTN

RSET

Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

MSSL Master/Slave Select

0 Disable

0 Disable Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password.

1 Master Use up arrows to change value to 1.

1 Accepts the change.

MSSL

SLVA Slave Address

1 Flashing to indicate Edit mode.

Use up arrows to change value to 2. This address must

match the address of the slave chiller.

2 Accepts the change.

SLVA

LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select

ENBL Factory Default is ENBL

LLBL

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta

168 Factory Default is 168.

LLBD

LLDY Lead/Lag Start Delay

10 Factory Default is 10.

LLDY

LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select

0 Off if U Stp

Factory Default is 0, Off if unit is stopped. Master and slave

chiller must be configured to the same value.

LAGP

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time

0 Factory Default is 0.

At mode level.

OPERATING

MODES

SLCT

OPER

Operating Control Type

0 Switch Control

Master chiller should be configured for job requirements,

Switch Control, Time Schedule, or CCN.

At mode level.

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

Table 14 — Configuring the Slave Chiller

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

CCNA CCN Address Confirm address of chiller. The master and slave chiller

must have different addresses.

1 Factory default address is 1. The slave chiller address

must match what was programmed in the Master Chiller

SLVA item.

1 Flashing to indicate Edit Mode.

2 This item must match Master Chiller SLVA item.

2 Accepts the change.

CCNA

CCNB CCN Bus Number Confirm the bus number of the chiller. The master and

slave chiller must be on the same bus.

0 Factory default bus number is 0.

CCNB

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

x 5 MSSL Master/Slave Select

0 Disable

0 Disable Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

2 Slave Use up arrows to change value to 2.

2 Accepts the change.

MSSL

SLVA Slave Address Not required.

LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select Not required.

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta Not required.

LLDY Lead/Lag Start Delay Not required.

LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select Must be configured to the same value as the master

chiller.

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time Not required.

At mode level

OPERATING MODES

SLCT

OPER Operating Control Type

0 Switch Control

0 Flashing to indicate Edit Mode.

2 CCN Control Use up arrows to change value to 2.

NOTE: Slave chiller must be configured for CCN.

2 Accepts the value.

OPER

At mode level

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

The Lag Unit Pump Select configuration must be set

consistently. If pump control is NOT being used, set Con-

figurationRSETLAGP to 1. If pump control IS being

used, set ConfigurationRSETLAGP to 0, which is the

default value. This must be set in both the master and slave

chillers, and it must be consistent in both.

Capacity Control — The control system cycles com-

pressors and minimum load valve solenoids (if equipped) to

maintain the user-configured leaving chilled fluid temperature

set point. Entering fluid temperature is used by the main base

board (MBB) to determine the temperature drop across the

cooler and is used in determining the optimum time to add or

subtract capacity stages. Entering fluid temperature, space

temperature (requires additional sensor), or outdoor-air temper-

ature reset features can automatically reset the leaving chilled

fluid temperature set point. It can also be reset from an external

4 to 20-mA signal (requires energy management module).

The control has an automatic lead-lag feature built in for

circuit and compressor starts. If enabled, the control will deter-

mine which circuit (ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0) and

compressor to start to even the wear. The compressor wear

factor (combination of starts and run hours) is used to deter-

mine which compressor starts.

Compressor Wear Factor = (Compressor Starts) + 0.1

(Compressor Run Hours)

In this case, the circuit with the lowest average compressor

wear factor (the average of the wear factors of all available

compressors in the circuit) is the circuit that starts first. The

compressor within the circuit with the lowest wear factor is the

first to start. If the automatic lead-lag function for the circuit is

not enabled [ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=1 (Circuit A

leads), 2 (Circuit B leads), or 3 (Circuit C leads)], then the se-

lected circuit will be the first to start. Again, the compressor

with the lowest wear factor within the circuit will be the first to

start. If Minimum Load Control is enabled (Configuration

UNITHGBP=1), the valve will be operational only during

the first stage of cooling.

Once the lead compressor has been started, the lag compres-

sors will be determined by the wear factor and loading

sequence selected. If equal loading is selected, (Configura-

tionOPTNLOAD=0), the circuit with the lowest average

wear factor for the available compressors will start next, with

the compressor with the lowest wear factor starting. The con-

trol will attempt to keep all circuits at approximately the same

number of compressors ON. For this option to function proper-

ly, all circuits must have the same number of compressors

available. If a circuit compressor is not available due to an

alarm condition or demand limit, the capacity staging will

change to staged. If staged loading is selected, (Configura-

tionOPTNLOAD=1), the started circuit will continue to

turn on compressors according to the lowest wear factor until

all are on, then start the next circuit with the lowest average

wear factor. If Minimum Load Control is enabled for close

control (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=2), the valve will be

available at all stages for better temperature control. If

Minimum Load Control is enabled for high ambient control

(ConfigurationUNITHGBP=3), the valve will be used

only when a high pressure override is active for that circuit.

The electronic expansion valves provide a controlled start-

up. During start-up, the low pressure logic in the lead circuit

will be ignored for 5 minutes to allow for the transient changes

during start-up. As additional stages of compression are

required, the processor control will add them. The following

example is based on a 30RB225 machine, which has three

25-ton compressors in each circuit. See Table 15.

Each example below has different configurations and is

intended to illustrate the loading sequences possible for normal

operation.

In Example 1 (Table 16), assume the following configurations

are in place:

ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1. . Minimum Load Control

installed and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=0 . . .Equal Circuit Loading

ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0 . .Automatic Circuit Select

Since Circuit A has the lowest average wear factor, it will be

the lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor A3 has the

lowest wear factor and will start first with Minimum Load

Control ON. The next stage will turn OFF the minimum load

control. Stage 3 will start another circuit because of the Equal

Circuit Loading configuration. The next circuit with the lowest

wear factor is Circuit B, and the compressor with the lowest

wear factor is B2. The next stage will be a circuit C compres-

sor. The process continues until all compressors are ON. See

Table 16.

In Example 2 (Table 17), assume the compressor starts and

run hours are the same as in the previous example and the

following configurations are in place:

ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1. . Minimum Load Control

installed and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1 . . Staged Circuit Loading

ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=0 . .Automatic Circuit Select

Since Circuit A has the lowest average wear factor, it will be

the lead circuit. Within the circuit, compressor A3 has the

lowest wear factor and will start first with Minimum Load

Control ON. The next stage will turn OFF the minimum load

control. Stage 3 will start a compressor in the same circuit be-

cause of the Staged Circuit Loading configuration. Compressor

A2 has the next lowest wear factor and will be started next.

Compressor A3 will be next to start. Since all compressors in

Circuit A are ON, the next stage will start another circuit. Of

the remaining circuits, Circuit B has the lowest wear factor, and

the compressor with the lowest wear factor is B2. All of the

Circuit B compressors will be started in the same manner as

Circuit A. Once all Circuit B compressors are ON, then Circuit

C will be started. The process continues until all compressors

are ON. See Table 17.

Table 15 — Compressor Starts and Run Hours

COMPRESSOR STARTS RUN HOURS WEAR FACTOR

CIRCUIT AVERAGE

WEAR FACTOR

A1 25 249 49.9

44.8A2 22 237 45.7

A3 26 128 38.8

B1 41 453 86.3

67.6B2 38 138 51.8

B3 35 297 64.7

C1 93 103 103.3

80.3C2 57 98 66.8

C3 61 99 70.9

Table 16 — Compressor Stages and Circuit Cycling, Example 1

LEGEND NOTES:

1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity)

are approximate percentage values.

2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit

loading, and automatic circuit select.

Table 17 — Compressor Stage and Circuit Cycling, Example 2

LEGEND NOTES:

1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity)

are approximate percentage values.

2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit

loading, and automatic circuit select.

In Example 3 (Table 18), assume the following configurations

are in place:

ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 . . Minimum Load Control

installed and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=0. . . Equal Circuit Loading

ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=2 . . . . . . . . . Circuit B Leads

Since Circuit B has been selected, it will be the lead circuit.

Within the circuit, compressor B2 has the lowest wear factor

and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next

stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will

start another circuit because of the Equal Circuit Loading

configuration. Comparing Circuit A and C, the circuit with the

lowest average wear factor is Circuit A, and the compressor

with the lowest wear factor is A3. The next stage will be a

circuit C compressor. The process continues until all compres-

sors are ON. See Table 18.

In Example 4 (Table 19), assume the compressor starts and

run hours are the same as in the first example and the following

configurations are in place:

ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1 . . Minimum Load Control

installed and enabled for Start-Up Only

ConfigurationOPTNLOAD=1. . .Staged Circuit Loading

ConfigurationOPTNLLCS=3 . . . . . . . . . Circuit C Leads

Since Circuit C has been selected, it will be the lead circuit.

Within the circuit, compressor C2 has the lowest wear factor

and will start first with Minimum Load Control ON. The next

stage will turn OFF the minimum load control. Stage 3 will

start a compressor in the same circuit because of the Staged

Circuit Loading configuration. Compressor C3 has the next

lowest wear factor and will be started next. Compressor C1

will be next to start. Since all compressors in Circuit C are ON,

the next stage will start another circuit. Of the remaining

circuits, Circuit A has the lowest wear factor, and the compres-

sor with the lowest wear factor is A3. All of the Circuit A com-

pressors will be started in the same manner as Circuit C. Once

all Circuit A compressors are ON, then Circuit B will be start-

ed. The process continues until all compressors are ON. See

Table 19.

If the circuit capacity is to be reduced, the compressor with

the highest wear factor will be shut off first (in most cases).

With Equal Circuit Loading, stages will be removed from each

circuit, following the same criteria used in the loading

sequence, but in the opposite order. Shown in Table 19 based

on the current wear factor in the opposite to the loading

sequence shown above, the compressor with the highest wear

factor will be removed first. When Staged Circuit Loading is

selected, the capacity from the last lag circuit will be removed

first.

STAGE

TOTAL

CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C

Cir.

Cap.

MLC A1 A2 A3

Cir.

Cap.

MLC B1 B2 B3

Cir.

Cap.

MLC C1 C2 C3

0 00 0 0

1 824X X0 0

2 11 33 X 0 0

3 22 33 X 33 X 0

4 33 33 X 33 X 33 X

5 44 66 X X 33 X 33 X

6 55 66 X X 66 X X 33 X

7 66 66 X X 66 X X 66 X X

8 77 100 X X X 66 X X 66 X X

9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC — Minimum Load Control

STAGE

TOTAL

CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C

Cir.

Cap.

MLC A1 A2 A3

Cir.

Cap.

MLC B1 B2 B3

Cir.

Cap.

MLC C1 C2 C3

0 00 0 0

1 824X X 0 0

2 11 33 X 0 0

3 22 66 X X 0 0

4 33 100 X X X 0 0

5 44 100 X X X 33 X 0

6 55 100 X X X 66 X X 0

7 66 100 X X X 100 X X X 0

8 77 100 X X X 100 X X X 33 X

9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC — Minimum Load Control

Table 18 — Compressor Stage and Circuit Cycling, Example 3

LEGEND NOTES:

1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity)

are approximate percentage values.

2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit

loading, and automatic circuit select.

Table 19 — Compressor Stage and Circuit Cycling, Example 4

LEGEND NOTES:

1. Total Cap. (Total Unit Capacity) and Cir. Cap. (Circuit Capacity)

are approximate percentage values.

2. Example is to determine minimum load control, staged circuit

loading, and automatic circuit select.

The capacity control algorithm runs every 30 seconds. The

algorithm attempts to maintain the Control Point at the desired

set point. Each time it runs, the control reads the entering and

leaving fluid temperatures. The control determines the rate at

which conditions are changing and calculates 2 variables based

on these conditions. Next, a capacity ratio (SM2) is calculated

using the 2 variables to determine whether or not to make any

changes to the current stages of capacity. This ratio value

ranges from –100 to +100%. If the next stage of capacity is a

compressor, the control starts (stops) a compressor when the

ratio reaches +100% (–100%). If the next stage of capacity

is the Minimum Load Control, the control energizes (deener-

gizes) the Minimum Load Control when the ratio reaches

+60% (–60%). If installed, the minimum load valve solenoid

will be energized with the first stage of capacity. The control

will also use the minimum load valve solenoid as the last stage

of capacity before turning off the last compressor. If the close

control feature (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=2) is en-

abled the control will use the minimum load valve solenoid

whenever possible to fine tune leaving fluid temperature con-

trol. A delay of 90 seconds occurs after each capacity step

change with Minimum Load Control. A delay of 3 minutes oc-

curs after each compressor capacity step change.

BRINE CHILLER OPERATION — For chiller sizes 120 to

390 with the factory-installed brine option, discharge and liq-

uid line solenoids are added to all circuits (Circuit B only for

size 120). The control system must be correctly configured for

proper operation. The minimum load valve option must be en-

abled (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=1) and the fluid type

must be set to medium temperature brine (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2). The Minimum Load Valve output is

used to control the discharge and liquid line solenoid valves.

As a result, Minimum Load Control (Hot Gas Bypass) cannot

be utilized on brine duty chillers. The discharge and liquid line

solenoid valves are wired in parallel so they will both open and

close at the same time. The main function of the solenoid

valves is to isolate a portion of the condenser section when

only a single compressor is running to allow for proper oil re-

turn to the compressors. A chart showing solenoid operation is

shown below:

NOTE: Minimum load valve (HGBP) cannot be utilized if

fluid type is set to medium temperature brine (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2).

STAGE

TOTAL

CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C

Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir. Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3

0 00 0 0

1 80X 24X X 0

2 11 0 33 X 0

3 22 33 X 33 X 0

4 33 33 X 33 X 33 X

5 44 33 X 66 X X 33 X

6 55 66 X X 66 X X 33 X

7 66 66 X X 66 X X 66 X X

8 77 66 X X 100 X X X 66 X X

9 88 100 X X X 100 X X X 66 X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC — Minimum Load Control

STAGE

TOTAL

CAP.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C

Cir. Cap. MLC A1 A2 A3 Cir. Cap. MLC B1 B2 B3 Cir. Cap. MLC C1 C2 C3

0 00 0 0

1 80 0 24X X

2 11 0 0 33 X

3 22 0 0 66 X X

4 33 0 0 100 X X X

5 44 33 X 0 100 X X X

6 55 66 X X 0 100 X X X

7 66 100 X X X 0 100 X X X

8 77 100 X X X 33 X 100 X X X

9 88 100 X X X 66 X X 100 X X X

10 100 100 X X X 100 X X X 100 X X X

MLC — Minimum Load Control

CIRCUIT CAPACITY

DISCHARGE/LIQUID SOLENOID

VALVE OPERATION

All compressors off Solenoids energized

One compressor starting Solenoids deenergized after

30-second delay

Two or more compressors

running

Solenoids energized

Reduction from two to one

compressor running

Solenoids deenergized with no

delay

CAPACITY CONTROL OVERRIDES — The following ca-

pacity control overrides (Run StatusVIEWCAP.S) will

modify the normal operation routine. If any of the following

override conditions listed below is satisfied, it will determine the

capacity change instead of the normal control.

Override #1: Cooler Freeze Protection — This override at-

tempts to avoid the freeze protection alarm. If the Leaving

Water Temperature is less than Brine Freeze Set Point

(ConfigurationSERVLOSP) + 2.0° F (1.1º C) then re-

move a stage of capacity.

NOTE: The freeze set point is 34 F (1.1 C) for fresh water

systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The freeze set

point is Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERV

LOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine systems (Configu-

rationSERVFLUD=2).

Override #2: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction Temperature

in Cooling

Override #3: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction Temperature

in Cooling

Override #4: Circuit C Low Saturated Suction Temperature

in Cooling — These overrides attempt to avoid the low suction

temperature alarms. This override is active only when more

than one compressor in a circuit is ON. If the Saturated Suction

Temperature is less than Brine Freeze Set Point (Configura-

tionSERVLOSP) –18.0 F (–10 C) for 90 seconds, or the

Saturated Suction Temperature is less than –4 F (–20 C), a

compressor in the affected circuit will be turned off.

Override #5: Low Temperature Cooling — This override re-

moves one stage of capacity when the difference between the

Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT) and the Leaving

Water Temperature (Run StatusVIEWLWT) reaches a

predetermined limit and the rate of change of the water is 0 or

still decreasing.

Override #6: Low Temperature Cooling — This override re-

moves two stages of capacity when the Entering Water

Temperature (Run StatusVIEWEWT) is less than the

Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT.)

Override #7: Ramp Loading — If the unit is configured for

ramp loading (ConfigurationOPTNRL.S=ENBL) and if

the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature and the

Control Point is greater than 4º F (2.2º C) and the rate of

change of the leaving water is greater than Cool Ramp Loading

Rate (SetpointsCOOLCRMP) then no capacity stage

increase will be made. Operating mode 5 (MD05) will be in

effect.

Override #8: Service Manual Test Override — The manual

test consists in adding a stage of capacity every 30 seconds, un-

til the control enables all of the requested compressors and

Minimum Load Control selected in the ComfortLink display

Service Test menu. All safeties and higher priority overrides

are monitored and acted upon.

Override # 9: Demand Limit — This override mode is active

when a command to limit the capacity is received. If the

current unit capacity is greater than the active capacity limit

value, a stage is removed. If the current capacity is lower than

the capacity limit value, the control will not add a stage that

will result in the new capacity being greater then the capacity

limit value. Operating mode 4 (MD04) will be in effect.

Override #10: Cooler Interlock Override — This override

prohibits compressor operation until the Cooler Interlock

(InputsGEN.ILOCK) is closed.

Override #11: High Temperature Cooling — This override

algorithm runs once when the unit is switched to ON. If the dif-

ference between the Leaving Water Temperature (Run Status

VIEWLWT) and the Control Point (Run Status

VIEWCTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the rate of

change of the water temperature is greater than –0.1º F/min, a

stage will be added.

Override #12: High Temperature Cooling — This override

runs only when Minimum Load Control is Enabled (Configu-

rationUNITHGBP = 1, 2 or 3). This override will add a

stage of capacity if the next stage is Minimum Load Control,

when the difference between the Leaving Water Temperature

(Run StatusVIEWLWT) and the Control Point (Run

StatusVIEWCTPT) exceeds a calculated value and the

rate of change of the water temperature is greater than a fixed

value.

Override #13: Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay —

Whenever a capacity step change has been made, either with

Minimum Load Control or a compressor, the control will re-

main at this capacity stage for the next 90 seconds. During this

time, no capacity control algorithm calculations will be made.

If the capacity step is a compressor, an additional 90-second

delay is added to the previous hold time (see Override #22).

This override allows the system to stabilize before another

capacity stage is added or removed. If a condition of a higher

priority override occurs, the higher priority override will take

precedence.

Override #14: Slow Change Override — This override pre-

vents compressor stage changes when the leaving temperature

is close to the control point and slowly moving towards the

control point.

Override #15: System Manager Capacity Control — If a

Chillervisor module is controlling the unit and the Chillervisor

module is controlling multiple chillers, the unit will add a stage

to attempt to load to the demand limited value.

Override #16: Circuit A High Pressure Override

Override #17: Circuit B High Pressure Override

Override #18: Circuit C High Pressure Override — This over-

ride attempts to avoid a high pressure failure. The algorithm is

run every 4 seconds. At least one compressor must be on in the

circuit. If the Saturated Condensing Temperature for the circuit

is above the High Pressure Threshold (Configuration

SERVHP.TH) then a compressor for that circuit will

be removed. If Minimum Load Control was enabled for

High Ambient (ConfigurationUNITHGBP=3), then the

Minimum Control Valve will be energized.

Override #19: Standby Mode — This override algorithm will

not allow a compressor to run if the unit is in Standby mode,

(Run StatusVIEWHC.ST=2).

Override #22: Minimum On Time Delay — In addition to

Override #13 Minimum On/Off and Off/On Time Delay, for

compressor capacity changes, an additional 90-second delay

will be added to Override #13 delay. No compressor will be

deenergized until 3 minutes have elapsed since the last com-

pressor has been turned ON. When this override is active, the

capacity control algorithm calculations will be performed, but

no capacity reduction will be made until the timer has expired.

A control with higher precedence will override the Minimum

On Time Delay.

Override #23: Circuit A Low Saturated Suction

Temperature in Cooling

Override #24: Circuit B Low Saturated Suction

Temperature in Cooling

Override #25: Circuit C Low Saturated Suction

Temperature in Cooling — If the circuit is operating in an

area close to the operational limit of the compressor, the circuit

capacity will remain at the same point or unload to raise the sat-

urated suction temperature. This algorithm will be active if at

least one compressor in the circuit is on and one of the follow-

ing conditions is true:

1. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze

(ConfigurationSERVLOSP) – 6º F (3.3º C).

2. Saturated Suction Temperature is less than Brine Freeze

(ConfigurationSERVLOSP) and the circuit ap-

proach (Leaving Water Temperature – Saturated Suction

Temperature) is greater than 15º F (8.3º C) and the Circuit

Superheat (Return Gas Temperature – Saturated Suction

Temperature) is greater than 15º F (8.3º C).

NOTE: The freeze set point is 34 F (1.1 C) for fresh

water systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The

freeze set point is Brine Freeze Set Point (Configuration

SERVLOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine

systems (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2).

If any of these conditions are met, the appropriate operating

mode, 21 (Circuit A), 22 (Circuit B) or 23 (Circuit C) will be in

effect.

Override #26: Circuit A Operation Outside Compressor

Operating Envelope

Override #27: Circuit B Operation Outside Compressor

Operating Envelope

Override #28: Circuit C Operation Outside Compressor

Operating Envelope — This override prevents compressor op-

eration outside of its operating envelope.

1. If the mean saturated discharge temperature (SDT) is

greater than 7° F (3.9° C) over the limit, the circuit is un-

loaded immediately.

2. If the mean SDT is over the limit (but not greater than

7° F (3.9° C) over the limit) for 90 seconds, then the cir-

cuit is unloaded.

3. If the mean SDT is more than the limit minus 2° F

(1.1° C), the circuit is prevented from loading. This over-

ride shall remain active until the mean pressure goes be-

low the limit minus 3° F (1.7° C).

Override #34: Circuit A Low Refrigerant Charge

Override #35: Circuit B Low Refrigerant Charge

Override #36: Circuit C Low Refrigerant Charge — The ca-

pacity override attempts to protect the compressor from

starting with no refrigerant in the circuit. This algorithm runs

only when the circuit is not operational, (no compressors ON).

There are several criteria that will enable this override:

1. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than –13 F (–10.6 C).

2. All of these conditions must be true:

a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated

Discharge Temperature is less than Leaving Water

Temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than 41 F (5 C).

c. Outdoor Air Temperature is less than 32 F (0º C).

d. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than the Outdoor Air

Temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

3. All of these conditions must be true:

a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated

Discharge Temperature is less than Leaving Water

Temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than 41 F (5 C).

c. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than the Brine Freeze

Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) by more

than 6º F (3.3º C).

NOTE: The freeze set point is 34 F (1.1 C)

for fresh water systems (Configuration

SERVFLUD=1). The freeze set point is Brine

Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERV

LOSP), for Medium Temperature Brine systems

(ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2).

4. All of these conditions must be true:

a. The Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated

Discharge Temperature is less than Leaving Water

Temperature by more than 5.4º F (3.0º C).

b. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than 41 F (5 C).

c. Saturated Suction Temperature or Saturated Dis-

charge Temperature is less than the Outdoor Air

Temperature by more than 9º F (5º C).

If any of these conditions 1, 2, 3 or 4 are met, the appropri-

ate operating mode, 21 (Circuit A), 22 (Circuit B) or 23

(Circuit C) will be in effect.

Override #37: Circuit A Low Superheat

Override #38: Circuit B Low Superheat

Override #39: Circuit C Low Superheat — This override at-

tempts to avoid liquid slugging for the running compressors. It

also protects against operation with excessively high superheat.

No capacity steps will be added to the affected circuit until

there is a superheat greater than 5º F (2.8º C) and less than

45º F (25º C). If the capacity of the machine must be increased,

the control will look to another circuit for additional capacity.

Head Pressure Control

STANDARD UNIT — The main base board (MBB) controls

the condenser fans to maintain the lowest condensing tempera-

ture possible, and thus the highest unit efficiency. The MBB

uses the saturated condensing temperature input from the dis-

charge pressure transducer to control the fans. Head pressure

control is maintained through a calculated set point which is

automatically adjusted based on actual saturated condensing

and saturated suction temperatures so that the compressor(s) is

(are) always operating within the manufacturer’s specified en-

velope (see Fig. 11). Each time a fan is added the calculated

head pressure set point will be raised 25° F (13.9° C) for 35

seconds to allow the system to stabilize. The control will auto-

matically reduce the unit capacity as the saturated condensing

temperature approaches an upper limit. See capacity overrides

16-18. The control will indicate through an operating mode

that high ambient unloading is in effect. If the saturated con-

densing temperature in a circuit exceeds the calculated maxi-

mum, the circuit will be stopped. For these reasons, there are

no head pressure control methods or set points to enter. The

control will turn off a fan stage when the condensing tempera-

ture is below the minimum head pressure requirement for the

compressor. Fan sequences are shown in Fig. 12.

706050403020100-10

-20

-30

Evaporating Temperature (°F)

100

110

120

130

140

150

160

Condensing Temperature (°F)

Fig. 11 — Compressor Operating Envelope

a30-5292

Fig. 12 — Condenser Fan Staging (Standard Unit)

MODEL CIRCUIT

FANS/

CKT

LOCATION

FAN STAGE

12345

30RB060,070,080

060,070

Fan Number FM1 FM2 FM3 — —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 — —

FanNumber FM4————

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 ————

080

Fan Number FM1 FM2 — — —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 — — —

Fan Number FM3 FM4 — — —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 — — —

30RB090,100,110

090,100,

110

Fan Number FM1 FM2 FM3 — —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 — —

Fan Number FM5 FM6 FM4 — —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 — —

30RB120

120

Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM2 — —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 — —

Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6 —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8 —

30RB130,150

130,150

Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 —

Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6 —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8 —

30RB160,170

160,170

Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

Fan Number FM9 FM7 FM10 FM8 —

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 —

30RB190,210,225

190

Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM7

FM10

FM12

FM8

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5

210,225

Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 —

Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6 —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8 —

Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM12 FM10 —

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4 —

30RB250

250

Fan Number FM3 FM1 FM4 FM2 —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 —

Fan Number FM7 FM5 FM8 FM6 —

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH5 FB1/CH6 FB1/CH7 FB1/CH8 —

Fan Number FM13 FM11 FM9

FM12

FM14

FM10

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4 FB3/CH5

30RB275

275

Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM7

FM10

FM12

FM8

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5

Fan Number FM15 FM13 FM16 FM14 —

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4 —

30RB300

300

Fan Number FM5 FM3 FM1 FM4 FM6 FM2

Fan Board/Channel FB1/CH1 FB1/CH2 FB1/CH3 FB1/CH4 FB1/CH5

Fan Number FM11 FM9 FM7

FM10

FM12

FM8

Fan Board/Channel FB2/CH1 FB2/CH2 FB2/CH3 FB2/CH4 FB2/CH5

Fan Number FM17 FM15 FM13

FM16

FM18

FM14

Fan Board/Channel FB3/CH1 FB3/CH2 FB3/CH3 FB3/CH4 FB3/CH5

FM1

FM2

CONTROL

BOX

FM3

FM4

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3 FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM13

FM14

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM13

FM14

FM15

FM16

FM1

CONTROL

BOX

FM2

FM3

FM4

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

FM9

FM10

FM11

FM12

FM13

FM14

FM15

FM16

FM17

FM18

LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE

CONTROL OPTION — For low-ambient operation, the lead

fan on a circuit can be equipped with low ambient temperature

head pressure control option or accessory. The Danfoss VLT

controller adjusts fan speed to maintain the calculated head

pressure set point. Table 20 lists required configurations for

Danfoss VLT low ambient head pressure control option.

Table 20 — Danfoss VLT Required Configurations,

Low Ambient Head Pressure Control Option

*208/230 v units should be configured for 208 v.

High-Efficiency Variable Condenser Fans

(HEVCF) (30RB080-390 with Greenspeed

Intel-

ligence) — This option controls the speed of all fans for

improvement in part load efficiency and sound levels. All fans

on a circuit are controlled by a VFD and run at the same speed.

Fan Drive Operation — The HEVCF option uses Danfoss

VLT 102 variable frequency drives. Drives are connected to the

LEN communication bus. Fan speed is determined by the chill-

er controller and communicated to the drive. Table 21 lists re-

quired configurations for the Danfoss VLT HEVCF option.

Table 21 — Danfoss VLT Required Configurations,

HEVCF Option

*208/230 v units should be configured for 208 v.

Fan speed is controlled to maintain SCT set point. The set

point is calculated from conditions and adjusted to the most ef-

ficient operating point. Fixed set points are also used at low

ambient and transition conditions. If the unit is operated in Ser-

vice Test mode, the SCT set point is fixed at 125 F (51.7 C) for

adjusting charge.

Drive parameters are set by the chiller control each time the

unit power is cycled with the exception of the drive address.

The drive address is set at the factory, but will have to be reset

in case of drive replacement. Addresses for the drives are

shown below:

The address is set using the display on the drive. See drive

manual for detailed instructions. Once the address is set, the

power is cycled to reset all other parameters in the drive. Other

parameters are listed in Tables 22 and 23 for reference. Drive

must be in “Auto” mode to operate. Push the “Auto” button at

the bottom of the drive. The light above it will be on.

The 208-230 v units with 6 condenser fans per circuit re-

quire two drives to operate the fans. See Table 24. They are set

up in a master/slave configuration. The master drive is con-

nected to the LEN bus as described above. The slave drive is

not connected to LEN. All parameters must be set manually if

the drive is replaced as shown in Table 25. The slave drive

does not have an address.

Fan motor troubleshooting should be done at the drive. Dis-

connect power from unit. Remove the entire front cover. Re-

move smaller panel covering terminal block at lower right cor-

ner of drive. See Fig. 13. Each fan wire is connected to a sepa-

rate terminal. Terminals are labeled and color coded to match

the fan wires. All terminals are connected in parallel. All ter-

minals of a certain color, or label, are the same point electrical-

ly. Disconnect each fan cable and check resistance of motor.

An open or short reading between phases or a phase and

ground could signify a failed fan motor. Verify reading at mo-

tor before replacing. Reconnect wires using color coding. Re-

place terminal block cover, drive cover, and power unit to test

fan operation.

Drive alarms are shown on the chiller controls as:

V0-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit A

V1-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit B

V2-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit C

The characters “xx” correspond to a specific alarm. Com-

mon alarms are listed in Table 26 with possible causes. For a

complete list of alarms and causes, see the drive manual sup-

plied with the chiller.

Drives and motors are protected by fuses for short circuit

protection. See the Service Test section for details. Fan motor

overload protection is provided by an overload device internal

to the motor. The motor overload responds to a combination of

temperature and current. On overload condition, the device

breaks all 3 phases to the motor. It will reset automatically

once the motor temperature cools.

NOTE: See Appendix G for Siemens and Schneider low ambi-

ent control information.

POINT

NAME

DESCRIPTION VALUE

VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A 1

VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B 1

VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C

0 (Unit sizes 060-190

and modular units

1 (Unit sizes 210-300

only)

VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 1

RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM 1140

FC Factory Country Code 1

VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Nameplate voltage

(208,380,460,575)*

POINT

NAME

DESCRIPTION VALUE

VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A No. of fans in ckt

VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B No. of fans in ckt

VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C

0 (Unit sizes 060-190

and modular units

No. of fans in ckt (Unit

sizes 210-300 only)

VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 2

RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM 1140

FC Factory Country Code 1

VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Nameplate voltage

(208,380,460,575)*

DRIVE ADDRESS

Drive Parameter Ckt A Ckt B Ckt C

8-31 181 182 183

Table 22 — HEVCF Parameters Reset at Chiller Power Cycle

Table 23 — HEVCF Parameters Common to All

Setups

Table 24 — 208-230 v Units with 6-Fan Circuits

Table 25 — HEVCF Parameters for 208-230 v Units

with 6 Fans per Circuit

*x = Circuit A, B, or C.

†See Drive Address table on page 27.

No. Fans

Per Circuit

PARAMETER

1-20 1-22 1-23 1-24 1-25

Motor Power (kW) Motor Volts

Motor Frequency

(Hz)

Motor Amps (A) Motor Speed (RPM)

1 2.6

208

11.9

1140

380 6.5

460 5.4

575 4.3

2 5.2

208

23.8

1140

380 13.0

460 10.8

575 8.6

3 7.8

208

35.7

1140

380 19.5

460 16.2

575 12.9

4 10.4

208

47.6

1140

380 26.0

460 21.6

575 17.2

6 15.6

208

71.4

1140

380 39.0

460 32.4

575 25.8

PARAMETER DESCRIPTION SETTING

0-02 Motor Speed Unit 1 = Hz

1-03 Torque Characteristic 1 = Variable Torque

1-73 Flying Restart 1 = Yes

1-80 Function Stop 0 = Coast

1-90 Motor Temp Protection 0 = No

1-91 Motor External Fan 0 = No

1-93 Thermistor SRC 0 = No

3-03 Max Ref 60

3-15 SRC Ref #1 1 = AI #53

3-16 SRC Ref #2 0 = No

3-41 Ramp Up 5 = 5 Seconds

3-42 Ramp Down 5 = 5 Seconds

4-10 Motor Speed Direction 0 = Clockwise

4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit 5

4-14 Motor Speed High Limit 61

4-16 Torque Limit Mode 225

4-18 Current Limit 110

4-19 Max Output Freq 61

5-12 DI #27 0 = No Operation

14-01 Switching Frequency 4

14-03 Overmodulation 1 = Yes

14-40 VT Level Zero Mag Level 66

14-60 Function at Overtemp 1 = Derate

8-04 Time-Out 2 = Stop

UNIT SIZE CIRCUIT

160-170 A

190 A, B, C

250 C

275 A, B

300 A, B, C

DRIVE

PARAMETER

FVDx-1* FVDx-2*

8-31 Address† —

3-02 — 0 = Min Ref.

3-03 — 60 = Max Ref.

3-15 — 1 = AI 53

3-41 — 5 = Ramp up

3-42 — 5 = Ramp Down

4-12 — 5 = Motor Min

4-14 — 61 = Motor Max

4-19 — 61 = Max Freq.

5-02 1 0 = Input

5-12 — 0 = No Oper.

5-31 5 —

6-12 — 4 = Low Current

6-13 — 20 = High Current

6-14 — 0 = Low Ref.

6-14 — 60 = High Ref.

6-50 131 = 4-20 —

6-51 0 = Min Scale —

6-52 100 = Max Scale —

8-30 20 0



1115

Table 26 — HEVCF Common Alarms

*x=0,1,or2.

Cooler Pump Control (ConfigurationOPTN

PUMP)—The 30RB units can be configured for cooler

pump control. Cooler Pumps Sequence is the variable that

must be confirmed in the field. Proper configuration of the

cooler pump control is required to provide reliable chiller oper-

ation. The factory default setting for Cooler Pumps Sequence is

PUMP=0 (no pump output), for units without the factory-in-

stalled hydronic package. For units with the hydronic package,

the factory default setting for Cooler Pumps Sequence is

PUMP=1 (1 pump only) for single pump units, or PUMP=2 (2

pumps auto) for dual pump units. For dual pump hydronic op-

tion units, three control options exist. If the Cooler Pumps Se-

quence (PUMP) is set to 2, the control will start the pumps and

automatically alternate the operation of the pumps to even the

wear of the pumps. If a flow failure is detected, the other pump

will attempt to start. Two manual control options also exist.

When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is set to PUMP=3 Cooler

Pump 1 will always operate. When the Cooler Pumps Se-

quence is set to PUMP=4 Cooler Pump 2 will always operate.

It is recommended for all chillers that the cooler pump con-

trol be utilized unless the chilled water pump runs continuously

or the chilled water system contains a suitable concentration of

antifreeze solution. When the Cooler Pumps Sequence is config-

ured, the cooler pump output will be energized when the chiller

enters an “ON” mode. The cooler pump output is also energized

when certain alarms are generated. The cooler pump output

should be used as an override to the external pump control if

cooler pump control is not utilized. The cooler pump output is

ALARM* DESCRIPTION POSSIBLE CAUSE, ACTION

Vx-04 Mains phase loss

Phase is missing or imbalance is too high on supply side. Check incoming wiring, drive

fuses, and incoming power to unit. This is also used for a fault in the input rectifier on the

frequency converter.

Vx-09 Inverter Overload

Frequency converter has cut out due to excessive current and temperature over a certain

time period. Check motors for locked rotor or shorts.

Vx-12 Torque Limit Motor torque limit has been exceeded. Check motor for locked rotor or fan restrictions.

Vx-13 Over Current Inverter peak current limit is exceeded. Check motor for locked rotor or fan restrictions.

Vx-14 Earth (ground) Fault

Current exists between output phases and ground. Check motors for short to ground.

Check wiring connections at fan motor terminal block at drive.

Vx-16 Short Circuit There is a short circuit in the motor wiring. Find the short circuit and repair.

Vx-17 Control Word Timeout

Drive is not communicating with chiller. Check LEN bus wiring connections. Assure

address is set properly.

Vx-29 Heatsink Temp

Heatsink has exceeded max temperature. Check drive fan operation and blockage of air-

flow to heatsink fins.

Vx-30 Motor Phase U Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase.

Vx-31 Motor Phase V Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase.

Vx-32 Motor Phase W Missing Check wiring and motor for missing phase.

Vx-34 Fieldbus Communication Fault Fieldbus on communication card in drive is not working.

Fig. 13 — Fan Terminal Cover and Terminal Block

a30-5666

a30-5667

energized if a P.01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection alarm is

generated, which provides additional freeze protection if the sys-

tem is not protected with a suitable antifreeze solution.

For all Cooler Pumps Sequence (PUMP) settings (including

0), closure of both the chilled water flow switch (CWFS) and

the chilled water pump interlock contact (connected across

TB-5 terminals 1 and 2) are required. In addition, for Cooler

Pumps Sequence settings of PUMP = 1, 2, 3, 4, normally open

auxiliary contacts for Pump 1 and Pump 2 (wired in parallel)

must be connected to the violet and pink wires located in the

harness from the MBB-J5C-CH18 connector. The wires in the

harness are marked “PMP1-13” and “PMP1-14.” See the field

wiring diagram in the 30RB Installation Instructions.

Regardless of the cooler pump control option selected, if

the chilled water flow switch/interlock does not close within

the MINUTES OFF TIME (ConfigurationOPTN

DELY) period after the unit is enabled and in an ON mode,

alarm P.14 will be generated.

Other conditions which will trigger this alarm include:

• Cooler pump interlock is open for at least 30 seconds

during chiller operation.

• Lag chiller in Master/Slave Control pump interlock does

not close after 1 minute of the pump start command.

• Cooler pump control is enabled and the chilled water

flow switch/interlock is closed for more than 2 minutes

following a command to shut down the pump.

The last alarm criterion can be disabled. If Flow Checked if

Pmp Off (ConfigurationOPTNP.LOC) is set to NO, the

control will ignore the pump interlock input if the cooler pump

output is OFF.

The ComfortLink controls have the ability to periodically

start the pumps to maintain the bearing lubrication and seal in-

tegrity. If Periodic Pump Start (Configuration

OPTNPM.PS) is set to YES, and if the unit is off at 2:00

PM, a pump will be started once each day for 2 seconds. If the

unit has 2 pumps, Pump 1 will be started on even days (such as

day 2, 4, or 6 of the month); Pump 2 will be started on odd

days. The default for this option is PM.PS=NO.

The pump will continue to run for 60 seconds after an off

command is issued.

Machine Control Methods — Three variables con-

trol how the machine operates. One variable controls the ma-

chine On-Off function. The second controls the set point opera-

tion. The third variable controls the Heat-Cool operation which

is always set to cool. Table 27 illustrates how the control meth-

od and cooling set point select variables direct the operation of

the chiller and the set point to which it controls. Table 27 also

provides the On/Off state of the machine for the given combi-

nations.

Machine On/Off control is determined by the configuration

of the Operating Type Control (Operating ModesSLCT

OPER). Options to control the machine locally via a switch,

on a local Time Schedule, or via a Carrier Comfort Network

command are offered.

SWITCH CONTROL — In this Operating Type Control, the

Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch controls the machine locally.

All models are factory configured with OPER=0 (Switch Con-

trol). With the OPER set to 0, simply switching the Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch to the Enable or Remote Contact

position (external contacts closed) will put the chiller in an occu-

pied state. The unit Occupied Status (Run Sta-

tusVIEWOCC) will change from NO to YES. The Status

Unit Control Type (Run StatusVIEWCTRL) will change

from 0 (Local Off) when the switch is Off to 1 (Local On) when

in the Enable position or Remote Contact position with external

contacts closed.

TIME SCHEDULE — In this Operating Type Control, the

machine operates under a local schedule programmed by the

user as long as the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch is in the

Enable or Remote Contact position (external contacts closed).

To operate under this Operating Type Control, Operating

ModesSLCT must be set to OPER=1. Two Internal Time

Schedules are available. Time Schedule 1 (Time Clock

SCH1) is used for single set point On-Off control. Time Sched-

ule 2 (Time ClockSCH2) is used for dual set point On-Off

and Occupied-Unoccupied set point control. The control will

use the operating schedules as defined under the Time Clock

mode in the scrolling marquee display.

CCN Global Time Schedule — A CCN Global Schedule can

be utilized. The schedule number can be set anywhere from 65

to 99 for operation under a CCN global schedule. The 30RB

chillers can be configured to follow a CCN Global Time

Schedule broadcast by another system element. The Comfort-

VIEW™ Network Manager’s Configure and Modify com-

mands or the Service Tool’s Modify/Names function must be

used to change the number of the Occupancy Equipment Part

Table Name (OCC1P01E) to the Global Schedule Number.

The Schedule Number can be set from 65 to 99 (OCC1P65E).

The Occupancy Supervisory Part table name (OCC1P01S)

number must be changed to configure the unit to broadcast a

Global Time Schedule. The Schedule Number can be set from

65 to 99 (OCC1P65S). When OCC1PxxS is set to a value great-

er than 64, an occupancy flag is broadcast over the CCN every

time it transitions from occupied to unoccupied or vice-versa.

By configuring their appropriate Time Schedule decisions to

the same number, other devices on the network can follow this

same schedule. The Enable/Off/Remote Contact must be in the

Enable position or Remote Contact position with the contacts

closed for the unit to operate. The Status Unit Control Type

(Run StatusVIEWSTAT) will be 0 (Local Off) when the

switch is Off. The Status Unit Control Type will be 2 (CCN)

when the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch input is On.

Table 27 — Control Methods and Cooling Set Points

— = No Effect

CCN CONTROL — An external CCN device such as

Chillervisor controls the On/Off state of the machine. This

CCN device forces the variable CHIL_S_S between Start/

Stop to control the chiller. The Status Unit Control Type (Run

StatusVIEWSTAT) will be 0 (Local Off) when the En-

able/Off/ Remote Contact switch is Off. The Status Unit Con-

trol Type will be 2 (CCN) when the Enable/Off/Remote Con-

tact switch is in the enable or remote contact position with ex-

ternal contacts closed and the CHIL_S_S variable is Stop or

Start.

UNIT RUN STATUS (Run StatusVIEWSTAT) — As

the unit transitions from off to on and back to off, the Unit Run

Status will change based on the unit’s operational status. The

variables are: 0 (Off), 1 (Running), 2 (Stopping), and 3 (Delay).

• 0 indicates the unit is Off due to the Enable/Off/Remote

Contact Switch, a time schedule or CCN command.

• 1 indicates the unit is operational.

• 2 indicates the unit is shutting down due to the command

to shut down from the Enable/Off/Remote Contact

Switch, a time schedule or CCN command.

• 3 indicates the unit has received a command to start from

Enable/Off/Remote Contact Switch, a time schedule or

CCN command, and is waiting for the start-up timer

(ConfigurationOPTNDELY) to expire.

Cooling Set Point Selection (Operating Modes

SLCTSP.SE)—Several options for controlling the

Leaving Chilled Water Set Point are offered and are configured

by the Cooling Set Point Select variables. In addition to the

Cooling Set Point Select, Ice Mode Enable (Configura-

tionOPTNICE.M), and Heat Cool Select (Operating

ModesSLCTHC.SE) variables also have a role in deter-

mining the set point of the machine. All units are shipped from

the factory with the Heat Cool Select variable set to HC.SE=0

(Cooling). All set points are based on Leaving Water Control,

(ConfigurationSERVEWTO=NO).

In all cases, there are limits on what values are allowed for

each set point. These values depend on the Cooler Fluid Type

(ConfigurationSERVFLUD) and the Brine Freeze Set

point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP). See Table 28.

Table 28 — Configuration Set Point Limits

*The minimum set point for Medium Temperature Brine applications

is related to the Brine Freeze Point. The set point is limited to be no

less than the Brine Freeze Point +5° F (2.8° C).

SET POINT 1 (Operating ModesSLCTSP.SE=1) —

When Set Point Select is configured to 1, the unit’s active set

point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set

PointCOOLCSP.1).

SET POINT 2 (Operating ModesSLCTSP.SE=2) —

When Set Point Select is configured to 2, the unit’s active set

point is based on Cooling Set Point 2 (Set

PointCOOLCSP.2).

4 TO 20 mA INPUT (Operating ModesSLCT

SP.SE=3) — When Set Point Select is configured to 3, the

unit’s active set point is based on an external 4 to 20 mA signal

input to the Energy Management Module (EMM).

See Table 27 for Control Methods and Cooling Set Points.

The following equation is used to control the set point. See

Fig. 14.

Set Point = 10 + 70(mA – 4)/16 (deg F)

Set Point = –12.2 + 38.9(mA – 4)/16 (deg C)

DUAL SWITCH (Operating ModesSLCTSP.SE=4) —

When Set Point Select is configured to 4, the unit’s active set

point is based on Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOL

CSP.1) when the Dual Set Point switch contacts are open and

Cooling Set Point 2 (Set PointCOOLCSP.2) when they

are closed.

Ice Mode — Operation of the machine to make and store ice

can be accomplished many ways. The Energy Management

Module and an Ice Done Switch are required for operation in

the Ice Mode. In this configuration, the machine can operate

with up to three cooling set points: Cooling Set Point 1 (Occu-

pied) (Set PointCOOLCSP.1), Cooling Set Point 2 (Un-

occupied) (Set PointCOOLCSP.2), and Ice Set Point

(Set PointCOOLCSP.3).

PARAMETER

ACTIVE

SET

POINT

Control Method

(OPER)

Heat Cool

Select

(HC.SE)

Setpoint Select

(SP.SE)

Ice Mode

Enable

(ICE.M)

Ice Done

(ICE.D)

Dual Setpoint

Switch (DUAL)

Setpoint

Occupied (SP.OC)

(Switch Ctrl)

(Cool)

(Setpoint1)

—— — — CSP.1

Enable Open Closed — CSP.3

(Setpoint2)

—— — — CSP.2

Enable Open Closed — CSP.3

(4-20mA Setp)

— — — — 4-20 mA

— Enable

Open

Open — CSP.1

Closed — CSP.3

Closed Closed — CSP.2

(Dual Setp Sw)

——

Open — CSP.1

Closed — CSP.2

Enabled

Open Closed — CSP.3

Closed Closed — CSP.2

(Time Sched)

(Cool)

(Setpoint Occ)

—— —

Occupied CSP.1

Unoccupied CSP.2

Enable

Open —

Unoccupied

CSP.3

Closed — CSP.2

(CCN)

(Cool)

—

——

— Occupied CSP.1

— Unoccupied CSP.2

Enable Open — Unoccupied CSP.3

SET POINT LIMIT

COOLER FLUID TYPE, FLUD

1 = Water 2 = Medium Brine

Minimum* 38 F (3.3 C) 14 F (–10.0 C)

Maximum 60 F (15.5 C)

SET POINT OCCUPANCY (Operating Modes

SLCTSP.SE=0) — When Set point Select is configured to

0, the unit’s active set point is based on Cooling Set Point 1

(Set PointCOOLCSP.1) during the occupied period while

operating under Time ClockSCH1. If the Time Clock

SCH2 is in use, the unit’s active set point is based on

Cooling Set Point 1 (Set PointCOOLCSP.1) during

the occupied period and Cooling Set Point 2 (Set Point

COOLCSP.2) during the unoccupied period.

Temperature Reset — Temperature reset is a value

added to the basic leaving fluid temperature set point. The sum

of these values is the control point. When a non-zero tempera-

ture reset is applied, the chiller controls to the control point,

not the set point. The control system is capable of handling

leaving-fluid temperature reset based on cooler fluid tempera-

ture difference. Because the change in temperature through the

cooler is a measure of the building load, the temperature differ-

ence reset is in effect an average building load reset method.

The control system is also capable of temperature reset based

on outdoor-air temperature (OAT), space temperature (SPT), or

from an externally powered 4 to 20 mA signal. An accessory

sensor must be used for SPT reset (33ZCT55SPT). The energy

management module (EMM) is required for temperature reset

using space temperature or a 4 to 20 mA signal.

Under normal operation, the chiller will maintain a constant

leaving fluid temperature approximately equal to the chilled

fluid set point. As the cooler load varies, the cooler fluid

temperature difference will change in proportion to the load as

shown in Fig. 15. Usually the chiller size and leaving-fluid

temperature set point are selected based on a full-load condi-

tion. At part load, the fluid temperature set point may be lower

than required. If the leaving fluid temperature were allowed to

increase at part load, the efficiency of the machine would

increase.

Temperature difference reset allows for the leaving temper-

ature set point to be reset upward as a function of the fluid

temperature difference or, in effect, the building load.

To use Water Temperature Difference Reset, four vari-

ables must be configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type

(ConfigurationRSETCRST), Delta T No Reset Temp

(SetpointsCOOLCRT1), Delta T Full Reset Temp

(SetpointsCOOLCRT2) and Degrees Cool Reset

(SetpointsCOOLDGRC). In the following example us-

ing Water Temperature Difference Reset, the chilled water

temperature will be reset by 5.0° F (2.8° C) when the T is

2° F (1.1° C) and 0° F (0° C) reset when the T is 10° F.

The variable CRT1 should be set to the cooler temperature

difference (T) where no chilled water temperature reset

should occur. The variable CRT2 should be set to the cooler

temperature difference where the maximum chilled water

temperature reset should occur. The variable DGRC should

be set to the maximum amount of reset desired. To verify that

reset is functioning correctly proceed to RunStatusVIEW,

and subtract the active set point (SETP) from the control

point (CTPT) to determine the degrees reset. See Fig. 15 and

Table 29.

Other, indirect means of estimating building load and con-

trolling temperatures reset are also available and are discussed

below. See Fig. 16.

To use Outdoor Air Temperature Reset, four variables must

be configured. They are: Cooling Reset Type (Configuration

RSETCRST), OAT No Reset Temp (Setpoints

COOLCRO1), OAT Full Reset Temp (Setpoints

COOLCRO2) and Degrees Cool Reset (Setpoints

COOLDGRC). In the following example, the outdoor air

temperature reset example provides 0° F (0° C) chilled water

set point reset at 85.0 F (29.4 C) outdoor-air temperature and

10.0° F (5.5° C) reset at 55.0 F (12.8 C) outdoor-air tempera-

ture. See Fig. 17 and Table 30.

Maximum Temperature

0 (-12.2)1

0 (-6.7)2

0 (-1.1)3

0 (4.4)4

50 (10.0)

0 (15.6)6

0 (21.1)7

0 (26.7)8

0 (32.2)9

mA SIGNAL

SET POINT IN DEG F (deg C)

noitauqE

enirBeru

repme

muideM

erF

MAXIMUM SET POINT

MINIMUM SET POINT (FLUD=1)

MINIMUM SET POINT (FLUD=2)

Fig. 14 — 4 to 20 mA Set Point Control

0186420

COOLER FLUID TEMPERATURE DIFFERENCE (deg F)

DEGREES RESET (deg F)

(EXAMPLE)

Fig. 15 — Water Temperature Difference Reset

0010908070605

LOADING (%)

FLUID TEMPERATURE (deg F)

DESIGN

RISE

(TYPICAL)

LWT

EWT

LEGEND

Fig. 16 — Chilled Water Temperature Control

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

021001080604020

OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE (F)

RESET AMOUNT (deg F)

(EXAMPLE)

Fig. 17 — Outdoor Air Temperature Reset

Table 29 — Water Temperature Difference Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 2 Delta T Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 2.

2 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS

/ Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 4 CRV.2

CRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp Cooler Temperature difference where no temperature

reset is required.

0 Value of CRT1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

10.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 10 from the example.

10.0 Accepts the change.

CRT1

CRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp Cooler Temperature difference where full temperature

reset, DGRC is required.

0 Value of CRT2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

2.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 2 from the example.

2.0 Accepts the change.

CRT2

x 4 CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

5.0

Amount of Temperature Reset required, 5 from the example.

5.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

Table 30 — OAT Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 1 Out Air Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 1.

1 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS

/ Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 6 CRT.2

CRO1 OAT No Reset Temp Outdoor Temperature where no temperature reset is

required.

0 Value of CRO1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

85.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 85 from the example.

85.0 Accepts the change.

CRO1

CRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp Outdoor Temperature where full temperature reset,

DGRC is required.

0 Value of CRO2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

55.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 55 from the example.

55.0 Accepts the change.

CRO2

CRS1

CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

10.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 10 from the

example.

10.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

To use Space Temperature Reset in addition to the energy

management module, four variables must be configured. They

are: Cooling Reset Type (ConfigurationRSETCRST),

Space T No Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRS1), Space

T Full Reset Temp (SetpointsCOOLCRS2) and Degrees

Cool Reset (SetpointsCOOLDGRC). In the following

space temperature reset example, 0° F (0° C) chilled water set

point reset at 72.0 F (22.2 C) space temperature and 6.0° F

(3.3° C) reset at 68.0 F (20.0 C) space temperature. See Fig. 18

and Table 31.

To use 4-20 mA Temperature Reset in addition to the ener-

gy management module, four variables must be configured.

They are: Cooling Reset Type (ConfigurationRSET

CRST), Current No Reset Val (SetpointsCOOLCRV1),

Current Full Reset Val (SetpointsCOOLCRV2) and

Degrees Cool Reset (SetpointsCOOLDGRC). In the

following example, at 4 mA no reset takes place. At 20 mA,

5° F (2.8° C) chilled water set point reset is required. See

Fig. 19 and Table 32.

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other control

systems due to possible power supply differences such as a

full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connec-

tion of control devices with different power supplies may

result in permanent damage. ComfortLink controls incor-

porate power supplies with half wave rectification. A sig-

nal isolation device should be utilized if the signal

generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

SPACE TEMPERATURE (F)

DEGREES RESET (deg F)

(EXAMPLE)

mA SIGNAL

DEGREES RESET (deg F)

20 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Fig. 18 — Space Temperature Reset

Fig. 19 — 4 to 20 mA Temperature Reset

Table 31 — Space Temperature Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 4 Space Temp Use up or down arrows to change value to 4.

4 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS

/ Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 8 CRO2

CRS1 Space T No Reset Temp Space Temperature where no temperature reset is

required.

0 Value of CRS1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

72.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 72 from the example.

72.0 Accepts the change.

CRS1

CRS2 Space T Full Reset Temp Space Temperature where full temperature reset,

DGRC is required.

0 Value of CRS2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

68.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 68 from the example.

68.0 Accepts the change.

CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

6.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 6 from the

example.

6.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

Table 32—4to20mATemperature Reset Configuration

NOTE: Bold values indicate sub-mode level.

MODE KEYPAD ENTRY DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION COMMENT

CONFIGURATION

DISP

UNIT

SERV

OPTN

RSET Reset Cool and Heat Tmp

CRST Cooling Reset Type

0 No Reset

0 No Reset Flashing to indicate Edit mode. May require Password

/ 3 4-20 mA Input Use up or down arrows to change value to 3.

3 Accepts the change.

CRST

At mode level

SETPOINTS

/ Change to Setpoints Mode

COOL Cooling Setpoints

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1

x 2 CSP.3 Cooling Setpoint 3

CRV1 Current No Reset Val Outdoor Temperature where no temperature reset is

required.

0 Value of CRV1

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

4.0 Value of No Temperature Reset, 4 from the example.

4.0 Accepts the change.

CRV1

CRV2 Current Full Reset Val Current value where full temperature reset, DGRC is

required.

0 Value of CRV2.

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

20.0 Value of full Temperature Reset, 20 from the example.

20.0 Accepts the change.

CRV2

x 6 CRS2

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset Amount of temperature reset required.

0 Value of DGRC

0 Flashing to indicate Edit mode

5.0 Amount of Temperature Reset required, 5 from the

example.

5.0 Accepts the change.

DGRC

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

ESCAPE

Demand Limit — Demand limit is a feature that allows

the unit capacity to be limited during periods of peak energy

usage. Once a Demand Limit command has been initiated, the

unit capacity will be limited to the commanded value and will

not exceed that value.

Three types of demand limiting are available on the 30RB

units. The first type is through switch control, which will re-

duce the maximum capacity by up to three user-configurable

percentages. Single-Step Switch Control Demand Limit is

standard on all 30RB units. To utilize Two and Three-Step

Switch Control Demand Limit, the Energy Management Mod-

ule is required. The second type of demand limiting is by 4 to

20 mA signal input, which will reduce the maximum capacity

linearly from 100% at a 4 mA input signal (no reduction) down

to the user-configurable level at a 20 mA input signal. To uti-

lize 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit, the Energy Management Mod-

ule is required. The third type of demand limiting requires a

programmable controller (Open or CCN) or UPC, and writes a

demand limit directly to the control.

Using the scrolling marquee, the Active Demand Limit Val

(Run StatusVIEWLIM) will display the current demand

limit value. A value of 100 will allow the machine to run fully

loaded if required. Any value less than 200 will limit the capac-

ity of the machine.

To use demand limit, select the type of demand limiting to

use. Then configure the demand limit set points based on the

type selected.

SWITCH CONTROLLED — Single-Step Switch Control

Demand Limit is standard on all 30RB units. To utilize Two or

Three-Step Switch Control Demand Limit, the Energy Man-

agement Module is required. The three steps are achieved

through two sets of dry contacts. The contacts for Demand

Limit Switch 1 must be connected to TB5-5, 14. The contacts

for Demand Limit Switch 2 must be connected to TB6-14,15.

See Fig. 20.

Several parameters must be configured for switch con-

trolled demand limit:

• Demand Limit Select (ConfigurationRSETDMDC)

• Switch Limit Setpoint 1 (SetpointsMISCDLS1)

• Switch Limit Setpoint 2 (SetpointsMISCDLS2), if

Two-Step Switch Control is desired

• Switch Limit Setpoint 3 (SetpointsMISCDLS3), if

Three-Step Switch Control is desired

The position of the Demand Limit Switch contacts shown in

Fig. 20 will allow for up to three steps of demand limit accord-

ing to Table 33.

The actual positions of Demand Limit Switches 1 and 2

seen by the control can be viewed using the scrolling marquee

or Navigator

™

display by accessing the items

InputsGEN.1DLS1 or InputsGEN.1DLS2.

Follow the example in Table 34 to enable the function and

configure the step demand limit for 80%, 60%, and 25% capac-

ity limit based on the switch position described above.

Table 33 — Demand Limit Switch Status Reponse

SWITCH STATUS

DEMAND LIMIT VALUE

SCROLLING MARQUEE/NAVIGATOR DISPLAY ITEM

Demand Limit

Switch 1

Demand Limit

Switch 2

Open Open None

Closed Open SetpointsMISCDLS1

Open Closed SetpointsMISCDLS2

Closed Closed SetpointsMISCDLS3

MAIN

BASE

BOARD

EMM

BOARD

Fig. 20 — Switch Controlled Demand Limit Wiring

a30-5710

Table 34 — Switch Controlled Demand Limit (Scrolling Marquee and Navigator

™

Display)

In the example in Table 34, when Demand Limit Switch 1

is closed and Demand Limit Switch 2 is open, the maximum

chiller capacity will be reduced to 80%. When Demand Limit

Switch 1 is open and Demand Limit Switch 2 is closed, the

maximum chiller capacity will be reduced to 60%. Similarly,

when both Demand Limit Switches are closed, the maximum

chiller capacity will be reduced to 25%.

EXTERNALLY POWERED (4 to 20 mA Controlled) —

The Energy Management Module is required for 4 to 20

mA demand limit control. The 4 to 20 mA positive signal is

connected to TB6-1 and the negative to TB6-2. Additionally, a

field-supplied 250-ohm,

-watt resistor must be installed

across TB6-1 and TB6-2. See Fig. 21. The Energy Manage-

ment Module accepts a 0 to 5 vdc input. The resistor converts

the 4 to 20 mA signal to a 0 to 5 vdc input.

The input signal seen by the control can be viewed using the

scrolling marquee or Navigator display by accessing the item

InputsGEN.1DMND.

To configure demand limit for 4 to 20 mA control, three pa-

rameters must be configured:

• Demand Limit Select

(ConfigurationRSETDMDC)

• mA for 100% Demand Limit

(ConfigurationRSETDMMX)

• mA for 0% Demand Limit

(ConfigurationRSETDMZE).

In the following example, a 4 mA signal is Demand Limit

100% and a 20 mA Demand Limit signal is 0%. The demand

limit is a linear interpolation between the two values entered.

See Table 35 and Fig. 22. In Fig. 22, if the machine receives a

12 mA signal, the machine controls will limit the capacity to

50%.

Table 35—4to20mADemandLimit(Scrolling Marquee and Navigator Display)

ITEM EXPANSION PATH

SCROLLING MARQUEE

NAVIGATOR

DISPLAY

Value Expansion

DMDC Demand Limit Select ConfigurationRSET 1 Switch Switch

DLS1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 SetpointsMISC 80 — 80

DLS2 Switch Limit Setpoint 2 SetpointsMISC 60 — 60

DLS3 Switch Limit Setpoint 3 SetpointsMISC 25 — 25

EMM

BOARD

J7B

Fig. 21 — 4 to 20 mA Demand Limit Input Wiring

a30-5711

CAUTION

Care should be taken when interfacing with other control

systems due to possible power supply differences such as a

full wave bridge versus a half wave rectification. Connec-

tion of control devices with different power supplies may

result in permanent damage. ComfortLink controls incor-

porate power supplies with half wave rectification. A sig-

nal isolation device should be utilized if the signal

generator incorporates a full wave bridge rectifier.

ITEM EXPANSION PATH

SCROLLING MARQUEE

NAVIGATOR

DISPLAY

Value Expansion

DMDC Demand Limit Switch ConfigurationRSET 2 4-20 mA Input 4-20 mA Input

DMMX mA for 100% Demand Lim ConfigurationRSET 4— 4

DMZE mA for 0% Demand Lim ConfigurationRSET 20 — 20

001

0281614

210

8642

DEMAND LIMIT SIGNAL (mA)

DEMAND LIMIT (%)

Fig. 22 — Demand Limit Response to mA Signal

CCN CONTROLLED — To configure demand limit for CCN

control, the unit Operating Type Control must be in CCN con-

trol (Operating ModesSLCTOPER=2), and must be con-

trolled by a programmable controller (Open or CCN) or UPC.

By writing to the CCN point DEM_LIM (Status Display Table

GENUNIT), the unit capacity can be controlled.

Remote Alarm and Alert Relays — The 30RB

chiller can be equipped with a remote alert and remote alarm

annunciator contacts. Both relays connected to these contacts

must be rated for a maximum power draw of 10 va sealed,

25 va inrush at 24 volts. The alarm relay, indicating that the

complete unit has been shut down can be connected to TB5-12

and TB5-13. For an alert relay, indicating that at least 1 circuit

was off due to the alert, a field-supplied and installed relay

must be connected between MBB-J3-CH25-3 and TB5-13.

Broadcast Configuration — The 30RB chiller is ca-

pable of broadcasting time, date, and holiday status to all ele-

ments in the CCN system. In the stand-alone mode, broadcast

must be activated to utilize holiday schedules and adjust for

daylight saving time. If the chiller is to be connected to a CCN

system, determine which system element is to be the network

broadcaster to all other system elements. Broadcast is activated

and deactivated in the BRODEFS Table. It is accessible

through Network Service Tool. It is not accessible through the

scrolling marquee display.

Only one element should be configured as a broadcaster. If

a broadcast is activated by a device that has been designated as

a network broadcaster, then broadcasted time, date, and holiday

status will be updated over the CCN system. If broadcast is en-

abled, a broadcast acknowledger must also be enabled. The

acknowledger cannot be the same machine as the broadcasting

machine.

ACTIVATE — The Activate variable enables the broadcast

function of the ComfortLink controls. If this variable is set to 0,

this function is not used and holiday schedules and daylight

savings compensation are not possible. Setting this variable to

1 allows the machine to broadcast and receive broadcasts on

the network. The following information is broadcast: the time

with compensation for daylight savings, date, and holiday flag.

Set this variable to 2 for stand-alone units that are not con-

nected to a CCN. With this configuration, daylight saving time

and holiday determination will be done without broadcasting

through the bus. This variable can only be changed when using

ComfortVIEW™ software or Network Service Tool. This vari-

able cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display.

BROADCAST ACKNOWLEDGER — This configuration

defines if the chiller will be used to acknowledge broadcast

messages on the CCN bus. One broadcast acknowledger is

required per bus, including secondary buses created by the use

of a bridge. This variable can only be changed with Comfort-

VIEW software or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot

be changed with the scrolling marquee display.

Alarm Control

ALARM ROUTING CONTROL — Alarms recorded on the

chiller can be routed through the CCN. To configure this op-

tion, the ComfortLink control must be configured to determine

which CCN elements will receive and process alarms. Input for

the decision consists of eight digits, each of which can be set to

either 0 or 1. Setting a digit to 1 specifies that alarms will be

sent to the system element that corresponds to that digit. Set-

ting all digits to 0 disables alarm processing. The factory de-

fault is 00000000. See Fig. 23. The default setting is based on

the assumption that the unit will not be connected to a network.

If the network does not contain a ComfortVIEW, Comfort-

WORKS

, TeLink, DataLINK™, or BAClink module, en-

abling this feature will only add unnecessary activity to the

CCN communication bus.

This option can be modified with Network Service Tool. It

cannot be modified with the scrolling marquee display.

Typical configuration of the Alarm Routing variable is

11010000. This Alarm Routing status will transmit alarms to

ComfortVIEW software, TeLink, BAClink, and DataLINK.

ALARM EQUIPMENT PRIORITY — The ComfortVIEW

software uses the equipment priority value when sorting alarms

by level. The purpose of the equipment priority value is to de-

termine the order in which to sort alarms that have the same

level. A priority of 0 is the highest and would appear first when

sorted. A priority of 7 would appear last when sorted. For ex-

ample, if two chillers send out identical alarms, the chiller with

the higher priority would be listed first. The default is 4. This

variable can only be changed when using ComfortVIEW soft-

ware or Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be

changed with the scrolling marquee display.

COMMUNICATION FAILURE RETRY TIME — This

variable specifies the amount of time that will be allowed to

elapse between alarm retries. Retries occur when an alarm is

not acknowledged by a network alarm acknowledger, which

may be either a ComfortVIEW software or TeLink. If ac-

knowledgement is not received, the alarm will be re-transmit-

ted after the number of minutes specified in this decision. This

variable can only be changed with ComfortVIEW software or

Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with

the scrolling marquee display.

RE-ALARM TIME — This variable specifies the amount of

time that will be allowed to elapse between re-alarms. A re-

alarm occurs when the conditions that caused the initial alarm

continue to persist for the number of minutes specified in this

decision. Re-alarming will continue to occur at the specified

interval until the condition causing the alarm is corrected. This

variable can only be changed with ComfortVIEW software or

Network Service Tool. This variable cannot be changed with

the scrolling marquee display.

ALARM SYSTEM NAME — This variable specifies the

system element name that will appear in the alarms generated

by the unit control. The name can be up to 8 alphanumeric

characters in length. This variable can only be changed with

ComfortVIEW software or Network Service Tool. This vari-

able cannot be changed with the scrolling marquee display.

PRE-START-UP

Do not attempt to start the chiller until the following checks

have been completed.

System Check

1. Check auxiliary components, such as the chilled fluid

circulating pump, air-handling equipment, or other

equipment to which the chiller supplies liquid are opera-

tional. Consult manufacturer’s instructions. If the unit has

field-installed accessories, be sure all are properly

installed and wired correctly. Refer to unit wiring

diagrams.

2. Open compressor suction (if equipped) and discharge

shutoff valves.

3. Open liquid line shutoff valves.

4. Fill the chiller fluid circuit with clean water (with recom-

mended inhibitor added) or other non-corrosive fluid to

be cooled. Bleed all air out of high points of system. An

air vent pipe plug is included with the cooler. If outdoor

temperatures are expected to be below 32 F (0° C), suffi-

cient inhibited propylene glycol or other suitable corro-

sion inhibited antifreeze should be added to the chiller

water circuit to prevent possible freeze-up.

The chilled water loop must be cleaned before the unit is

connected. Units supplied with the accessory hydronic

package include a run in screen. If the run-in screen is left

in the suction guide/strainer, it is recommended that the

Service Maintenance be set to alert the operator within

24 hours of start-up to be sure that the run-in screen in the

suction guide/strainer is removed. To set the time for the

parameter, go to Time ClockMCFGW.FIL. Values

for this item are counted as days. Refer to the hydronic

pump package literature if unit is equipped with the

optional hydronic pump package.

5. Check tightness of all electrical connections.

6. Oil should be visible in the compressor sight glass. An

acceptable oil level in the compressor is from

full sight glass. Adjust the oil level as required. No oil

should be removed unless the crankcase heater has been

energized for at least 24 hours. See Oil Charge section for

Carrier-approved oils.

7. Electrical power source must agree with unit nameplate.

8. Crankcase heaters must be firmly seated under compres-

sor, and must be energized for 24 hours prior to start-up.

9. Verify power supply phase sequence. Check reverse rota-

tion board. If lower (red) LED is blinking, the phase se-

quence is incorrect. Reverse two of the power wires at the

main terminal block. Units with dual power point connec-

tion utilize two reverse rotation boards. Check both for

proper phase sequence.

10. Check compressors and compressor mounting sled. Com-

pressor shipping braces and shipping bolts must be re-

moved.

START-UP

Actual Start-Up —

Actual start-up should be done only

under supervision of a qualified refrigeration technician.

1. Be sure all shut off valves are open. Units are shipped

from factory with suction valves (if equipped) open.

Discharge and liquid line shut off valves are closed.

2. Using the scrolling marquee display, set leaving-fluid set

point (SetpointsCOOLCSP.1). No cooling range ad-

justment is necessary.

3. If optional control functions or accessories are being

used, the unit must be properly configured. Refer to

Configuration Options section for details.

4. Start chilled fluid pump, if unit is not configured for

pump control, (ConfigurationOPTNPUMP= 0).

5. Complete the Start-Up Checklist to verify all components

are operating properly.

6. Turn ENABLE/OFF/REMOTE CONTACT switch to

ENABLE position.

7. Allow unit to operate and confirm that everything is

functioning properly. Check to see that leaving fluid

temperature agrees with leaving set point Control Point

(Run StatusVIEWCTPT).

DESCRIPTION STATUS POINT

Alarm Routing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ALRM_CNT

ComfortView™, or ComfortWorks

TeLink

Unused

BacLink or DataLink™

Unused

a30-4485

Fig. 23 — Alarm Routing Control

IMPORTANT: Complete the Start-Up Checklist

for 30RB Liquid Chillers at the end of this publication.

The checklist assures proper start-up of a unit, and

provides a record of unit condition, application

requirements, system information, and operation at

initial start-up.

CAUTION

Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the

machine may result.

Operating Limitations

TEMPERATURES — Unit operating temperature limits are

listed in Table 36.

Table 36 — Temperature Limits for Standard Units

LEGEND

*For sustained operation, EWT should not exceed 85 F (29.4 C).

†Unit requires brine modification for operation below this

temperature.

Low Ambient Operation — If unit operating temperatures be-

low 32 F (0° C) are expected, refer to separate unit installation

instructions for low ambient temperature operation using ac-

cessory low ambient temperature head pressure control, if not

equipped. Contact a Carrier representative for details.

NOTE: Wind baffles and brackets must be field-fabricated and

installed for all units using accessory low ambient head

pressure control to ensure proper cooling cycle operation at

low-ambient temperatures. See the 30RB Installation

Instructions or the low ambient temperature head pressure con-

trol accessory installation instructions for more information.

VOLTAGE

Main Power Supply — Minimum and maximum acceptable

supply voltages are listed in the Installation Instructions.

Unbalanced 3-Phase Supply Voltage — Never operate a

motor where a phase imbalance between phases is greater than

2%.

To determine percent voltage imbalance:

The maximum voltage deviation is the largest difference

between a voltage measurement across 2 legs and the average

across all 3 legs.

Example: Supply voltage is 240-3-60.

AB = 243v

BC = 236v

AC = 238v

1. Determine average voltage:

2. Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:

(AB) 243 – 239 = 4 v

(BC) 239 – 236 = 3 v

(AC) 239 – 238 = 1 v

Maximum deviation is 4 v.

3. Determine percent voltage imbalance:

= 1.7%

This voltage imbalance is satisfactory as it is below the

maximum allowable of 2%.

MINIMUM FLUID LOOP VOLUME — To obtain proper

temperature control, loop fluid volume must be at least 3 gal-

lons per ton (3.25 L per kW) of chiller nominal capacity for air

conditioning and at least 6 gallons per ton (6.5 L per kW) for

process applications or systems that must operate at low ambi-

ent temperatures (below 32 F [0° C]). Refer to application in-

formation in Product Data literature for details.

FLOW RATE REQUIREMENTS — Standard chillers

should be applied with nominal flow rates within those listed in

the Minimum and Maximum Cooler Flow Rates table. Higher

or lower flow rates are permissible to obtain lower or higher

temperature rises. Minimum flow rates must be exceeded to

assure turbulent flow and proper heat transfer in the cooler. See

Table 37.

Consult application data section in the Product Data

literature and job design requirements to determine flow rate

requirements for a particular installation.

TEMPERATURE F C

Maximum Ambient Temperature 125 52

Minimum Ambient Temperature 32 0

Maximum Cooler EWT* 95 35

Maximum Cooler LWT 60 15

Minimum Cooler LWT† 40 4.4

EWT — Entering Fluid (Water) Temperature

LWT — Leaving Fluid (Water) Temperature

CAUTION

Brine duty application (below 40 F [4.4 C] leaving

chilled water temperature) for chiller normally requires

factory modification. Contact your Carrier representa-

tive for details regarding specific applications. Oper-

ation below 40 F (4.4 C) leaving chilled water

temperature without modification can result in

compressor failure.

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

max voltage deviation from

avg voltage

average voltage

Average voltage =

243+236+238

717

= 239

% Voltage Imbalance = 100 x

239

IMPORTANT: If the supply voltage phase imbalance

is more than 2%, contact the local electric utility com-

pany immediately. Do not operate unit until imbalance

condition is corrected.

CAUTION

Operation below minimum flow rate could subject tubes to

frost pinching in the tube sheet, resulting in failure of the

cooler.

Table 37 — Minimum and Maximum Cooler Flow Rates

SIZES 060-300

SIZES 315-390

OPERATION

Sequence of Operation —

With a command to start

the chiller, the cooler pump will start. After verifying water

flow, the control will monitor the entering and leaving water

temperature. At any time that a compressor is not operating, its

crankcase heater is active. If the need for mechanical cooling is

determined, the control decides which circuit and compressor

to start. The compressor will deenergize the crankcase heater as

it starts. Compressors will be staged with minimum load

control (if equipped and configured) to maintain LWT set

point.

Shutdown of each circuit under normal conditions occurs in

increments, starting with the minimum load control (if

equipped) and finishing with the last running compressor. Once

minimum load control is disabled, one compressor is

shut down. Eight seconds later the next compressor will

shut down. The process will continue until all of the compres-

sors are shut down. The EXV will close completely, 1 minute

after the last compressor has shut down. There are several

abnormal conditions that, if detected, will shut down the circuit

immediately. In this case, minimum load control and all

compressors are turned off without an 8-second interval

between them. The cooler pump will remain ON for 20 sec-

onds after the last compressor has been turned OFF.

Dual Chiller Sequence of Operation — With a

command to start the chiller, the master chiller determines

which chiller will become the lead chiller based on Configura-

tionRSETLLBL and Configuration RSETLLBD.

The lead chiller is always started first and the lag chiller is held

at zero percent capacity by the master chiller forcing the lag de-

mand limit value to 0%. The lead chiller’s water pump will be

started. The lag chiller’s water pump shall be maintained off if

ConfigurationRSETLAGP=0. The internal algorithm of

lead chiller will control capacity of the lead chiller.

If Lead Pulldown Time (ConfigurationRSETLPUL)

has been configured, the lead chiller will continue to operate

alone for that specified time. After the Lead Pulldown Time

timer has elapsed, if the lead chiller is fully loaded and either

all available compression is on or at the master demand limit

value, then the lag start timer (ConfigurationRSET

LLDY) is initiated. When the pulldown timer and lag start

timer have elapsed and the Combined Leaving Chilled Water

Temperature is more than 3° F (1.7° C) above the set point,

then the lag chiller is started.

If the lag chiller’s water pump was not started when the ma-

chines went into occupied mode, then the lag chiller water

pump will be started. The lag chiller will start when the master

chiller forcing the lag chiller demand limit value (LAG_LIM)

to the master’s demand limit value. If lead/lag capacity balance

is selected, once the lag chiller has started, the master chiller

will try to keep the difference in capacity between lead and lag

to less than 20%. The master chiller will then be responsible for

water loop capacity calculation, and will determine which

chiller, the lead or lag, will increase or decrease capacity. When

the load reduces, the lag chiller will unload first. To accomplish

this, the lead chiller set point is decreased by 4° F (–2.2° C)

until the lag chiller unloads.

To configure the two chillers for dual chiller operation,

the master chiller must have the Control Method variable (Op-

erating ModeSLCTOPER) set to meet the job require-

ments. The slave chiller must be set to Control Method variable

(Operating ModeSLCTOPER) = 2 (CCN Control) and

the remote-off-enable switch must be in the enable position.

The master chiller and the slave chiller CCN addresses (Con-

figurationOPTNCCNA) must be configured. The master

30RB

SIZE

MINIMUM

COOLER

FLOW RATE

(gpm)

MAXIMUM

FLOW RATE

(gpm)

MINIMUM

LOOP

VOLUME

(gal.)

MINIMUM COOLER

FLOW RATE

(l/s)

MAXIMUM

COOLER

FLOW RATE

(l/s)

MINIMUM

LOOP

VOLUME

(liters)

060 72 288 180 5 18 681

070 84 336 210 5 21 795

080 96 384 240 6 24 908

090 108 432 270 7 27 1022

100 120 480 300 8 30 1136

110 132 528 330 8 33 1249

120 144 576 360 9 36 1363

130 156 624 390 10 39 1476

150 180 720 450 11 45 1703

160 192 768 480 12 48 1817

170 204 816 510 13 51 1931

190 228 912 570 14 58 2158

210 252 950 630 16 60 2385

225 270 950 675 17 60 2555

250 300 950 750 19 60 2839

275 330 950 825 21 60 3123

300 360 950 900 23 60 3407

30RB

SIZE

MINIMUM COOLER

FLOW RATE

(gpm)

MAXIMUM COOLER

FLOW RATE

(gpm)

MIN

LOOP

VOLUME

(gal.)

MINIMUM COOLER

FLOW RATE

(l/s)

MAXIMUM COOLER

FLOW RATE

(l/s)

MIN

LOOP

VOLUME

(liters)

Module A Module B Module A Module B Module A Module B Module A Module B

315 192 192 768 768 945 12 12 48 48 3577

330 204 192 816 768 990 12 12 51 48 3748

345 204 204 816 816 1035 13 13 51 51 3918

360 228 204 912 816 1080 14 13 58 51 4088

390 228 228 912 912 1170 14 14 58 58 4429

and slave chillers can be addressed from 1 to 239. Each device

connected to the network must have its own unique address.

Both chillers must have the same CCN Bus Number

(ConfigurationOPTNCCNB). Lead/Lag Chiller Enable

must be set for both chillers by configuring Master/Slave

Select (ConfigurationRSETMSSL) to 1 (Master) for the

master chiller. The slave chiller Master/Slave Select must be

set to 2 (Slave). The master chiller can be configured to use

Lead/Lag Balance (ConfigurationRSETLLBL) to rotate

the lead and lag chillers after a configured number of hours of

operation. The Lag Start Delay (Configuration

RSETLLBD) can be configured. This prevents the Lag

chiller from starting until the lead chiller is fully loaded and the

delay has elapsed.

Operating Modes

MODE 1 (Operating ModeMODEMD01) — Startup

Delay in Effect

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is started. This

mode is active when the Minutes Off Time (Configuration

OPTNDELY) timer is active.

Action Taken — The unit will not start until the timer has

expired.

Termination — The mode will terminate when the timer

expires.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to the Min-

utes Off Time timer.

MODE 2 (Operating ModeMODEMD02) — Second

Setpoint in Use

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is ON. This mode

is active when Cooling Setpoint 2 (SetpointsCOOL

CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (SetpointsCOOLCSP.3) is in

use. While in this mode, the Active Setpoint (Run Status

VIEWSETP) will show the CSP.2 or CSP.3 value.

Action Taken — The unit will operate to the Cooling Setpoint

2 (CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (CSP.3).

Termination — This mode will terminate when the Cooling

Setpoint 2 (CSP.2) or Ice Setpoint (CSP.3) is no longer in use.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 3 (Operating ModeMODEMD03) — Reset in

Effect

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is ON. This mode

is active when Temperature Reset (ConfigurationRSET

CRST) is enabled either by CRST=1 (Outside Air Tempera-

ture), CRST=2 (Return Water), CRST=3 (4-20 mA Input), or

CRST=4 (Space Temperature) and is active.

Action Taken — The Active Setpoint (Run StatusVIEW

SETP) will be modified according to the programmed

information and will be displayed as the Control Point (Run

StatusVIEWCTPT).

Termination — This mode will terminate when the Tempera-

ture Reset is not modifying the active leaving water set point,

so SETP is the same as CTPT.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 4 (Operating ModeMODEMD04) — Demand

Limit Active

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is ON. This mode

is active when Demand Limit (ConfigurationRSET

DMDC) is enabled either by DMDC=1 (Switch), DMDC=2

(4-20 mA Input) or the Night Time Low Sound Capacity Limit

(ConfigurationOPTN LS.LT).

Action Taken — The Active Demand Limit Value (Run

StatusVIEWLIM) will display the current demand limit

according to the programmed information and the unit’s capac-

ity will be reduced to the amount shown or lower.

Termination — This mode will terminate when the Demand

Limit command has been removed.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect when capacity is be-

ing limited by the demand limit function.

MODE 5 (Operating ModeMODEMD05) — Ramp

Loading Active

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is ON. This mode

is active when Ramp Loading (ConfigurationOPTN

RL.S) is enabled and the following conditions are met:

1. The leaving water temperature is more than 4° F (2.2° C)

from the Control Point (Run StatusVIEWCTPT),

and

2. The rate of change of the leaving water temperature is

greater than the Cool Ramp Loading (Set

PointsCOOLCRMP).

Action Taken — The control will limit the capacity step

increase until one of the two conditions in Mode 5 is no longer

true.

Termination — This mode will terminate once both conditions

in Mode 5 are no longer true.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only when capacity

is being limited by the ramp loading function.

MODE 6 (Operating ModeMODEMD06) — Cooler

Heater Active

Criteria for Mode — Tested when unit is ON or OFF. This

mode is active when the cooler heater is energized, if the

Outdoor Air Temperature (TemperatureUNITOAT) is

less than the calculated value (Freeze Setpoint + Cooler Heater

Delta T Setpoint [ConfigurationSERVHTR] default

– 2° F [1.1° C]), and either the Leaving Water Temperature

(TemperatureUNITLWT) or the Entering Water Tem-

perature (TemperatureUNITEWT) are less than or equal

to the Freeze Setpoint + Cooler Heater Delta T Setpoint

(HTR).

The Freeze Setpoint is 34 F (1.1 C) for fresh water systems

(ConfigurationSERVFLUD=1). The Freeze Setpoint is

the Brine Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP)

for Medium Temperature Brine systems (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2).

Action Taken — The cooler heater will be energized.

Termination — The cooler heater will be deenergized when

both the Entering Water Temperature (EWT) and Leaving

Water Temperature (LWT) are above the Freeze Setpoint +

Cooler Heater Delta T Setpoint (HTR).

Possible Causes — This mode will be enabled for freeze pro-

tection. If the temperatures are not as described above, check

the accuracy of the outside air, entering and leaving water

thermistors.

MODE 7 (Operating ModeMODEMD07) — Water

Pump Rotation

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is ON or OFF. This

mode is active when the Cooler Pump Sequence (Configura-

tionOPTNPUMP) =2 (2 Pumps Automatic Changeover)

and the Pump Rotation Delta Timer (ConfigurationOPTN

ROT.P) has expired.

Action Taken — The control will switch the operation of the

pumps. The lead pump will be operating normally. The lag

pump will be started, becoming the lead, and then the original

lead pump will be shut down.

Termination — This mode will terminate when the pump

operation has been completed.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 8 (Operating ModeMODEMD08) — Pump Pe-

riodic Start

Criteria for Mode — This mode is active when the cooler

pump is started for the Periodic Pump Start configuration

(ConfigurationOPTNPM.PS=YES).

Action Taken — If the pump has not run that day, a pump will

be started and will run for 2 seconds at 2:00 PM. If the machine

is equipped with dual pumps, Pump no. 1 will run on even days

(such as day 2, 4, 6 of the month). Pump no. 2 will run on odd

days (such as day 1, 3, 5 of the month).

Termination — This mode will terminate when the pump

shuts down.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 9 (Operating ModeMODEMD09) — Night

Low Noise Active

Criteria for Mode — This mode is active when the Night

Time Low Noise Option has been configured and the time is

within the configured time. Programming a Night Low Noise

Start Time (ConfigurationOPTNLS.ST) and a Night

Low Noise End Time (ConfigurationOPTNLS.ND) con-

figures the option.

Action Taken — The control will raise the head pressure set

point to reduce the number of condenser fans on, thereby

reducing the sound of the machine. Additionally, if the Night

Time Low Sound Capacity Limit (ConfigurationOPTN

LS.LT) has been configured, the units capacity will be limit-

ed to the programmed level.

Termination — This mode will terminate once the Night Low

Noise End Time (LS.ND) has been reached.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 10 (Operating ModeMODEMD10) — System

Manager Active

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is ON or OFF. This

mode is active if a System Manager such as Building Supervi-

sor, Chillervisor System Manager, or another CCN device is

controlling the machine.

Action Taken — The machine will respond to the specific

command received from the System Manager.

Termination — The mode will be terminated if the System

Manager control is released.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 11 (Operating ModeMODEMD11) — Mast

Slave Ctrl Active

Criteria for Mode — Tested if the machine is ON. This mode

is active if the Master Slave Control has been enabled. Having

2 machines programmed, one as the master (Configuration

RSETMSSL=1 [Master]) and the other as a slave

(ConfigurationRSETMSSL=2 [Slave]).

Action Taken — Both the master and slave machine will re-

spond to the capacity control commands issued by the master

controller. This may include control point changes and demand

limit commands.

Termination — This mode will terminate when the Master

Slave Control has been disabled.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 12 (Operating ModeMODEMD12) — Auto

Changeover Active

Criteria for Mode — This mode is not supported for Cooling

Only units.

Action Taken — None.

Termination — None.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 13 (Operating ModeMODEMD13) — Free

Cooling Active

Criteria for Mode — This mode is not supported for Cooling

Only units.

Action Taken — None.

Termination — None.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 14 (Operating ModeMODEMD14) — Re-

claim Active

Criteria for Mode — This mode is not supported for Cooling

Only units.

Action Taken — None.

Termination — None.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 15 (Operating ModeMODEMD15) — Electric

Heat Active

Criteria for Mode — This mode is not supported for Cooling

Only units.

Action Taken — None.

Termination — None.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 16 (Operating ModeMODEMD16) — Heating

Low EWT Lockout

Criteria for Mode — This mode is not supported for Cooling

Only units.

Action Taken — None.

Termination — None.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 17 (Operating ModeMODEMD17) — Boiler

Active

Criteria for Mode — This mode is not supported for Cooling

Only units.

Action Taken — None.

Termination — None.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 18 (Operating ModeMODEMD18) — Ice

Mode in Effect

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the unit is ON. This mode

is active when Ice Setpoint (SetpointsCOOLCSP.3) is

in use. While in this mode, the Active Setpoint (Run Status

VIEWSETP) will show the CSP.3 value.

Action Taken — The unit will operate to the Ice Setpoint

(CSP.3).

Termination — This mode will terminate when the Ice Set-

point (CSP.3) is no longer in use.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 19 Operating ModeMODEMD19) — Defrost

Active on Cir A

MODE 20 (Operating ModeMODEMD20) — Defrost

Active on Cir B

Criteria for Mode — This mode is not supported for Cooling

Only units.

Action Taken — None.

Termination — None.

Possible Causes — This mode is in effect only due to pro-

gramming options.

MODE 21 (Operating ModeMODEMD21) — Low

Suction Circuit A

MODE 22 (Operating ModeMODEMD22) — Low

Suction Circuit B

MODE 23 (Operating ModeMODEMD23) — Low

Suction Circuit C

Criteria for Mode — The criteria are tested when the circuit is

ON. The appropriate circuit mode will be active if one of the

following conditions is true:

1. If the circuit’s Saturated Suction Temperature (SST) is

more than 6° F (3.3° C) less than the freeze point and

both the cooler approach (Leaving Water Temperature-

SST) and superheat (Suction Gas Temperature – SST) are

greater than 15° F (8.3° C).

2. If there is more than one compressor ON in the circuit

and the circuit’s SST is greater than 18° F (10.0° C) be-

low the freeze point for more than 90 seconds.

3. If there is more than one compressor ON in the circuit

and the circuit’s SST is greater than –4° F (–20.0° C) and

the SST 30 seconds ago was 18° F (10.0° C) below the

freeze point.

4. If the circuit’s saturated suction temperature is greater

than 6° F (3.3° C) below the freeze point for more than

3 minutes.

For a fresh water system (ConfigurationSERVFLUD

=1), the freeze point is 34° F (1.1° C). For medium temperature

brine systems, (ConfigurationSERVFLUD=2), the freeze

point is Brine Freeze Set Point (ConfigurationSERVLO-

SP).

Action Taken — For criterion 1, no additional stages will be

added. For criteria 2, 3 and 4, one stage of capacity will be

removed.

Termination — The mode will terminate when the circuit’s

Saturated Suction Temperature is greater than the freeze point

minus 6° F (3.3° C) or the circuit has alarmed.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, see Possi-

ble Causes for Alarms P.05, P.06, and P.07 on page 75.

MODE 24 (Operating ModeMODEMD24) — High

DGT Circuit A

MODE 25 (Operating ModeMODEMD25) — High

DGT Circuit B

MODE 26 (Operating ModeMODEMD26) — High

DGT Circuit C

Criteria for Mode — This mode is tested for when any circuit

is running. The circuit saturated condensing and suction tem-

peratures are monitored to ensure that the compressors always

operate withing their allowed “map.” Operation at conditions

at or outside the “map” boundaries will cause this mode to be

in effect. Operation at extremely low suction pressures and

high condensing temperatures will cause the mode to be

generated.

Action Taken — The circuit will not be allowed to increase

capacity and may be automatically unloaded or stopped.

Termination — This mode will terminate when or if the circuit

refrigerant conditions return to within the compressor “map.”

Possible Causes — This mode could be in effect due to a low

fluid flow rate, overcharge of oil in a circuit, dirty condenser

coils, refrigerant overcharge, or excessive brine concentration.

MODE 27 (Operating ModeMODEMD27) — High

Pres Override Cir A

MODE 28 (Operating ModeMODEMD28) — High

Pres Override Cir B

MODE 29 (Operating ModeMODEMD29) — High

Pres Override Cir C

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the circuit is ON. The

appropriate circuit mode will be active if the discharge pressure

for the circuit, Discharge Pressure Circuit A (Pressure

PRC.ADP.A), Discharge Pressure Circuit B (Pres-

surePRC.BDP.B), or Discharge Pressure Circuit C

(PressurePRC.CDP.C) is greater than the High Pressure

Threshold (ConfigurationSERVHP.TH).

Action Taken — The capacity of the affected circuit will be

reduced. If the unit is equipped with Minimum Load Control

and has been configured for High Ambient (Configuration

UNITHGBP=3), the minimum load control valve will be

energized. Two minutes following the capacity reduction, the

circuit’s saturated condensing temperature (SCT) is calculated

and stored. The affected circuit will not be allowed to add ca-

pacity for at least 5 minutes following the capacity reduction. If

after 5 minutes, the circuit’s saturated condensing temperature

is less than SCT – 3° F (1.7° C), if required, another stage of

capacity will be added.

If additional steps of capacity are required, the control will

look for other circuits to add capacity.

Termination — This mode will terminate once the circuit’s

saturated condensing temperature is less than SCT – 3° F

(1.7° C).

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, see Possi-

ble Causes for Alarm A1.03. on page 70.

MODE 30 (Operating ModeMODEMD30) — Low

Superheat Circuit A

MODE 31 (Operating ModeMODEMD31) — Low

Superheat Circuit B

MODE 32 (Operating ModeMODEMD32) — Low

Superheat Circuit C

Criteria for Mode — Tested when the circuit is ON with at

least 1 compressor ON. The appropriate circuit mode will be

active is the circuit’s superheat is less than 5° F (2.8° C) or

greater than 45° F (25° C).

Action Taken — No additional stages of circuit capacity will

be added until the circuit’s superheat is greater than 5° F

(2.8° C) and less than 45° F (25° C).

The control will look for other circuits to add capacity if

additional steps of capacity are required.

Termination — This mode will terminate once the affected

circuit’s superheat is greater than 5° F (2.8° C) and less than

45° F (25° C).

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, see Possi-

ble Causes for Alarms P.08, P.09, P.10, P.11, P.12 and P.13 on

page 74.

Optional Heat Reclaim Module — The heat re-

claim option adds a water-cooled condenser in parallel with the

standard air-cooled condenser for the purpose of simultaneous-

ly producing tempered hot water while satisfying the chilled

water requirement.

For chillers with the heat reclaim option, Configura-

tion→UNIT→RECL should be set to YES.

This option requires the installation of an additional board

(EMM-HR).

This board allows control of the components shown in Ta-

ble 11. Table 38 lists EMM-HR outputs for the solenoid

valves. Item numbers in Table 38 refer to Fig. 24 of this docu-

ment.

For more control details, refer to the unit low voltage con-

trol schematic (Fig. 25).

The heat reclaim mode can be selected by either the Heat

Recovery Enable Switch or by CCN control.

SWITCH CONTROLLED — To configure Heat Reclaim for

SWITCH control, the unit Operating Type Control can be con-

figured to 0, 1 or 2 (Operating Modes→SLCT→OPER). The

Reclaim Select configuration must be set to “Switch Control”

(Operating Modes→SLCT→RL.SE=2). Switch input connec-

tion should be field wired to terminals 14 and 15 on TB7, cool-

ing mode (open) or heat reclaim mode (closed). Switch status

can be accessed through Input→GEN.I→RECL.

CCN CONTROL — To configure Heat Reclaim for CCN

control, the unit Operating Type Control must be set to CCN

control (Operating mode→SLCT→OPER=2). The Reclaim

Select configuration must be set to “Yes” (Operating

Modes→SLCT→RL.SE=1). Heat reclaim mode is selected

by forcing CCN point RECL_SEL (Status Display→

GENUNIT→RECL_SEL) to “NO” for cooling mode or

“YES” for Heat Reclaim mode.

The heat reclaim function is active when the heat reclaim

entering water temperature is lower than the heat reclaim set

point (Setpoints→MISC→RSP), default 122 F (50 C), minus

half or quarter of the heat reclaim deadband, depending on the

number of refrigerant circuits in reclaim mode (Set-

points→MISC→RDB). The default heat reclaim deadband is

9° F (5.0° C) and the recommended deadband range is 5 to

18° F (2.8 to 10° C).

The difference between the reclaim entering water tempera-

ture and reclaim set point will determine if one or two circuits

are required to provide heat reclaim capacity. See Table 39 for

details.

Heat Reclaim Active status is indicated by MODE_14=ON

(Operating Modes→MODE→MD14) from the scrolling mar-

quee display or Mode_14=1 accessed through CCN.

The following is the changeover procedure from cooling

mode to heat reclaim mode.

1. Verify that the circuit has run for more than 2 minutes in

cooling.

2. Start the reclaim pump.

3. Verify the reclaim condenser flow switch is closed. If this

remains open after one minute of condenser pump opera-

tion, the circuit remains in cooling mode and P.15 alarm

will be activated.

Once water flow is established the following conditions

must be true:

• saturated condensing temperature is greater than satu-

rated suction temperature plus 18° F (10° C)

• if reclaim water entering requires the circuit to go to a

heat reclaim session and the number of air cooled to

reclaim changeovers is not greater than 4 per hour

• the last changeover occurred more than 7 minutes ago

When all of these conditions are true, the heat reclaim

pumpdown sequence is activated. During heat reclaim pump-

down, the control will open the entering heat reclaim condens-

er solenoid valve and close the entering air-cooled condenser

solenoid valves 3 seconds later. After one minute or when the

subcooling value is above 13.2 F (-10.4 C), the heat reclaim

operation is effective.

During the heat reclaim operation, if the sub-cooling value

is less than 13.2 F (-10.4 C) leaving air-cooled condenser sole-

noids may activate for 3 seconds every 20 seconds to recover

more charge. If sub-cooling is greater than 16° F (9.0° C) the

entering air cooled condenser solenoids may activate for 3 sec-

onds every 20 seconds to transfer charge back into the air-

cooled condenser to prevent excessive condensing tempera-

ture. The leaving heat reclaim condenser solenoid should re-

main closed.

Once the heat reclaim set point (RSP) is satisfied, the sys-

tem will transition back to normal air-cooled mode. The air-

cooled pumpdown sequence is activated. During air-cooled

pumpdown, the control will open the entering air-cooled con-

denser solenoids and close the entering heat reclaim condenser

valves 3 seconds later.

During the air-cooled operation, leaving heat reclaim con-

denser solenoids may activate for 3 seconds every 20 seconds

to recover more charge into air-cooled operation, based on the

system sub-cooling level. Leaving air-cooled condenser sole-

noids should remain closed.

Heat reclaim entering water temperature (HEWT), leaving

water temperature (HLWT), heat reclaim pump hours

(HR.CD), refrigerant sub-cooling (HRS.x) can be accessed

from the scrolling marquee display through the following

paths:

Temperatures→UNIT→HEWT

Temperature→UNIT→HLWT

Run Status→RUN→HR.CD

Temperatures→Cir.A→HRS.A

Temperatures→Cir.B→HRS.B

To view circuit status through CCN, two points are avail-

able: Reclaim Status Circuit A and Reclaim Status Circuit B.

Each will show a single-digit number as defined in Table 40.

RECLAIM CONDENSER WATER VALVE OUTPUT —

This output (0 to 10 vdc) controls the heat reclaim condenser

3-way water valve position through a variable speed device. A

10 vdc signal corresponds to 100% open.

Table 38 — Heat Reclaim Circuits

OUTPUT ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION CONNECTION RELAY

SOLENOID

TYPE

OPERATION

COOLING RECLAIM

HR1.A 4 Ckt. A Ent A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J3-CH24 ECA-A N/O OPEN CLOSED

HR2.A 6 Ckt. A Lvg A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH18 LCA-A N/C CLOSED CYCLING

HR3.A 2 Ckt. A Ent W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH20 ECW-A N/C CLOSED OPEN

HR4.A 9 Ckt. A Lvg W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH22 LCW-A N/C CYCLING CLOSED

HR1.B 5 Ckt. B Ent A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J3-CH25 ECA-B N/O OPEN CLOSED

HR2.B 7 Ckt. B Lvg A/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH19 LCA-B N/C CLOSED CYCLING

HR3.B 3 Ckt. B Ent W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH21 ECW-B N/C CLOSED OPEN

HR4.B 10 Ckt. B Lvg W/C Cond. Sol. EMM-J2-CH23 LCW-B N/C CYCLING CLOSED

Table 39 — Heat Reclaim Staging

Table 40 — CCN Table Status Display — RECLAIM

*x=aorb.

The 3-way valve should be installed to facilitate the cold

water start-up below 59 F (15 C) and maintain a stable head

pressure control during heat reclaim operation. The minimum

position of the water valve should be set at 20% and maximum

position should be set at 100%. When the entering water tem-

perature is below 68 F (20 C), the water valve should remain at

20% position to allow a maximum re-circulating of the warm

water between the 3-way water valve and heat reclaim con-

denser.

When the entering water temperature is above 104 F (40 C),

the water valve will remain fully open, allowing no recircula-

tion of the warm water. When the entering water temperature is

between 68 F and 104 F (20 and 40 C), the water valve will be

adjusted between 20% and 100% position in linear proportion

to the value of the entering water temperature.

RECLAIM CONDENSER HEATER OPERATION —

For freeze protection the heat reclaim condenser is equipped

with an electric heater. The heater is energized when entering

or leaving heat reclaim fluid temperature is lower than

37.4 F (3.0 C). The heater is de-energized when both tempera-

tures are above 40.0 F (4.4 C).

HEAT RECLAIM ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE

RECLAIM

SELECT

NUMBER OF CIRCUITS

IN RECLAIM

NUMBER OF CIRCUITS IN

RECLAIM STATUS CHANGE

–No0-2

hr_ew < rsp - hr_deadb/2 Yes – + 2

rsp - hr_deadb/2 < hr_ewt < rsp - hr_deadb/4 Yes 0 + 1

rsp - hr_deadb/2 < hr_ewt < rsp - hr_deadb/4 Yes 1 Unchanged

rsp - hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/4 Yes – Unchanged

rsp + hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes 1 Unchanged

rsp + hr_deadb/4 < hr_ewt < rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes 2 - 1

hr_ewt > rsp + hr_deadb/2 Yes – - 2

RECLAIM STATUS

(hrstat_x)*

DESCRIPTION

0 Air cooled mode

1 Reclaim mode request

2 Reclaim pumpdown sequence

3 Reclaim operation mode

4 Air cooled mode request

LEGEND

ITEM NUMBERS

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

1—Air condenser (coils)

2—Solenoid valve: Heat reclaim mode ckt A (entering heat reclaim condenser)

3—Solenoid valve: Heat reclaim mode ckt B (entering heat reclaim condenser)

4—Solenoid valve: Cooling mode ckt A (entering air-cooled condenser)

5—Solenoid valve: Cooling mode ckt B (entering air-cooled condenser)

6—Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in heat reclaim mode ckt A (leaving air-cooled condenser)

7—Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in heat reclaim mode ckt B (leaving air-cooled condenser)

8—Check valve

9—Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in cooling mode ckt A (leaving heat reclaim condenser)

10 — Solenoid valve: Charge recovery in cooling mode ckt B (leaving heat reclaim condenser)

11 — Compressor

12 — Hot Gas Bypass ckt A

13 — Hot Gas Bypass ckt B

14 — Pumpdown pressure transducer ckt A

15 — Pumpdoiwn pressure transducer ckt B

16 — Subcooled condenser gas temperature ckt A

17 — Subcooled condenser gas temperature ckt B

18 — Expansion Device (EXV)

19 — Filter Drier (FD)

Fig. 24 — Solenoid Valve Location in Chiller System — 30RB with Heat Reclaim

Fig. 25 — Heat Reclaim Low Voltage Control Schematic

CONDENSER FLOW SWITCH

SERVICE

Electronic Expansion Valve (EXV) —

See Fig. 26

for a cutaway view of the EXV. High-pressure liquid refriger-

ant enters valve through the top. As refrigerant passes through

the orifice, pressure drops and refrigerant changes to a 2-phase

condition (liquid and vapor). The electronic expansion valve

operates through an electronically controlled activation of a

stepper motor. The stepper motor stays in position, unless

power pulses initiate the two discrete sets of motor stator wind-

ings for rotation in either direction. The direction depends on

the phase relationship of the power pulses.

The motor directly operates the spindle, which has rotating

movements that are transformed into linear motion by the

transmission in the cage assembly. The valve cone is a V-port

type which includes a positive shut-off when closed.

There are two different EXVs. For circuits with 1 or 2 com-

pressors, the total number of steps is 2785. For circuits with 3

or 4 compressors, the total number of steps is 3690. The EXV

motor moves at 150 steps per second. Commanding the valve

to either 0% or 100% will add extra 160 steps to the move, to

ensure the value is open or closed completely.

The EXV board controls the valve. Each circuit has a

thermistor located in a well in the suction manifold before the

compressor. Suction pressure as measured by the suction pres-

sure transducer is converted to a saturated suction temperature.

The thermistor measures the temperature of the superheated

gas entering the compressor and the pressure transducer deter-

mines the saturated temperature of suction gas. The difference

between the temperature of the superheated gas and the

saturated suction temperature is the superheat. The EXV board

controls the position of the electronic expansion valve stepper

motor to maintain superheat set point.

The MBB controls the superheat leaving cooler to approxi-

mately 9.0° F (5.0° C). Because EXV status is communicated

to the main base board (MBB) and is controlled by the EXV

boards, it is possible to track the valve position. The unit is then

protected against loss of charge and a faulty valve. During

initial start-up, the EXV is fully closed. After initialization

period, valve position is tracked by the EXV board by con-

stantly monitoring the amount of valve movement.

The EXV is also used to limit cooler saturated suction tem-

perature to 50 F (10 C). This makes it possible for the chiller to

start at higher cooler fluid temperatures without overloading

the compressor. This is commonly referred to as MOP (maxi-

mum operating pressure).

If it appears that the EXV module is not properly con-

trolling circuit operation to maintain correct superheat, there

are a number of checks that can be made using test functions

and initialization features built into the microprocessor con-

trol. See the EXV Troubleshooting Procedure section to test

EXVs.

EXV TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE — Follow the

steps below to diagnose and correct EXV problems. Check

EXV motor operation first. Switch the Enable/Off/Remote

(EOR) Contact switch to the Off position. Press on

the scrolling marquee until the highest operating level is dis-

played. Use the arrow keys to select the Service Test mode and

press . The display will be TEST. Use the arrow keys

until display shows QUIC. Press (password entry

may be required) and use or to change OFF to ON.

The Quick Test sub-mode is now enabled. Move the arrow

down to the appropriate circuit EXV, Circuit A EXV % Open

(Service Test ModeQUICEXV.A), Circuit B EXV %

Open (Service Test ModeQUICEXV.B), or Circuit C

EXV % Open (Service Test ModeQUIC EXV.C), and

press . The current value of 0 will be displayed.

Press and the value will be flashing. Using the

increase the EXV position to select 100% valve position

(hold for quick movement) and press . The

actuator should be felt moving through the EXV. Press

again twice if necessary to confirm this has occurred.

This will attempt to force the EXV to 100% again. To close the

valve, press , select 0% with and press .

The actuator should knock when it reaches the bottom of its

stroke. If it is believed that the valve is not working properly,

continue with the following test procedure:

Check the 8-position DIP switch on the board for the proper

address. Check the EXV output signals at appropriate terminals

on the EXV module. Connect positive test lead to EXV-J2A

terminal 5 for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2A terminal 5 for sizes

210-300 for Circuit A. Connect lead to EXV-J2B terminal 5

for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2B terminal 5 for sizes 210-300

for Circuit B. Connect lead to EXV2-J2A terminal 5 for sizes

210-300 for Circuit C. Set meter to approximately 20 vdc. Us-

ing the Service Test procedure above, move the valve output

under test to 100%. DO NOT short meter leads together or pin

5 to any other pin, as board damage will occur. During the next

several seconds, carefully connect the negative test lead to pins

1,2,3 and 4 in succession. Digital voltmeters will average this

signal and display approximately 6 vdc. If the output remains

at a constant voltage other than 6 vdc or shows 0 volts, remove

the connector to the valve and recheck.

Press and select 0% to close the valve. If a prob-

lem still exists, replace the EXV board. If the reading is correct,

the expansion valve and EXV wiring should be checked.

Check the EXV connector and interconnecting wiring.

1. Check color-coding and wire connections. Make sure

they are connected to the correct terminals at the EXV

board and EXV plug and that the cables are not crossed.

2. Check for continuity and tight connection at all pin

terminals.

Check the resistance of the EXV motor windings. Remove

the EXV module plug. Module plug is labeled EXV-J2A on

sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2A on sizes 210-300 for Circuit A,

EXV-J2B for sizes 060-190 or EXV1-J2B for sizes 210-300

for Circuit B, or EXV2-J2A on sizes 210-300 for Circuit C.

Check the resistance of the two windings between pins 1 and 3

for one winding and pins 2 and 4 for the other winding. The re-

sistance should be 52 ohms (± 5.2 ohms). Check resistance of

pins 1, 2, 3, and 4 to ground. The resistance should be infinity.

ESCAPE

ENTER

CAUTION

Do not remove EXV cables from the EXV board with the

power applied to the board. Damage to the board may

occur.

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Inspecting/Opening Electronic Expansion Valves

To check the physical operation of an EXV, the following

steps must be performed.

1. Close the liquid line shut off valve of the circuit to be

checked. Put the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch in

the Off position. Using the scrolling marquee, enter the

Service Test mode and change Service TestTEST

T.REQ from OFF to ON. A password may be

required. Switch the EOR switch to the Enable position.

Under the COMP sub-mode, enable the one of the com-

pressors (Service TestTESTCP.xn) for the circuit.

Let compressor run until gage on suction pressure port

reads 10 psig. Press , and to turn

the compressor off. The compressor will turn off. Imme-

diately after the compressor shuts off, close the discharge

valve.

2. Remove any remaining refrigerant from the system low

side using proper reclaiming techniques. Turn off the line

voltage power supply to the compressors.

3. The expansion valve motor is hermetically sealed inside

the top portion of the valve. See Fig. 26. Carefully

unscrew the 1

in. (27 mm) retaining nut securing the

motor portion to the body of the valve making sure the

EXV plug is still connected. The EXV operator will come

out with the motor portion of the device.

4. Enter the appropriate EXV test step under the (Service

TestQUIC) sub-mode in the Service Test mode.

Locate the desired item Service TestQUICEXV.A,

Service TestQUICEXV.B, or Service TestQUIC

EXV.C. Press twice to make the valve posi-

tion of 0% flash. Press and hold until 100% is dis-

played and press . Observe the operation of the

lead screw. See Fig. 26. The motor should be turning,

raising the operator closer to the motor. Motor actuator

movement should be smooth and uniform from fully

closed to fully open position. Press twice, use

to select 0% and press again to check open

to closed operation. If the valve is properly connected to

the processor and receiving correct signals, yet does not

operate as described above, the sealed motor portion of

the valve should be replaced.

Installing EXV Motor

If re-installing the motor, be sure to use a new gasket in the

assembly. See Fig. 27. It is easier to install the motor assembly

with the lead screw in the fully closed position. Using the steps

outlined above, move the EXV position to 0. Insert the motor

into the body of the EXV. Tighten the motor to the body to

36 ft-lb (50 N-m) and then tighten the valve another 30 degrees.

Moisture Liquid Indicator — Clear flow of liquid refrigerant

indicates sufficient charge in system. Bubbles in the sight glass

indicate undercharged system or presence of noncondensables.

Moisture in system measured in parts per million (ppm),

changes color of indicator. See Table 41. Change filter drier at

first sign of moisture in system.

1. Cable

2. Glass Seal

3. Motor Housing

4. Stepper Motor

5. Bearing

6. Lead Screw

7. Insert

8. Valve Piston

9. Valve Seat

10. Valve Port

Fig. 26 — Cutaway View of the Electronic Expansion Valve

IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gaskets before

opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.

ENTER ENTER

IMPORTANT: Obtain replacement gasket before

opening EXV. Do not re-use gaskets.

ENTER

Table 41 — Moisture Liquid Indicator Filter Drier — Whenever moisture-liquid indicator shows

presence of moisture, replace filter drier(s). There is one filter

drier on each circuit. Refer to Carrier Standard Service

Techniques Manual, Chapter 1, Refrigerants, for details on

servicing filter driers.

Liquid Line Service Valve — This valve is located immedi-

ately ahead of filter drier, and has a

-in. Schrader connection

for field charging. In combination with compressor dis-

charge service valve, each circuit can be pumped down into

the high side for servicing except on units equipped with

MCHX condenser coils.

REFRIGERANT R-410A

AT 75 F (24 C)

(ppm)

AT 125 F (52 C)

(ppm)

Green — Dry <20 <60

Yellow-green — Caution 20 to 165 60 to 500

Yellow — Wet >165 >500

IMPORTANT: Unit must be in operation at least

12 hours before moisture indicator can give an accu-

rate reading.

With unit running, indicating element must be in con-

tact with liquid refrigerant to give true reading.

CLOSED

OPEN

CLOSED

OPEN

GASKET

OPEN VALVE IN QUICK TEST SUB-MODE BEFORE DISASSEMBLING

EF05BD271 NV 32.5mm

EF05BD331 NV 36mm

50Nm (36 ft-lb)+ 30°

27mm / 1

ADAPTER

DISASSEMBLY

ASSEMBLY

NOTES:

1. Push down on valve piston to close valve before assembling.

2. After valve is assembled close valve in Quick Test sub-mode or cycle power before opening service valve.

Fig. 27 — Disassembly and Assembly of EXV Motor

NOTE: Open valve in Quick Test sub-mode before disassembling.

Cooler

FREEZE PROTECTION — Coolers can be ordered with

heaters installed in the factory. If equipped, the main base

board based on the outdoor-air temperature and the entering

and leaving water thermistors controls the cooler heaters. The

Heater Set Point is the sum of the freeze point and Cooler

Heater DT Setp (ConfigurationSERVHTR).

If the entering or leaving water temperature is less than the

Heater Set Point and the outdoor-air temperature is less than

the Heater Set Point – 2° F (1.1° C), then the heater will be

turned on.

If the Entering or Leaving Water Temperature is less than

the Brine Freeze Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) +

1.0° F (0.5° C), then the heater will be turned on along with the

pump.

Entire cooler is covered with closed-cell insulation applied

over the heater. Heater plus insulation protect cooler against

low ambient temperature freeze-up to –20 F (–28 C).

LOW FLUID TEMPERATURE — Main base board is pro-

grammed to shut chiller down if leaving fluid temperature

drops below 34 F (1.1 C) for water or below Brine Freeze

Setpoint (ConfigurationSERVLOSP) for brine units. The

unit will shut down without a pumpout. When fluid tempera-

ture rises to 6° F (3.3° C) above the leaving fluid set point,

safety resets and chiller restarts. Reset is automatic as long as

this is the first occurrence.

LOSS OF FLUID FLOW PROTECTION — All 30RB ma-

chines include an integral flow switch that protects the chiller

against loss of cooler flow.

TUBE PLUGGING — A leaky tube can be plugged until

retubing can be done. The number of tubes plugged determines

how soon the cooler must be retubed. If several tubes require

plugging, check with a local Carrier representative to find out

how the number and location of tubes can affect unit capacity.

Up to 10% of the tubes per refrigerant pass can be plugged.

Fig. 28 shows an Elliott tube plug and a cross-sectional view of

a plug in place. See Tables 42 and 43 for plug components.

Table 42 — Plug Component Part Numbers

*Order directly from Elliot Tube Company, Dayton, OH or RCD.

†Can be obtained locally.

Table 43 — Plug Component Dimensions

NOTE: Tubes next to gasket webs must be flush with tube sheet

(both ends).

For the 30RB150-390 coolers, the pass partition has a perfo-

rated distribution plate in the inlet pass to more uniformly

distribute the refrigerant as it enters the first pass tubes of the

cooler. The perforated distribution plate is on the tubesheet side

of the pass partition. A tube plug in a first pass tube will inter-

fere with the installation of pass partition. The tube plug must

be flush with the tube sheet to prevent this interference. The

pass partition is symmetrical, meaning the partition plate can be

rotated 180 degrees, however, the performance of the machine

will be affected if the pass partition is installed incorrectly.

RETUBING — When retubing is required, obtain service of

qualified personnel experienced in boiler maintenance and

repair. Most standard procedures can be followed when retub-

ing the coolers. An 8% crush is recommended when rolling

replacement tubes into the tubesheet.

The following Elliott Co. tube rolling tools are required:

• Expander Assembly

• Cage

• Mandrel

• Rolls

Place one drop of Loctite No. 609 or equivalent on top of

tube prior to rolling. This material is intended to “wick” into the

area of the tube that is not rolled into the tube sheet, and prevent

fluid from accumulating between the tube and the tube sheet.

IMPORTANT: If unit is installed in an area where

ambient temperatures fall below 32 F (0° C), it is rec-

ommended that a suitable corrosion-inhibited anti-

freeze solution be used in chilled water circuit.

CAUTION

Use extreme care when installing plugs to prevent damage

to the tube sheet section between the holes.

COMPONENTS FOR PLUGGING PART NUMBER

For Tubes

Brass Pin 853103-312*

Brass Ring 853002-322*

For Holes without tubes

Brass Pin 853103-375

Brass Ring 853002-377

Loctite No. 675 †

Locquic “N” †

PLUG COMPONENT

SIZE

in. mm

Tube sheet hole diameter 0.377-0.382 9.58-9.70

Tube OD 0.373-0.377 9.47-9.58

Tube ID after rolling (includes

expansion due to clearance.)

0.328 8.33

Fig. 28 — Elliott Tube Plug

TIGHTENING COOLER HEAD BOLTS (Fig. 29-33)

Gasket Preparation — When reassembling cooler heads, al-

ways use new gaskets. Gaskets are neoprene-based and are

brushed with a light film of compressor oil. Do not soak gasket

or gasket deterioration will result. Use new gaskets within

30 minutes to prevent deterioration. Reassemble cooler nozzle

end or plain end cover of the cooler with the gaskets. Torque all

cooler bolts to the following specification and sequence:

-in. Diameter Perimeter Bolts (Grade 5) . . . 150 to 170 ft-lb

(201 to 228 N-m)

-in. Diameter Flange Bolts (Grade 5) . . . . . . . . 70 to 90 ft-lb

(94 to 121 N-m)

-in. Diameter Center Stud (Grade 5). . . . . . . . . 70 to 90 ft-lb

(94 to 121 N-m)

1. Install all bolts finger tight, except for the suction flange

bolts. Installing these flanges will interfere with tighten-

ing the center stud nuts.

2. Bolt tightening sequence is outlined in Fig. 27-31. Follow

the numbering or lettering sequence so that pressure is

evenly applied to gasket.

3. Apply torque in one-third steps until required torque is

reached. Load all bolts to each one-third step before pro-

ceeding to next one-third step.

4. No less than one hour later, retighten all bolts to required

torque values.

5. After refrigerant is restored to system, check for refriger-

ant leaks using recommended industry practices.

6. Replace cooler insulation.

CHILLED WATER FLOW SWITCH — A factory-in-

stalled flow switch is installed in the cooler nozzle for all ma-

chines. This is a thermal-dispersion flow switch with no field

adjustments. The switch is set for approximately 0.5 ft/sec

flow. See Table 44 for unit flow rate information.

Table 44 — Unit Flow Rates

The sensor tip houses two thermistors and a heater element.

One thermistor is located in the sensor tip, closest to the flow-

ing fluid. This thermistor is used to detect changes in the flow

velocity of the liquid. The second thermistor is bonded to the

cylindrical wall and is affected only by changes in the tempera-

ture of the liquid. The thermistors are positioned to be in close

contact with the wall of the sensor probe and, at the same time,

to be kept separated from each other within the confines of the

probe.

In order to sense flow, it is necessary to heat one of the

thermistors in the probe. When power is applied, the tip of the

probe is heated. As the fluid starts to flow, heat will be carried

away from the sensor tip. Cooling of the first thermistor is a

function of how fast heat is conducted away by the flowing liq-

uid. The difference in temperature between the two thermistors

provides a measurement of fluid velocity past the sensor probe.

When fluid velocity is high, more heat will be carried away

from the heated thermistor and the temperature differential will

be small. As fluid velocity decreases, less heat will be taken

from the heated thermistor and there will be an increase in tem-

perature differential.

When unit flow rate is above the minimum flow rate, then

the output is switched on, sending 24 vac through a 560-ohm

dropping resistor. This provides 12 vac to the MBB to prove

flow has been established.

For recommended maintenance, check the sensor tip for

build-up every 6 months. Clean the tip with a soft cloth. If nec-

essary, build-up (e.g., lime) can be removed with a common

vinegar cleansing agent.

RTPF (Round Tube Plate Fin) Condenser Coil

Maintenance and Cleaning Recommenda-

tions — Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is essential to

maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination of contami-

nation and removal of harmful residues will greatly increase

the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The following

maintenance and cleaning procedures are recommended as part

of the routine maintenance activities to extend the life of the

coil.

REMOVE SURFACE LOADED FIBERS — Surface load-

ed fibers or dirt should be removed with a vacuum cleaner. If a

vacuum cleaner is not available, a soft non-metallic bristle

brush may be used. In either case, the tool should be applied in

the direction of the fins. Coil surfaces can be easily damaged

(fin edges can be easily bent over and damage to the coating of

a protected coil) if the tool is applied across the fins.

NOTE: Use of a water stream, such as a garden hose, against a

surface loaded coil will drive the fibers and dirt into the coil.

This will make cleaning efforts more difficult. Surface loaded

fibers must be completely removed prior to using low velocity

clean water rinse.

PERIODIC CLEAN WATER RINSE — A periodic clean

water rinse is very beneficial for coils that are applied in coastal

or industrial environments. However, it is very important that

the water rinse is made with very low velocity water stream to

avoid damaging the fin edges. Monthly cleaning is recom-

mended.

ROUTINE CLEANING OF COIL SURFACES — Rou-

tine cleaning with Totaline

environmentally balanced coil

cleaner is essential to extend the life of coils. This cleaner is

available from Carrier Replacement parts division as part num-

ber P902-0301 for a one gallon container, and part number

P902-0305 for a 5 gallon container. It is recommended that all

coils, including the standard copper tube aluminum fin, pre-

coated fin, copper fin, or e-coated coils be cleaned with the

Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner as described

below. Coil cleaning should be part of the unit’s regularly

scheduled maintenance procedures to ensure long life of the

coil. Failure to clean the coils may result in reduced durability

in the environment.

Avoid the use of:

• coil brighteners

• acid cleaning prior to painting

• high pressure washers

• poor quality water for cleaning

Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner is non-flam-

mable, hypoallergenic, nonbacterial, and a USDA accepted

biodegradable agent that will not harm the coil or surrounding

components such as electrical wiring, painted metal surfaces,

or insulation. Use of non-recommended coil cleaners is strong-

ly discouraged since coil and unit durability could be affected.

UNIT SIZE

30RB

COOLER

CONNECTION

SIZE (in.)

MINIMUM

FLOW - WATER

(GPM)

MINIMUM

FLOW - 40% EG

(GPM)

060-100 420 53

110-300 6 44 117

315-390 6 44 (per module) 117 (per module)

Fig. 29 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB060,070

Fig. 30 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB080-100

Fig. 31 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB110-130

Totaline Environmentally Balanced Coil Cleaner Applica-

tion Equipment

•2

gallon garden sprayer

• water rinse with low velocity spray nozzle.

Totaline Environmentally Balanced Coil Cleaner Applica-

tion Instructions

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coil

face or trapped within the mounting frame or brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety

glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and

gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Remove all surface loaded fibers and dirt with a vacuum

cleaner as described above.

4. Thoroughly wet finned surfaces with clean water and a

low velocity garden hose, being careful not to bend fins.

5. Mix Totaline environmentally balanced coil cleaner in a

gallon garden sprayer according to the instructions

included with the cleaner. The optimum solution tem-

perature is 100 F.

NOTE: Do NOT USE water in excess of 130 F, as the enzy-

matic activity will be destroyed.

6. Thoroughly apply Totaline environmentally balanced

coil cleaner solution to all coil surfaces including finned

area, tube sheets and coil headers.

7. Hold garden sprayer nozzle close to finned areas and

apply cleaner with a vertical, up-and-down motion. Avoid

spraying in horizontal pattern to minimize potential for

fin damage.

8. Ensure cleaner thoroughly penetrates deep into finned

areas.

9. Interior and exterior finned areas must be thoroughly

cleaned.

10. Finned surfaces should remain wet with cleaning solution

for 10 minutes.

11. Ensure surfaces are not allowed to dry before rinsing.

Reapplying cleaner as needed to ensure 10-minute satura-

tion is achieved.

12. Thoroughly rinse all surfaces with low velocity clean

water using downward rinsing motion of water spray

nozzle. Protect fins from damage from the spray nozzle.

Fig. 32 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB150-190, 315A/B, 345A/B, 360A/B, 390A/B

Fig. 33 — Bolt Tightening Sequence, 30RB210-300

CAUTION

Harsh chemicals, household bleach or acid or basic clean-

ers should not be used to clean outdoor or indoor coils of

any kind. These cleaners can be very difficult to rinse out

of the coil and can accelerate corrosion at the fin/tube inter-

face where dissimilar materials are in contact. If there is

dirt below the surface of the coil, use the Totaline

envi-

ronmentally balanced coil cleaner as described on page 57.

CAUTION

High velocity water from a pressure washer, garden hose,

or compressed air should never be used to clean a coil. The

force of the water or air jet will bend the fin edges and

increase airside pressure drop. Reduced unit performance

or nuisance unit shutdown may occur.

MCHX (Microchannel Heat Exchanger) Con-

denser Coil Maintenance and Cleaning Rec-

ommendations — Routine cleaning of coil surfaces is

essential to maintain proper operation of the unit. Elimination

of contamination and removal of harmful residues will greatly

increase the life of the coil and extend the life of the unit. The

following steps should be taken to clean MCHX condenser

coils:

1. Remove any foreign objects or debris attached to the coil

face or trapped within the mounting frame and brackets.

2. Put on personal protective equipment including safety

glasses and/or face shield, waterproof clothing and

gloves. It is recommended to use full coverage clothing.

3. Start high pressure water sprayer and purge any soap or

industrial cleaners from sprayer before cleaning condens-

er coils. Only clean potable water is authorized for clean-

ing condenser coils.

4. Clean condenser face by spraying the coil steady and uni-

formly from top to bottom while directing the spray

straight toward the coil. Do not exceed 900 psig or

30 degree angle. The nozzle must be at least 12 in. from

the coil face. Reduce pressure and use caution to prevent

damage to air centers.

As part of normal maintenance, check the coil for leaks and

corrosion. The condenser coil is connected to the refrigerant

circuit with a fitting that forms a dielectric coupling. The cou-

pling is held in place with two nuts and studs. The nuts should

be tightened to 10 lb-ft (13.6 N-m).

Condenser Fans — A formed metal mount bolted to the

fan deck supports each fan and motor assembly. A shroud and a

wire guard provide protection from the rotating fan. The ex-

posed end of fan motor shaft is protected from weather by

grease. If fan motor must be removed for service or replace-

ment, be sure to regrease fan shaft and reinstall fan guard. The

fan motor has a step in the motor shaft. For proper perfor-

mance, fan should be positioned such that it is securely seated

on this step. Tighten the bolt to 12 to 15 ft-lb (16 to 20 N-m).

Refrigerant Circuit

LEAK TESTING — Units are shipped with complete operat-

ing charge of refrigerant R-410A (see Physical Data tables

supplied in the 30RB Installation Instructions) and should be

under sufficient pressure to conduct a leak test. If there is no

pressure in the system, introduce enough nitrogen to search for

the leak. Repair the leak using good refrigeration practices.

After leaks are repaired, system must be evacuated and

dehydrated.

REFRIGERANT CHARGE — Refer to Physical Data tables

supplied in the 30RB Installation Instructions). Immediately

ahead of filter drier in each circuit is a factory-installed liquid

line service valve. Each filter drier has a

-in. Schrader con-

nection for charging liquid refrigerant.

Charging with Unit Off and Evacuated — Close liquid line

service valve before charging. Weigh in charge shown on unit

nameplate. Open liquid line service valve; start unit and allow

it to run several minutes fully loaded. Check for a clear sight

glass. Be sure clear condition is liquid and not vapor.

Charging with Unit Running — If charge is to be added while

unit is operating, all condenser fans and compressors must be

operating. It may be necessary to block condenser coils at low

ambient temperatures to raise condensing pressure to approxi-

mately 450 psig (3102 kPa) to turn all condenser fans on. Do

not totally block a coil to do this. Partially block all coils in

uniform pattern. Charge each circuit until sight glass shows

clear liquid, and has a liquid line temperature of 103 F (39 C) .

If unit has the HEVCF option, run unit in Service Test with all

compressors on. Fans will adjust high side pressure to the cor-

rect value, 125 F SCT (saturated condensing temperature),

450 psig.

Safety Devices — Chillers contain many safety devices

and protection logic built into electronic control. Following is a

brief summary of major safeties.

COMPRESSOR PROTECTION

Circuit Breaker — Each compressor is equipped with one

molded case circuit breaker to provide short circuit protection.

Do not bypass or increase size of a breaker to correct problems.

Determine cause for trouble and correct before resetting break-

er. Circuit breaker current rating is listed on individual circuit

breakers.

A high-pressure switch with a trip pressure of 641 psig

(4419 kPa) is mounted on the discharge line of each circuit.

Switch is wired in series with the SPM modules of all compres-

sors in the circuit. If switch opens, the SPM opens all compres-

sor contactors in the circuit and all compressors are locked off.

See the table below for high pressure switch protection.

CRANKCASE HEATERS — Each compressor has a 56-w

crankcase heater to prevent absorption of liquid refrigerant by

oil in crankcase when compressor is not running. Heater power

source is control power transformer.

Relief Devices — Fusible plugs are located in each

circuit to protect against damage from excessive pressures.

HIGH-SIDE PROTECTION — One device is located be-

tween condenser and filter drier; a second is on filter drier.

These are both designed to relieve pressure on a tempera-

ture rise to approximately 210 F (99 C).

LOW-SIDE PROTECTION — A device is located on

suction line and is designed to relieve pressure on a tempera-

ture rise to approximately 170 F (77 C).

CAUTION

Do not apply any chemical cleaners to MCHX condenser

coils. These cleaners can accelerate corrosion and damage

the coil.

CAUTION

Excessive water pressure will fracture the braze between

air centers and refrigerant tubes.

IMPORTANT: Check for proper fan rotation (coun-

terclockwise viewed from above). If necessary, switch

any 2 power leads to reverse fan rotation.

IMPORTANT: When adjusting refrigerant charge,

circulate fluid through cooler continuously to prevent

freezing and possible damage to the cooler. Do not over-

charge, and never charge liquid into the low-pressure

side of system.

DEVICE CUT-OUT CUT-IN

High Pressure

Switch

641 ± 10 psi

(4420 ± 70 kPa)

493 ± 29 psi

(3400 ± 200 kPa)

IMPORTANT: Never open any switch or disconnect

that deenergizes crankcase heaters unless unit is being

serviced or is to be shut down for a prolonged period.

After a prolonged shutdown or service, energize

crankcase heaters for 24 hours before starting unit.

Some local building codes require that relieved gases be

removed. This connection will allow conformance to this

requirement.

Compressors

COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT — To change out a

faulty compressor, refer to the compressor replacement proce-

dure included with the new compressor.

Compressor oil equalization line fittings use Roto-lok fit-

tings. If a leak is detected at these fittings, tighten fitting to 110

lb-ft (149 N-m). If leak persists, open system and inspect gas-

ket surface for foreign material or damage. If debris is found,

clean the surface and install a new gasket. If the gasket surface

is damaged, replace the compressor. Do not reuse gaskets.

OIL CHARGE — All units are factory charged with polyol

ester (POE) oil to

sight glass. Acceptable oil level for each

compressor is

full in the sight glass. Refer to installa-

tion instructions for oil quantity.

When additional oil or a complete charge is required it must

meet the following specifications:

• Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ICI Emkarate RL 32H

• Oil Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Inhibited polyol ester-based

synthetic compressor lubricant.

• ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Do not reuse drained oil or any oil that has been exposed to

the atmosphere.

SYSTEM BURNOUT CLEANUP PROCEDURE — Some

compressor electrical failures can cause the motor to burn.

When this occurs, byproducts such as sludge, carbon, and

acids contaminate the system. There are 2 classifications of

motor burnouts, mild and severe. Test the oil for acidity using a

POE oil acid test kit to determine the severity of the burnout.

In a mild burnout, there is little or no detectable odor.

Compressor oil is clear or slightly discolored. An acid test of

the oil will be negative. This type of failure is treated the same

as a mechanical failure. The liquid line filter drier or core

should be replaced.

In a severe burnout, there is a strong, pungent, rotten egg

odor. Compressor oil is very dark. Evidence of burning may be

present in the tubing connected to the compressor. An acid test

of the oil will be positive. The following steps should be taken

before restarting any compressors in the circuit.

1. Isolate compressors and recover refrigerant from com-

pressor section.

2. Remove oil from all compressors in the circuit. An oil

drain fitting is provided on each compressor. Pressurize

the low side of the compressor circuit with nitrogen. Less

than 10 psig (68.9 kPa) should be adequate. This will help

in the removal of the oil from the compressor sump. Dis-

pose of contaminated oil as per local codes and

regulations.

3. Replace failed compressor as outlined under compressor

replacement procedure.

4. Recharge the circuit with fresh oil. The circuit oil charge

information is supplied in the 30RB Installation Instruc-

tions. Oil level should be approximately

sight glass.

5. Install activated carbon (burnout) filter drier/core.

6. Leak check, evacuate and recharge refrigerant circuit.

7. Operate compressors. Check filter drier pressure drop

periodically. Replace cores if pressure drop exceeds

4 psig (27.6 kPa).

Perform additional acid test after 24 hours of operation.

Change liquid line filter drier/core if necessary. Replace with

standard filter drier/core once circuit is clean. Use the Carrier

Standard Service Techniques Manual as a reference source.

MAINTENANCE

Recommended Maintenance Schedule —

The

following are only recommended guidelines. Jobsite conditions

may dictate that maintenance schedule is performed more often

than recommended.

Routine:

For machines with e-coat condenser coils:

• Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and

industrial applications.

Every month:

• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary fol-

lowing recommended guidelines.

• Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrig-

erant loss and presence of moisture.

Every 3 months (for all machines):

• Check refrigerant charge.

• Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant

leaks, repair as necessary.

• Check chilled water flow switch operation.

• Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary fol-

lowing recommended guidelines.

• Check sight glass moisture indicator for moisture.

• Check all condenser fans for proper operation.

• Check compressor oil level.

• Check crankcase heater operation.

• Inspect pump seal, if equipped with a hydronic pump

package.

Every 12 months (for all machines):

• Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.

• Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.

• Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than

±2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated thermometer.

• Check accuracy of transducers, replace if greater than

±5 psi (34.47 kPa) variance.

• Check to be sure that the proper concentration of anti-

freeze is present in the chilled water loop, if applicable.

• Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.

WARNING

Do not supply power to unit with compressor cover

removed. Failure to follow this warning can cause a fire

resulting in personal injury or death.

WARNING

Exercise extreme caution when reading compressor cur-

rents when high-voltage power is on. Correct any of the

problems described below before installing and running a

replacement compressor. Wear safety glasses and gloves

when handling refrigerants. Failure to follow this warning

can cause a fire, resulting personal injury or death.

CAUTION

Do not manually operate contactors. Serious damage to the

machine may result.

CAUTION

The compressor in a Puron

system uses a polyol ester

(POE) oil. This oil is extremely hygroscopic, meaning it

absorbs water readily. POE oils can absorb 15 times as

much water as other oils designed for HCFC and CFC

refrigerants. Take all necessary precautions to avoid expo-

sure of the oil to the atmosphere.

• Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure

drop, replace as necessary.

• Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.

• Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.

• Check pump heater operation, if equipped.

• Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they

are securely fastened to the motor shaft.

• Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all

components.

Check for excessive cooler approach (Leaving Chilled

Water Temperature – Saturated Suction Temperature) which

may indicate fouling. Clean cooler vessel if necessary.

TROUBLESHOOTING

See Table 45 for an abbreviated list of symptoms, possible

causes and possible remedies.

Alarms and Alerts — The integral control system con-

stantly monitors the unit and generates warnings when abnor-

mal or fault conditions occur. Alarms may cause either a circuit

(Alert) or the whole machine (Alarm) to shutdown. Alarms and

Alerts are assigned codes as described in Fig. 34. The alarm/

alert indicator LED on the scrolling marquee or Navigator™

module is illuminated when any alarm or alert condition is

present. If an Alert is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will

blink. If an Alarm is active, the Alarm Indicator LED will

remain on. Currently active Alerts and Alarms can be found in

AlarmsALRMALM1 to ALM5.

The controller generates two types of alarms. Automatic

reset alarms will reset without any intervention if the condition

that caused the alarm corrects itself. Manual reset alarms

require the service technician to check for the alarm cause and

reset the alarm. The following method must be followed to

reset manual alarms:

Before resetting any alarm, first determine the cause of the

alarm and correct it. Enter the Alarms mode indicated by the

LED on the side of the scrolling marquee display. Press

and sub-mode AlarmR.ALM (Reset All Current

Alarms) is displayed. Press . The control will prompt

the user for a password, by displaying PASS and WORD. Press

to display 1111. Press for each character.

The default password is 0111. Use the arrow keys to change

each individual character. Use the up or down arrow keys to

toggle the display to YES and press . The alarms will

be reset. Indicator light will be turned off when switched

correctly. Do not reset the chiller at random without first inves-

tigating and correcting the cause(s) of the failure.

Each alarm is described by a three or four-digit code. The

first one or two digits indicate the alarm source and are listed

below. The last two digits pinpoint the problem. See Tables 46

and 47.

Table 45 — Troubleshooting

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE POSSIBLE REMEDY

Unit Does Not Run Check for power to unit • Check overcurrent protection device.

• Check non-fused disconnect (if equipped).

• Restore power to unit.

Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant.

Wrong or incorrect unit configuration Check unit configuration.

Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting

instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow trouble-

shooting instructions. Check capacity control overrides.

Unit Operates too Long or

Continuously

Low refrigerant charge Check for leak and add refrigerant.

Compressor or control contacts welded Replace contactor or relay.

Air in chilled water loop Purge water loop.

Non-condensables in refrigerant circuit. Remove refrigerant and recharge.

Inoperative EXV • Check EXV, clean or replace.

• Check EXV cable, replace if necessary.

• Check EXV board for output signal.

Circuit Does Not Run Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting

instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow trouble-

shooting instructions.

Circuit Does Not Load Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting

instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow trouble-

shooting instructions.

Low saturated suction temperature See Operating Modes 21, 22 and 23.

High circuit suction superheat The circuit capacity is not allowed increase if circuit superheat is greater

than 36 F (20 C). See Alarms P.08, P.09 and P.10 for potential causes.

Low suction superheat The circuit capacity is not allowed to increase if the circuit superheat is

less than 5 F (2.8 C). See Alarms P.11, P.12 and P.13 for potential causes.

Compressor Does Not Run Active alarm Check Alarm status. See separate Alarm and follow troubleshooting

instructions.

Active operating mode Check for Operating Modes. See Operating Modes and follow trouble-

shooting instructions.

Inoperative compressor contactor • Check control wiring.

• Check scroll protection module.

• Check contactor operation, replace if necessary.

Chilled Water Pump is ON,

but the Machine is OFF

Cooler freeze protection Chilled water loop temperature too low. Check cooler heater.

Table 46 — Alarm Codes

LEGEND

PREFIX

CODE

SUFFIX

CODE

DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

TYPE

PROBABLE CAUSE

.01

Compressor nn Motor

Temperature Too High

Compressor Motor

Sensor PTC resistance

is greater than 4.5k 

Circuit shut down

or not allowed to

start

Manual

Compressor failure,

wiring error, operation

outside of limits, improper

refrigerant charge

.02

Compressor nn Crankcase

Heater Failure

Crankcase heater

current not detected

when required or

detected when not

required.

Compressor shut

down or not

allowed to start

Manual

Wiring error, failed

crankcase heater,

failed SPM.

.03

Compressor nn High Pressure

Switch

High Pressure Switch

open.

Circuit shut down

or not allowed to

start

Manual

Wiring error, closed/

restricted discharge

valve, improper

refrigerant charge,

dirty condenser coils,

failed outdoor fan motor,

discharge pressure

transducer inaccuracy

.04

Compressor nn Motor Sensor

PTC Out of Range

Compressor Motor

Sensor PTC resistance

is less than 50 or

greater than 17k .

Circuit shut down

or not allowed to

start

Manual

Wiring error, operation

outside of limits, com-

pressor failure, improper

refrigerant charge

.05 Compressor nn Power Reset

24-VAC power lost to

SPM board.

Compressor shut

down or not

allowed to start

Automatic

Low voltage from main

power supply.

.06

Compressor nn Low Control

Voltage Alert

24-VAC power to SPM

board too low.

Compressor shut

down or not

allowed to start

Automatic

Low voltage from main

power supply.

EMM — Energy Management Module OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

EWT — Entering Water Temperature PTC — Positive Temperature Coefficient

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

HR — Heat Reclaim SPM — Scroll Protection Module

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure

Table 46 — Alarm Codes (cont)

LEGEND

PREFIX

CODE

SUFFIX

CODE

DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

TYPE

PROBABLE CAUSE

.A1

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board A1

No communication with

SPM

Affected com-

pressor is

shut down

Automatic

Wrong SPM address,

wrong unit configuration,

wiring error, power loss to

SPM.

.A2

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board A2

.A3

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board A3

.A4

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board A4

.B1

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board B1

.B2

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board B2

.B3

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board B3

.B4

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board B4

.C1

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board C1

.C2

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board C2

.C3

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board C3

.C4

Loss of Communication with

Compressor Board C4

.E1

Loss of Communication with

EXV Board Number 1

No communication with

EXV1

Circuit A & B shut

down or not

allowed to start

Automatic

Wrong module address,

wrong unit configuration,

wiring error, power loss to

module

.E2

Loss of Communication with

EXV Board Number 2

No communication with

EXV2

Circuit C shut

down or not

allowed to start

.F1

Loss of Communication with

Fan Board Number 1

No communication with

Fan Board 1

Circuit A & B shut

down or not

allowed to start

(060-150,

210-250)

Circuit A shut

down or not

allowed to start

(160-190,

275-300)

Automatic

Wrong module address,

wrong unit configuration,

wiring error, power loss to

module

.F2

Loss of Communication with

Fan Board Number 2

No communication with

Fan Board 2

Circuit B shut

down or not

allowed to start

(160-190,

275-300)

.F3

Loss of Communication with

Fan Board Number 3

No communication with

Fan Board 3

Circuit C shut

down or not

allowed to start

(210-300)

.O1

Loss of Communication with

Free Cooling Board

No communication with

Free Cooling Board

None Automatic Configuration error.

.O2

Loss of Communication with

Electrical Heaters Board

No communication with

Electrical Heaters Board

.O3

Loss of Communication with

Energy Management Board

No communication with

Energy Management

Board

Disable or not

allow EMM

Functions

(3-Step and

4-20 mA Demand

Limit, 4-20 mA

and Space

Temperature

Reset, Occu-

pancy Override,

and Ice Build)

Automatic

Wrong module address,

wrong unit configuration,

wiring error, power loss to

module

.O4

Loss of Communication with

Heat Reclaim Board

No communication with

Heat Reclaim Board

Unit shall return

to the standard air

cooled mode

Automatic

Wrong module address,

wrong unit configuration,

wiring error, power loss to

module

EMM — Energy Management Module OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

EWT — Entering Water Temperature PTC — Positive Temperature Coefficient

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

HR — Heat Reclaim SPM — Scroll Protection Module

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure

Table 46 — Alarm Codes (cont)

LEGEND

PREFIX

CODE

SUFFIX

CODE

DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

TYPE

PROBABLE CAUSE

.01

Circuit A Welded Contactor

Failure

Controls determine com-

pressor is still running

when circuit should be off

EXV, fan control,

and pump oper-

ate as normal to

save compressor

until high pres-

sure, freeze, or

flow failure condi-

tions occur

Manual

One or more circuit com-

pressor contactors

welded closed.

.02

Circuit B Welded Contactor

Failure

Controls determine com-

pressor is still running

when circuit should be off

EXV, fan control,

and pump oper-

ate as normal to

save compressor

until high pres-

sure, freeze, or

flow failure condi-

tions occur

Manual

One or more circuit com-

pressor contactors

welded closed.

.03

Circuit C Welded Contactor

Failure

Controls determine com-

pressor is still running

when circuit should be off

EXV, fan control,

and pump oper-

ate as normal to

save compressor

until high pres-

sure, freeze, or

flow failure condi-

tions occur

Manual

One or more circuit com-

pressor contactors

welded closed.

.n0

Initial Factory Configuration

Required

No configuration

Unit not allowed

to start

Automatic

Configuration error. Pass-

word may default to

0113.

.nn Illegal Configuration

Wrong or incompatible

configuration data

Unit not allowed

to start

Automatic Configuration error.

MC .nn

Master Chiller Configuration

Error

Wrong or incompatible

configuration data

Unit not allowed

to start in Master-

Slave Control

Automatic

Configuration error. Refer

to Table 49.

.01

Water Exchanger Freeze

Protection

Entering or Leaving

Thermistor sensed a

temperature at or below

freeze point.

Unit shut down or

not allowed to

start. Chilled

Water Pump will

be started

Automatic, first

occurrence in

24 hours,

Manual, if

multiple

alarms within

24 hours

Faulty thermistor, faulty

wiring, low water flow

rate, low loop volume, or

freeze conditions.

.05

Circuit A Low Suction

Temperature

Low Saturated Suction

Temperatures sensed for

a period of time.

Circuit shut down

Automatic, first

occurrence in

24 hours,

Manual, if

multiple

alarms within

24 hours

Faulty transducer, faulty

wiring, low water flow

rate, low loop volume,

fouled cooler, or freeze

conditions.

.06

Circuit B Low Suction

Temperature

.07

Circuit C Low Suction

Temperature

.08 Circuit A High Superheat

EXV>98%, Suction

Superheat >54 F (30.0 C)

and SST<MOP for more

than 5 minutes

Circuit shut down Manual

Faulty transducer, faulty

thermistor, faulty wiring,

faulty EXV, low refriger-

ant charge, plugged or

restricted liquid line.

.09 Circuit B High Superheat

.10 Circuit C High Superheat

.11 Circuit A Low Superheat

EXV 5% and Suction

Superheat is less than

the superheat setting by

at least 5 F (2.8 C) or

SST>Maximum Operat-

ing Pressure for more

than 5 minutes

Circuit shut down

Automatic, first

occurrence in

24 hours,

Manual, if

multiple

alarms within

24 hours

Faulty transducer, faulty

thermistor, faulty wiring,

faulty EXV, or incorrect

configuration.

.12 Circuit B Low Superheat

.13 Circuit C Low Superheat

.14 Cooler Interlock Failure

Cooler Pump Interlock

circuit opens (consists of

chilled water flow system

and chilled water pump

interlock)

Unit shut down or

not allowed to

start

Automatic if

stage=0,

Manual if

stage>0.

Low Water Flow, faulty

wiring or contacts, faulty

water flow switch, or

chilled water pump

problem. Remote lockout

if unit is equipped with an

EMM.

EMM — Energy Management Module OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

EWT — Entering Water Temperature PTC — Positive Temperature Coefficient

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

HR — Heat Reclaim SPM — Scroll Protection Module

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure

Table 46 — Alarm Codes (cont)

LEGEND

PREFIX

CODE

SUFFIX

CODE

DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

TYPE

PROBABLE CAUSE

.15 Condenser Flow Switch Failure — None Manual Configuration error.

.16

Compressor A1 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

Compressor differential

(Discharge-Suction) did

not increase by 10 psig

(69 kPa) in 2 minutes

Circuit shut down Manual

No power to the com-

pressor, faulty compres-

sor contactor, low control

voltage, faulty discharge

or suction pressure

transducers, wiring

error, improper electrical

phasing.

.17

Compressor A2 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.18

Compressor A3 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.19

Compressor A4 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.20

Compressor B1 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.21

Compressor B2 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.22

Compressor B3 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.23

Compressor B4 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.24

Compressor C1 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.25

Compressor C2 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.26

Compressor C3 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.27

Compressor C4 Not Started or

Pressure not Established

.28

Electrical Box Thermostat

Failure

Improper phasing

detected by the reverse

rotation board

Unit not allowed

to start

Automatic

Check power phasing,

improper wiring, or faulty

detection board.

.29

Loss of Communication with

System Manager

Loss of communication

with an external control

device for more than

2 minutes

Unit changes to

stand alone

operation

Automatic

Faulty communication

wiring, no power supply

to the external controller.

.30

Master/Slave Communication

Failure

Communication between

the master and slave

machines has been lost.

Units operate as

stand alone

machines

Automatic

Faulty communication

wiring, no power or con-

trol power to the main

base board to either

module.

.31 Unit is in Emergency Stop

Emergency Stop com-

mand has been received.

Unit shuts down

or not allowed to

start.

Automatic

Carrier Comfort Net-

work

Emergency Stop

Command received.

.32 Cooler Pump 1 Fault

Pump Interlock status

does not match pump

status.

Unit shuts down.

If available,

another pump will

start.

Manual

Faulty contacts, wiring

error, or low control

voltage.

.33 Cooler Pump 2 Fault

.34

Circuit A Reclaim Operation

Failure

Circuit A Reclaim Opera-

tion Failure

Reclaim operation

failure due to high

SCT

The affected

circuit shall

return to air

cooled mode

Manual

.35

Circuit B Reclaim Operation

Failure

Circuit B Reclaim Opera-

tion Failure

.37

Circuit A Repeated High

Discharge Gas Overrides

Multiple capacity

overrides due to high

saturated discharge

temperatures

Circuit shut down Automatic

Condenser air recircula-

tion, dirty or plugged con-

denser coils, inaccurate

discharge transducer,

faulty condenser fan,

.38

Circuit B Repeated High

Discharge Gas Overrides

.39

Circuit C Repeated High

Discharge Gas Overrides

.40

Circuit A Repeated Low

Suction Temperature Overrides

Multiple capacity over-

rides due to low saturated

suction temperatures

Circuit shut down Manual

Low water flow, low loop

volume, fouled cooler,

low refrigerant charge,

unit not configured for

brine with glycol in cooler.

.41

Circuit B Repeated Low

Suction Temperature Overrides

.42

Circuit C Repeated Low

Suction Temperature Overrides

.97

Water Exchanger Temperature

Sensors Swapped

Control detects EWT

below LWT for 1 minute

Unit shuts down Manual Wiring error. EWT and

LWT sensors swapped.

EMM — Energy Management Module OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

EWT — Entering Water Temperature PTC — Positive Temperature Coefficient

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

HR — Heat Reclaim SPM — Scroll Protection Module

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure

Table 46 — Alarm Codes (cont)

LEGEND

PREFIX

CODE

SUFFIX

CODE

DESCRIPTION REASON FOR ALARM

ACTION TAKEN

BY CONTROL

RESET

TYPE

PROBABLE CAUSE

.01 Circuit A Discharge Transducer

Measured voltage is

0 vdc

Circuit shut down

or not allowed to

start.

Automatic

Faulty transducer, wiring

error, failed Main Base

Board or Fan Board 3.

Compressor circuit

breaker tripped.

.02 Circuit B Discharge Transducer

.03 Circuit C Discharge Transducer

.04 Circuit A Suction Transducer

.05 Circuit B Suction Transducer

.06 Circuit C Suction Transducer

.07

Circuit A Reclaim Pumpdown

Pressure Transducer

The affected cir-

cuit shall return to

air cooled mode

Automatic

Faulty transducer, wiring

error, failed EMM HR

board.

.08

Circuit B Reclaim Pumpdown

Pressure Transducer

Sr .nn Service Maintenance Alert

Field programmed

elapsed time has expired

for maintenance item

None Manual

Maintenance required

(see Table 50).

.01

Water Exchanger Entering

Fluid Thermistor Failure

Temperature measured

by the controller is less

than -40 F (-40 C) or

greater than 240 F

(115.6 C)

Unit will be shut

down or not

allowed to start.

Automatic

Faulty thermistor, wiring

error, failed Main Base

Board.

.02

Water Exchanger Leaving Fluid

Thermistor Failure

.03

Circuit A Defrost Thermistor

Failure

None Automatic Configuration error.

.04

Circuit B Defrost Thermistor

Failure

.08

Reclaim Condenser Entering

Thermistor

Unit shall return

to the standard air

cooled mode.

Automatic

Faulty thermistor, wiring

error, failed EMM HR

board.

.09

Reclaim Condenser Leaving

Thermistor

None

.10 OAT Thermistor Failure

Unit is shut down

or not allowed to

start. Cooler/

Pump heaters are

energized

Automatic

Faulty thermistor, wiring

error, failed Main Base

Board.

.11

Master/Slave Common Fluid

Thermistor

Dual Chiller deac-

tivated. Master

and Slave

machines oper-

ate in stand alone

mode

.12

Circuit A Suction Gas

Thermistor

Temperature measured

by the controller is less

than -40 F (-40 C) or

greater than 240 F

(115.6 C)

Circuit shut down

Automatic

Faulty thermistor, wiring

error, failed Main Base

Board or EXV Board

.13

Circuit B Suction Gas

Thermistor

Circuit shut down

.14

Circuit C Suction Gas

Thermistor

Circuit shut down

.18

Circuit A Condenser Subcool-

ing Liquid Thermistor

Unit shall return

to the standard air

cooled mode.

Automatic

Faulty thermistor, wiring

error, failed EMM HR

board.

.19

Circuit B Condenser Subcool-

ing Liquid Thermistor

.21

Space Temperature Sensor

Failure

Temperature

Reset based on

Space Tempera-

ture disabled

Faulty thermistor, wiring

error, failed Main Base

Board.

V0 xx

Circuit A Variable Speed Fan

Motor Failure

See Table 47 — Variable

Speed Fan Motor Alarm

Details on page 68

Danfoss drive only.

Alert—No action

Alarm—Circuit is

stopped

Automatic

See Table 47 — Variable

Speed Fan Motor Alarm

Details on page 68.

V1 xx

Circuit B Variable Speed Fan

Motor Failure

V2 xx

Circuit C Variable Speed Fan

Motor Failure

EMM — Energy Management Module OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

EWT — Entering Water Temperature PTC — Positive Temperature Coefficient

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve SCT — Saturated Condensing Temperature

HR — Heat Reclaim SPM — Scroll Protection Module

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature SST — Saturated Suction Temperature

MOP — Maximum Operating Pressure

Table 47 — Variable Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details, Danfoss Drive

NOTES:

1. (X) = Dependent on parameter

2. Trip lock condition is an alarm for a condition that could cause

damage to the drive. The alarm can only be reset by cycling

power to the drive.

3. If a warning and an alarm are marked against a code in the

table, this means that either a warning occurs before the alarm,

or it can be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is

to be displayed for a given fault.

4. Alarms are shown on the drive in parameters 16-90 through 16-

95. Parameters can only be accessed with drive display service

tool.

NO. DESCRIPTION WARNING

ALARM/

TRIP

ALARM/

TRIP LOCK

PARAMETER

REFERENCE

1 10 Volts low X

2 Live zero error (X) (X) 6-01

3 No motor (X) 1-80

4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) 14-12

5 DC link voltage high X

6 DC link voltage low X

7 DC over voltage X X

8 DC under voltage X X

9 Inverter overloaded X X

10 Motor ETR overtemperature (X) (X) 1-90

11 Motor thermistor over temperature (X) (X) 1-90

12 Torque limit X X

13 Over current X X X

14 Earth fault X X X

15 Hardware mismatch X X

16 Short circuit X X

17 Control word timeout (X) (X) 8-04

18 Start failed X

23 Internal fan fault X

24 External fan fault X 14-53

25 Barke resistor short-circuited X

26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) 2-13

27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X

28 Brake check (X) (X) 2-15

29 Drive over temperature X X X

30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58

31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58

32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58

33 Inrush fault X X

34 Field bus communication fault X X

35 Out of frequency range X X

36 Mains failure X X

37 Phase imbalance X X

38 Internal fault X X

39 Heatsink sensor X X

40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) 5-00, 5-01

41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) 5-00, 5-02

42 Overload of Digital Output Terminal On X30/6 (X) 5-32

42 Overload of Digital Output Terminal On X30/7 (X) 5-33

46 Power card supply X X

47 24 V supply low X X X

48 1.8 V supply low X X

49 Speed limit X (X) 1-86

50 AMA calibration failed X

51 AMA check U

nom

and I

nom

52 AMA low I

nom

53 AMA motor too big X

54 AMA motor too small X

55 AMA parameter out of range X

56 AMA interrupted by user X

57 AMA timeout X

58 AMA internal fault X X

59 Current limit X

60 External Interlock X

Table 47 — Variable Speed Fan Motor Alarm Details, Danfoss Drive (cont)

NOTES:

1. (X) = Dependent on parameter

2. Trip lock condition is an alarm for a condition that could cause

damage to the drive. The alarm can only be reset by cycling

power to the drive.

3. If a warning and an alarm are marked against a code in the

table, this means that either a warning occurs before the alarm,

or it can be specified whether it is a warning or an alarm that is

to be displayed for a given fault.

4. Alarms are shown on the drive in parameters 16-90 through 16-

95. Parameters can only be accessed with drive display service

tool.

NO. DESCRIPTION WARNING

ALARM/

TRIP

ALARM/

TRIP LOCK

PARAMETER

REFERENCE

62 Output frequency at maximum limit X

64 Voltage limit X

65 Control board over-temperature X X X

66 Heat sink temperature low X

67 Option configuration has changed X

69 Power card temperature X X

70 Illegal FC configuration X

71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X X

72 Dangerous failure X

73 Safe stop auto restart

76 Power unit setup X

79 Illegal PS configuration X X

80 Drive initialized to default value X

91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X

92 NoFlow X X 22-2

93 Dry pump X X 22-2

94 End of curve X X 22-5

95 Broken belt X X 22-6

96 Start delayed X 22-7

97 Stop delayed X 22-7

98 Clock fault X 0-7

201 Fire M was active

202 Fire M limits exceeded

203 Missing motor

204 Locked rotor

243 Brake IGBT X X

244 Heatsink temperature X X X

245 Heatsink sensor X X

246 Power card supply X X

247 Power card temperature X X

248 Illegal PS configuration X X

DIAGNOSTIC ALARM CODES AND POSSIBLE

CAUSES

Motor Temperature Too High

A1.01 — Compressor A1

A2.01 — Compressor A2

A3.01 — Compressor A3

A4.01 — Compressor A4

B1.01 — Compressor B1

B2.01 — Compressor B2

B3.01 — Compressor B3

B4.01 — Compressor B4

C1.01 — Compressor C1

C2.01 — Compressor C2

C3.01 — Compressor C3

C4.01 — Compressor C4

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked whether the

compressor is ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the

scroll protection module (SPM) detects a compressor motor

PTC (positive temperature coefficient) resistance greater than

4500 ohms, indicating that the motor temperature is too high.

Action to be Taken — The circuit shuts down immediately or

is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Manual. PTC resistance must be less than

2500 ohms

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check for a PTC thermistor failure.

• Check for a compressor motor failure.

• Check for a wiring error.

• Check wiring terminations for corrosion.

• Check for operation outside of the limits.

• Check for condenser air recirculation.

• Check the circuit for proper charge.

• Check the EXV for proper operation.

• Check the EXV input devices, pressure transducer and

temperature for accuracy.

• Check the liquid line filter drier for a restriction.

Crankcase Heater Failure

A1.02 — Compressor A1

A2.02 — Compressor A2

A3.02 — Compressor A3

A4.02 — Compressor A4

B1.02 — Compressor B1

B2.02 — Compressor B2

B3.02 — Compressor B3

B4.02 — Compressor B4

C1.02 — Compressor C1

C2.02 — Compressor C2

C3.02 — Compressor C3

C4.02 — Compressor C4

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked whether the

compressor is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module

(SPM) monitors crankcase heater current draw. This family of

alarms is generated if one of the following criteria is detected:

1. The SPM fails to detect a crankcase current draw of at

least 0.5 amp while the crankcase heater is ON.

2. The SPM detects a crankcase current draw of at least

0.5 amp while the crankcase heater is OFF. The current is

sensed internally on the SPM.

Action to be Taken — If a fault is detected, the affected com-

pressor will be shut down or not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Manual

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the wiring to the crankcase heater.

• Check the crankcase heater for operation.

• Check the SPM crankcase heater output operation.

• Confirm unit configuration.

High Pressure Switch

A1.03 — Compressor A1

A2.03 — Compressor A2

A3.03 — Compressor A3

A4.03 — Compressor A4

B1.03 — Compressor B1

B2.03 — Compressor B2

B3.03 — Compressor B3

B4.03 — Compressor B4

C1.03 — Compressor C1

C2.03 — Compressor C2

C3.03 — Compressor C3

C4.03 — Compressor C4

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked whether the

circuit is ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the circuit

high-pressure switch (HPS) opens. The scroll protection mod-

ule (SPM) monitors the HPS. The 30RB units employ one

HPS for each circuit. The HPS signal is connected to all of the

SPM modules of the circuit.

Action to be Taken — The circuit shuts down immediately or

is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Manual

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the wiring of the high pressure switch circuit. Be sure

the HPS is connected to all of the SPM boards in the circuit.

• Check the maximum condensing temperature (MCT) for

the proper setting.

• Check for noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit.

• Check for condenser air re-circulation.

• Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged).

• Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine.

• Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction.

• Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation

and operation.

• Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open.

A closed or restricted valve is a potential high pressure trip.

• Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Alarm Descriptor

Alarm Suffix

Code Number to identify source

.01

Alarm Prefix

A1 – Compressor A1 Failure

A2 – Compressor A2 Failure

A3 – Compressor A3 Failure

A4 – Compressor A4 Failure

B1 – Compressor B1 Failure

B2 – Compressor B2 Failure

B3 – Compressor B3 Failure

B4 – Compressor B4 Failure

C1 – Compressor C1 Failure

C2 – Compressor C2 Failure

C3 – Compressor C3 Failure

C4 – Compressor C4 Failure

Co – Communication Failure

Ct – Circuit Welded Contactor Failure

FC – Factory Configuration Error

MC – Master Chiller Configuration Error

P – Process Failure

Pr – Pressure Transducer Failure

Sr – Service Notification

th – Thermistor Failure

V0 – Circuit A Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure

V1 – Circuit B Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure

V2 – Circuit C Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure

Alarm

Fig. 34 — Alarm Description

Motor Sensor PTC Out of Range

A1.04 — Compressor A1

A2.04 — Compressor A2

A3.04 — Compressor A3

A4.04 — Compressor A4

B1.04 — Compressor B1

B2.04 — Compressor B2

B3.04 — Compressor B3

B4.04 — Compressor B4

C1.04 — Compressor C1

C2.04 — Compressor C2

C3.04 — Compressor C3

C4.04 — Compressor C4

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked whether the

circuit is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module (SPM)

monitors the compressor motor temperature. This alarm will

be generated if the motor sensor PTC in the compressor resis-

tance is less than 50 ohms or greater than 17,000 ohms.

Action to be Taken — The circuit shuts down immediately or

not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Manual

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the scroll compressor protec-

tion module (SPM).

• Check for a faulty SPM.

• Check for a compressor failure.

• Check for noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit.

• Check for condenser air re-circulation.

• Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged).

• Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine.

• Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction.

• Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation

and operation.

• Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it is open.

• Check the discharge pressure transducer for accuracy.

• Confirm unit configuration.

SPM Board Power Reset

A1.05 – Compressor A1

A2.05 – Compressor A2

A3.05 – Compressor A3

A4.05 – Compressor A4

B1.05 – Compressor B1

B2.05 – Compressor B2

B3.05 – Compressor B3

B4.05 – Compressor B4

C1.05 – Compressor C1

C2.05 – Compressor C2

C3.05 – Compressor C3

C4.05 – Compressor C4

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked whether the

compressor is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module

(SPM) monitors the 24 vac at the compressor through the high

pressure switch input channel. This alarm will be generated if

the main base board receives a signal from the SPM board

indicating that the compressor went through a power cycle.

Action to be Taken — The compressor is shut down immedi-

ately or not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the voltage from the main three phase power

supply

• Check the 24 vac wiring connections to the scroll com-

pressor protection module (SPM)

• Check for a faulty SPM.

SPM Board Low Control Voltage Alert

A1.06 – Compressor A1

A2.06 – Compressor A2

A3.06 – Compressor A3

A4.06 – Compressor A4

B1.06 – Compressor B1

B2.06 – Compressor B2

B3.06 – Compressor B3

B4.06 – Compressor B4

C1.06 – Compressor C1

C2.06 – Compressor C2

C3.06 – Compressor C3

C4.06 – Compressor C4

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked whether the

compressor is ON or OFF. The scroll protection module

(SPM) monitors the 24 vac at the compressor through the high

pressure switch input channel. This alarm will be generated if

the main base board receives a signal from the SPM board

indicating that the 24 vac level was lower than the allowed

minimum threshold.

Action to be Taken — The compressor is shut down immedi-

ately or not allowed to start as to prevent any contactor chatter-

ing/welding from occurring.

Reset Method — Automatic

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the voltage from the main three phase power

supply.

• Check the 24 vac wiring connections to the scroll com-

pressor protection module (SPM).

• Check for a faulty SPM.

Loss of Communication with Compressor

Co.A1 — Board A1

Co.A2 — Board A2

Co.A3 — Board A3

Co.A4 — Board A4

Co.B1 — Board B1

Co.B2 — Board B2

Co.B3 — Board B3

Co.B4 — Board B4

Co.C1 — Board C1

Co.C2 — Board C2

Co.C3 — Board C3

Co.C4 — Board C4

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is ON or OFF. If communication with the scroll compres-

sor protection module (SPM) is lost for a period of 10 seconds,

the alarm will be generated.

Action to be Taken — The affected compressor will be shut

down.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the compressor, if called for will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power supply to the affected SPM.

• Check the address of the SPM to be sure that it is correct.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Co.E1— Loss of Communication with EXV Board Number 1

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is ON or OFF. If communication with EXV1 is lost for a

period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — If running, Circuit A and B will shut

down normally. If Circuit A or Circuit B is not operating, it

will not be allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the unit will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power supply to EXV1.

• Check the address of the EXV1 to be sure that it is

correct.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Co.E2 — Loss of Communication with EXV Board Number 2

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is tested whether the

unit is ON or OFF, on 30RB210-300 units only.

Action to be Taken — If communication with EXV Board 2 is

lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. If

running, Circuit C will shut down normally. If Circuit C is not

running, it will not be allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the unit will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power supply to EXV Board 2.

• Check the address of the EXV Board 2 to be sure that it

is correct.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Co.F1 — Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 1

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. If communication with Fan Board 1 is lost for a

period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — For 30RB060-150 and 30RB210-250,

Circuit A and B will shut down normally if they are running.

For 30RB160-190 and 30RB275-300, Circuit A will shut

down normally if it is running. If the circuit or circuits con-

trolled by the board are not running, then they will not be

allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the unit will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power supply to Fan Board 1.

• Check the address of the Fan Board 1 to be sure that it is

correct.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Co.F2 — Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 2

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF and on 30RB160-190, 275, and 300 only.

Action to be Taken — If communication with Fan Board 2 is

lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered. If

running, Circuit B will shut down normally for 30RB160-190,

275 and 300. If Circuit B is not running for 30RB160-190, 275

and 300, then it will not be allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the unit will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power supply to Fan Board 2.

• Check the address of the Fan Board 2 to be sure that it is

correct.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Co.F3 — Loss of Communication with Fan Board Number 3

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF, and on 30RB210-300 machines only. If

communication with Fan Board 3 is lost for a period of 10 sec-

onds, the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — If running, Circuit C will shut down nor-

mally for 30RB210-300. If the circuit is not running for

30RB210-300, then it will not be allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the unit will start normally.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power supply to Fan Board 3.

• Check the address of the Fan Board 3 to be sure that it is

correct.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Co.O1 — Loss of Communication with Free Cooling Board

Criteria for Trip — This alarm is for a free cooling machine

only. This feature is not supported for a cooling only machine.

Action to be Taken — None

Reset Method — Automatic

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

unit configuration.

Co.O2 — Loss of Communication with Electrical Heaters Board

Criteria for Trip — This alarm is for a heat pump machines

only. This feature is not supported for a cooling only machine.

Action to be Taken — None

Reset Method — Automatic

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

unit configuration.

Co.O3 — Loss of Communication with Energy Management

Board

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF and when a function that requires the energy

management module (EMM) is configured. If communication

with the EMM is lost for a period of 10 seconds, the alarm will

be triggered.

Action to be Taken — If any function controlled by the EMM

(3-Step and 4-20 mA Demand Limit, 4-20 mA and Space

Temperature Reset, Occupancy Override, and Ice Build) is

active, that function will be terminated. If an EMM function is

programmed, and communication is lost, the function will not

be allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if communication is established,

the functions will be enabled.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check configuration to see if the EMM is installed, (Con-

figurationUNITEMM). If (EMM=YES), check for

a control option that requires the EMM that may be

enabled. Correct configuration if not correct.

• Check the power supply to EMM.

• Check the address of the EMM to be sure that it is correct.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Check unit configuration to be sure that no options that

require the EMM are enabled.

Co.O4 — Loss of Communication with Heat Reclaim Board

Criteria for Trip — This alarm is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF and when the unit is configured for Heat Reclaim.

If communication with the heat reclaim board is lost for a

period of 10 seconds, the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — The unit will return to the air cooled

mode.

Reset Method — Automatic, when communication is estab-

lished, the functions will be enabled.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power supply to heat reclaim board.

• Check the Local Equipment Network (LEN) wiring to be

sure that it is connected properly.

• Check unit configuration to be sure that Heat Reclaim is

enabled and unit does NOT contain the Heat Reclaim

option.

Welded Contactor Failure

Ct.01 – Circuit A

Ct.02 – Circuit B

Ct.03 – Circuit C

Criteria For Trip — This alarm is tested for when the circuit is

off (all compressors switched to off). The algorithm will evalu-

ate saturated suction and saturated condensing temperatures to

determine if the compressor is still running even though it has

been commanded off.

Action to be Taken

1. Unit capacity will go to and remain at 0%. The EXV, fan

control, and cooler pump will continue their normal

operation.

2. If a high pressure, cooler flow, or cooler freeze failure oc-

curs, then circuit operation is disabled. The critical alarm

relay will be energized in order to shut off the main power

supply.

Reset Method — Reset is manual.

FC.n0 — Initial Factory Configuration Required

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. The alarm will be generated if the Configuration

UNITTONS=0.

Action to be Taken — The unit is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic after factory configuration is com-

plete. The configuration must be manually completed. The

password may default to 0113.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

the unit configuration.

FC.nn — Illegal Configuration

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. The alarm will be generated if the one of the fol-

lowing configuration errors is detected by the control. The

“nn” refers to the error code listed in Table 48.

Table 48 — Illegal Configuration Alarm Code

Action to be Taken — The unit is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic after factory reconfiguration is

completed. A power cycle may be required.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

the unit configuration.

MC.nn — Master Chiller Configuration Error

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. The units must be configured as a Master and

Slave machine (ConfigurationRSETMSSL=1 and Con-

figurationRSETMSSL=2), and one of the following

configuration errors has been found. The “nn” refers to the

error code listed in Table 49.

Action to be Taken — Unit not allowed to start in Master Slave

control.

Reset Method — Automatic

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

proper configuration.

P.01 — Water Exchanger Freeze Protection

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criteria are checked whether the

unit is ON or OFF. If the entering or leaving water thermistor

senses a temperature at the freeze point or less, the alarm will

be generated. For a fresh water system (Configuration

SERVFLUD=1), the freeze point is 34 F (1.1 C).

For medium temperature brine systems (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2), the freeze point is Brine Freeze Set

Point (ConfigurationSERVLOSP).

Action to be Taken — Unit shut down or not allowed to start.

Chilled water pump will be started.

Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours if

LWT rises to 6° F (3° C) above set point. Manual, if more than

one occurrence in 24 hours.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the entering and leaving fluid thermistors for

accuracy.

• Check the water flow rate.

• Check loop volume. Low loop volume at nominal flow

rates can in extreme cases bypass cold water to the

cooler.

• Check for freezing conditions.

• Check heater tape and other freeze protection items for

proper operation.

• Check glycol concentration and adjust LOSP accord-

ingly.

• If the Leaving Water Set Point is above 40 F (4.4 C) and

there is glycol in the loop, consider using the Medium

Temperature Brine option (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2) to utilize the brine freeze point

instead of 34 F (1.1 C).

Low Suction Temperature

P.05 — Circuit A

P.06 — Circuit B

P.07 — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the circuit

is ON. This alarm is generated if one of the following criteria is

met:

• If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below

–13 F (–25 C) for more than 30 seconds.

• If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below

–22 F (–30 C) for more than 8 seconds.

• If the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature is below

–40 F (–40 C) for more than 3 seconds.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down immediately.

Prior to the alarm trip, the control will take action to avoid

the alarm. See Operating Modes 21, 22 and 23 on page 48.

• Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours.

Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours.

ERROR

CODE

DESCRIPTION

01 Unit size is unknown.

02 Reclaim option selected for Heat Pump machine.

Hot Gas Bypass configured for a Heat Pump

machine.

Number of Fans controlled by Motormaster

con-

trol is greater than expected.

Table 49 — Master/Slave Alarm Code

LEGEND

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to Main Base Board (P.05 and

P.06) or Fan Board 3 (P.07).

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Check for a faulty transducer.

• Check cooler water flow.

• Check loop volume.

• Check EXV operation.

• Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier,

service valve, etc.

• Check the refrigerant charge.

• If the Leaving Water Set Point is above 40 F (4.4 C)

and there is glycol in the loop, consider using the

Medium Temperature Brine option (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2) to utilize the brine freeze point

instead of 34 F (1.1 C).

High Superheat

P.08 — Circuit A

P.09 — Circuit B

P.10 — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the circuit

is ON. This alarm is generated if all of the following criteria

are met:

1. The EXV position is equal to or greater than 98%.

2. The circuit’s Suction Superheat (Suction Gas Tempera-

ture – Saturated Suction Temperature) is greater than 54

F (30.0 C).

3. The circuit’s Saturated Suction Temperature is less than

Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) set point (Config-

urationSERVMOP) for more than 5 minutes.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down normally.

Reset Method — Manual.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the suction pressure transducer wiring to Main

Base Board (P.08 and P.09) or Fan Board 3 (P.10).

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Check for a faulty transducer.

• Check the suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1

(P.08 and P.09) or to EXV Board 2 (P.10)

• Check the suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy.

• Check for EXV Board 1 (P.08 and P.09) or EXV Board 2

(P.10) faulty channel.

• Check EXV operation.

• Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, filter drier,

service valve, etc.

• Check the refrigerant charge.

Low Superheat

P.11 — Circuit A

P.12 — Circuit B

P.13 — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the circuit

is ON. This alarm is generated if the following criterion is met:

The EXV position is equal to or less than 5% and the cir-

cuit’s Suction Superheat (Suction Gas Temperature – Saturated

Suction Temperature) is less than the Suction Superheat Set

Point (ConfigurationSERVSHP.A, Configuration

SERVSHP.B, or ConfigurationSERVSHP.C) by at

least 5° F (2.8° C) or the circuit Saturated Suction Temperature

is greater than Maximum Operating Pressure (MOP) set point

(ConfigurationSERVMOP) for more than 5 minutes.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down normally.

Reset Method — Automatic, first occurrence in 24 hours.

Manual, if more than one occurrence in 24 hours.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the suction pressure transducer wiring to Main

Base Board (P.11 and P.12) or Fan Board 3 (P.13).

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Check for a faulty transducer.

• Check the suction gas thermistor wiring to EXV Board 1

(P.08 and P.09) or to EXV Board 2 (P.10)

• Check the suction gas thermistor sensor for accuracy.

• Check for EXV Board 1 (P.11 and P.12) or EXV Board 2

(P.13) faulty channel.

• Check EXV operation.

• Confirm Maximum Operating Pressure Set Point.

• Check the refrigerant charge.

P.14 — Cooler Interlock Failure

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. This algorithm monitors the cooler flow switch

circuit, which may include field-installed cooler pump

interlock (PMPI) contacts. The pump interlock and flow

switch are wired in series, therefore either device can cause a

ERROR

CODE

MASTER SLAVE DESCRIPTION

01 XX

The master or slave water pump is not configured while the control of the lag unit pump is required

(lag_pump = 1)

02 X Master and slave units have the same network address.

03 X There is no slave configured at the slave address

04 X Slave pump_seq incorrect configuration

05 X

There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for EWT control

while the slave is configured for LWT control.

06 X

There is a conflict between the master and the slave LWT option: the master is configured for LWT control

while the slave is configured for EWT control.

07 X

There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is configured for lag pump

control while the slave is not configured for lag pump control.

08 X

There is a conflict between the master and the slave pump option: the master is not configured for lag pump

control while the slave is configured for lag pump control.

09 X X The slave chiller is in local or remote control (chilstat = 3)

10 X X The slave chiller is down due to fault (chilstat = 5)

11 X The master chiller operating type is not Master: master_oper_typ and master_status = off

12 X X No communication with slave.

13 X Master and slave heat/cool status are not the same.

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

cooler interlock failure. This alarm is generated if one of the

following criteria is met:

1. The circuit (flow switch and optional pump interlock in-

stalled at TB5-1 and 2) fails to close within the OFF to

ON delay (ConfigurationOPTNDELY).

2. If the unit is the lag chiller under Master/Slave Control

and the circuit fails to close within 1 minute after its

pump is commanded ON.

3. The circuit opens while the machine is ON.

4. If the remote interlock switch is CLOSED while the

machine is ON (units with EMM only).

5. If the machine is configured for Cooler Pump Control

and the circuit does not open within 2 minutes.

6. The circuit fails to close within the OFF to ON delay

when the cooler pump has been commanded ON for

freeze protection.

Action to be Taken — The unit is shut down immediately, or

not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, if the alarm occurs while the

machine is at Stage 0 (no compressors ON). Manual reset if

machine was at Stage 1 or greater.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the chilled water flow switch operation.

• Check for water flow. Be sure all water isolation valves

are open. Check the water strainer for a restriction.

• Check the interlock wiring circuit.

• Check for a power supply to the pump.

• Check for a control signal to the pump controller.

• Check the chilled water pump operation.

• Check the cooler pump contactor for proper operation.

P.15 — Condenser Flow Switch Failure

Criteria for Trip — Condenser flow switch has not closed

within 1 minute after condenser pump output has energized or

opens during normal operation. This alarm is for units with the

heat reclaim option only.

Action to be Taken — The unit will return to the air cooled

mode.

Reset Method — Manual.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the condenser water flow switch operation.

• Check for low water flow. Be sure all water isolation

valves are open.

• Check for plugged water strainer.

• Check the interlock wiring circuit.

• Check the power supply to the pump.

• Check for a control signal to the pump starter.

• Check the condenser water pump operation.

• Check the condenser pump contactor for proper

operation.

Compressor Not Started or Pressure Not Established

P.16 — Compressor A1

P.17 — Compressor A2

P.18 — Compressor A3

P.19 — Compressor A4

P.20 — Compressor B1

P.21 — Compressor B2

P.22 — Compressor B3

P.23 — Compressor B4

P.24 — Compressor C1

P.25 — Compressor C2

P.26 — Compressor C3

P.27 — Compressor C4

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the unit is

ON or in Service Test. This algorithm monitors the pressure

differential across the compressor to prove proper rotation of

the compressor.

During normal operation with the start of a compressor, the

discharge pressure for the circuit or the compressor differential

(Discharge Pressure – Suction Pressure) must increase 10 psig

(69 kPa) after 2 minutes. If this criterion is not met, the alarm is

generated.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down immediately.

Reset Method — Manual

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check for power to the compressor.

• Check control voltage to the compressor contactor. On

208-volt systems, be sure the proper tap on TRAN1 is

utilized.

• Check for proper electrical phasing of the unit power

supply.

• Check the compressor contactor operation.

• Check the discharge and suction pressure transducers for

accuracy.

• Check the wiring and location of the discharge and suc-

tion pressure transducers.

P.28 — Electrical Box Thermostat Failure/Reverse Rotation

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON. This alarm is generated if the signal is open.

Action to be Taken — The unit is not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the phasing is corrected.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the power wiring for proper phasing.

• Check the sensor wiring to reverse rotation protection

board.

P.29 — Loss of Communication with System Manager

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the unit is

ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the System Manager

had established communications with the machine and is lost

for more than 2 minutes.

Action to be Taken — The action to be taken by the control

depends on the configuration. If Auto Start when SM lost is

enabled, (ConfigurationSERVAU.SM=YES), then the

unit will force the CCN Chiller Start Stop (Run Status

R.CCNCH.SS) to ENBL and clear all forced points

from the System Manager. The unit will revert to stand-alone

operation.

Reset Method — Automatic, once communication is

re-established.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check communication wiring.

• Check the power supply to the System Manager and unit

controls.

P.30 — Master/Slave Communication Failure

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the units are

ON or OFF and a Master and Slave machine has been config-

ured, (ConfigurationRSETMSSL=1 and Configuration

RSETMSSL=2). If communication is lost for more than

3 minutes, this alarm is generated.

Action to be Taken — Dual chiller control will be disabled and

each unit will operate in Stand-Alone mode.

Reset Method — Automatic, once communication is

re-established.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the CCN wiring.

• Check for control power to each Main Base Board,

Master and Slave.

• Confirm correct configuration.

P.31 — Unit is in Emergency Stop

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the units are

ON or OFF and the machine receives a Carrier Comfort Net-

work

(CCN) command for an Emergency Stop.

Action to be Taken — Unit will stop, or not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, once a return to normal command

is received.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check for

CCN Emergency Stop command.

Cooler Pump Fault

P.32 — Pump 1 Fault

P.33 — Pump 2 Fault

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the units are

ON or OFF. This alarm will be generated if the cooler pump

interlock opens. When starting the pump, the control must read

a closed circuit for 3 consecutive reads. If the pump is operat-

ing and the circuit opens, the alarm will be generated immedi-

ately.

Action to be Taken — The pump and machine will be shut

down. If there is another pump available, the control will start

that pump, restart the machine and clear the alarm. If no other

pump is available, the unit will remain OFF.

Reset Method — Manual.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the interlock wiring circuit.

• Check for a control signal to the pump controller.

• Check the cooler pump contactor for proper operation.

• Check control voltage for proper voltage. On 208-volt

systems, be sure the proper tap on TRAN1 is utilized.

Reclaim Operation Failure

P.34 — Circuit A

P.35 — Circuit B

Criteria for Trip — Reclaim operation failure due to high SCT.

This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only.

Action to be Taken — The affected circuit will return to air

cooled mode.

Reset Method — Manual.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check for low water flow. Be sure all water isolation

valves are open.

• Check for plugged water strainer.

• Check for fouled tubes in reclaim condenser.

Repeated High Discharge Gas Overrides

P.37 — Circuit A

P.38 — Circuit B

P.39 — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested when the circuit is

ON. This alarm will be tripped if the circuit capacity is reduced

more than 8 times in 30 minutes due to high discharge gas tem-

peratures. If no override occurs in a 30-minute period, the

counter is reset.

Action to be Taken — The affected circuit will be shut down.

Reset Method — Automatic, after 30 minutes. If the alarm is

cleared via the Manual method, the counter will be reset to

zero.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the maximum condensing temperature (MCT) for

the proper setting.

• Check for noncondensables in the refrigerant circuit.

• Check for condenser air re-circulation.

• Check for the proper refrigerant charge (overcharged).

• Check for operation beyond the limit of the machine.

• Check the condenser coils for debris or restriction.

• Check the condenser fans and motors for proper rotation

and operation.

• Check the discharge service valve to be sure that it

is open. Check the discharge pressure transducer for

accuracy.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Repeated Low Suction Temperature Overrides

P.40 – Circuit A

P.41 – Circuit B

P.42 – Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — This alarm was added in software version

1.09. The criterion is active when circuit is ON. If the circuit’s

capacity is reduced more than 6 times by the Capacity Over-

ride 23 (Circuit A), 24 (Circuit B), or 25 (Circuit C) for the

respective circuit, without at least 30 minutes elapsing between

the capacity reductions, the alarm is triggered. If at least

30 minutes elapses without a reduction in capacity, the counter

is reset to zero.

Action to be Taken — Circuit shut down.

Reset Method — Manual.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Confirm unit configuration.

• Check EXV operation.

• Check for a liquid line refrigerant restriction, service valve

partially closed, filter drier with excessive pressure drop.

• Check the refrigerant charge.

• Check suction pressure transducer accuracy.

• Check return gas thermistor accuracy.

• Check Circuit Superheat Set Point (Configuration

SERVSHP.A, SHP.B, or SHP.C).

• Check if system contains antifreeze (Configuration

SERVFLUD=2).

• Check Brine Freeze Set Point (Configuration

SERVLOSP) if an antifreeze solution is used.

• Check fluid flow rate.

• Check strainer for a restriction, clean if necessary.

• Check for cooler fouling.

• Check compressor oil level. If oil level is above the top

of the sightglass, then oil may be logging in the cooler.

Adjust oil level in compressor(s).

P.97 — Water Exchanger Temperature Sensors Swapped

Criteria for Trip — The alarm criterion is checked when the

chiller is ON and one or more compressors is running. This

alarm will be tripped if the entering water temperature is less

than the leaving water temperature for more than 1 minute.

Action to be Taken — The chiller is shut down immediately.

Reset Method — Manual

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check LWT and EWT wiring at main base board (con-

nector J6, channels 1,2) .

• Check for a faulty entering or leaving water temperature

sensor.

• Check cooler nozzles for proper water temperature sen-

sor locations.

Discharge Transducer Failure

Pr.01 — Circuit A

Pr.02 — Circuit B

Pr.03 — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — The criterion is tested whether the circuit

is ON or OFF. This alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed

by the MBB or FB3 is 0 vdc.

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down normally, or not

allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the transducer voltage is

greater than 0 vdc.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to main base board (Pr.01 and

Pr.02).

• Check the sensor wiring to Fan Board 3 (Pr.03).

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Check for a faulty transducer.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Suction Transducer Failure

Pr.04 — Circuit A

Pr.05 — Circuit B

Pr.06 — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — The criteria are tested whether the circuit

is ON or OFF. The alarm is generated if one of the following

criteria is met:

1. This alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the

MBB or FB3 is 0 vdc.

2. The circuit is ON in cooling mode and the saturated

suction temperature for the circuit is greater than the ref-

erenced cooler leaving temperature (RCLT) for more than

60 seconds.

RCLT = EWT – (EWT – LWT) * circuit running tons /

total tons

Action to be Taken — The circuit is shut down immediately, or

not allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic when the suction pressure reading

is within the range except if it was tripped by criteria 2.

The reset will be manual if the alarm trips 3 times within a

24-hour period or if it has been tripped by criteria 2.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check for power to the compressor (i.e., circuit breaker,

contactor operation).

• Check the sensor wiring to main base board (Pr.04 and

Pr.05).

• Check the sensor wiring to Fan Board 3 (Pr.06).

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Check for a faulty transducer.

• Check for a faulty leaving water temperature sensor.

• Confirm unit configuration.

• Check EWT sensor.

Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer

Pr.07 — Circuit A

Pr.08 — Circuit B

Criteria for Trip — Tested when the unit is On or Off. This

alarm is generated if the voltage as sensed by the heat reclaim

board is 0 vdc. This alarm is for units with the heat reclaim

option only.

Action to be Taken — The circuit will initiate a reclaim to air

cooled changeover and stay in air cooled mode if it had been

operating in reclaim mode.

Reset Method — Automatic when the transducer reading

returns to normal.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to heat reclaim board.

• Check for a faulty transducer.

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Confirm unit configuration.

Sr.nn — Service Maintenance Alert

Criteria for Trip — This alert is tested whether the unit is ON

or OFF and the Servicing Alert decisions listed under

Time ClockMCFG have been enabled. The alarm will be

generated if the one of the following configuration errors is

detected by the control. The “nn” refers to the error code listed

in Table 50.

Action to be Taken — None.

Reset Method — Manual, after the service has been completed

and Time ClockMCFG RS.SV is reset for the alert.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

the machine’s configuration.

Table 50 — Service Maintenance Alert Codes

Water Exchanger Fluid Thermistor Failure

th.01 — Entering

th.02 — Leaving

Criteria for Trip — If the temperature as measured by

the thermistor is outside of the range –40 F (–40 C) to 240 F

(115.6 C).

Action to be Taken — The unit shuts down normally, or is not

allowed to start.

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the

thermistor reading is within the expected range.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the main base board.

• Check the sensor for accuracy.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see

Thermistors on page 78.

th.03 — Circuit A Defrost Thermistor Failure

th.04 — Circuit B Defrost Thermistor Failure

Criteria for Trip — This alarm is for a heat pump machine

only. This feature is not supported for a cooling only machine.

Action to be Taken — None

Reset Method — Automatic

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, confirm

the machine’s configuration.

th.08 — Entering Condenser Reclaim Thermistor

Criteria for Trip — Tested when the unit is On or Off. This

alarm is generated if the temperature measured by the sensor is

outside the range of –40 F (–40 C) to 240 F (115.6 C). This

alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only.

Action to be Taken — The unit will return to the air-cooled

mode.

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the

thermistor reading is within the expected range.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the heat reclaim board.

• Check for a faulty thermistor.

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Confirm unit configuration.

CODE DESCRIPTION

01 Circuit A Loss of Refrigerant Charge

02 Circuit B Loss of Refrigerant Charge

03 Circuit C Loss of Refrigerant Charge

04 Water Loop Size Warning

05 Air Exchanger Cleanliness Warning

06 Pump 1 Servicing Required

07 Pump 2 Servicing Required

08 Reclaim Pump Servicing Required

09 Water Filter Servicing Required

th.09 — Leaving Condenser Reclaim Thermistor

Criteria for Trip — Tested when the unit is On or Off. This

alarm is generated if the temperature measured by the sensor is

outside the range of –40 F (–40 C) to 240 F (115.6 C). This

alarm is for units with the heat reclaim option only.

Action to be Taken — None

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the

thermistor reading is within the expected range.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the heat reclaim board.

• Check for a faulty thermistor.

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Confirm unit configuration.

th.10 — OAT Thermistor Failure

Criteria for Trip — If the outdoor-air temperature as measured

by the thermistor is outside of the range –40 F (–40 C) to 240 F

(115.6 C).

Action to be Taken — Unit shuts down under normal condi-

tions or is not allowed to start. Temperature reset based on

outdoor air temperature will be disabled.

The OAT sensor controls the cooler heaters. If this sensor

fails, the cooler heaters will be energized when the machine

stages to 0.

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the

thermistor reading is within the expected range and Tempera-

ture reset based on outdoor-air temperature will be enabled.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the main base board.

• Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see

Thermistors on this page.

th.11 — Master/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor

Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is checked whether

the unit is ON or OFF and has been configured for Dual

Chiller Control. The alarm will be triggered if the Dual Chiller

Common Fluid temperature as measured by the thermistor is

outside of the range –40 F (–40 C) to 240 F (115.6 C).

Action to be Taken — Dual Chiller Control disabled. Units

operate as a stand-alone machine.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the thermistor reading is

within the expected range. The Dual Chiller algorithm will

resume once the alarm is cleared.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the main base board.

• Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see

Thermistors on this page.

Suction Gas Thermistor

th.12 — Circuit A

th.13 — Circuit B

th.14 — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is checked whether

the unit is ON or OFF. If the suction gas temperature as mea-

sured by the thermistor is outside of the range –40 F (–40 C) to

240 F (115.6 C), the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — The affected circuit shuts down

normally.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the thermistor reading is

within the expected range. The affected circuit will restart once

the alarm has cleared.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the EXV board.

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see

Thermistors on this page.

Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor

th.18 — Circuit A

th.19 — Circuit B

Criteria for Trip — Tested when the unit is On or Off. If the

temperature as measured by the sensor is outside of the range

of –40 F (–40 C) to 240 F (115.6 C). This alarm is for units

with the heat reclaim option only.

Action to be Taken — The unit will return to the air cooled

mode.

Reset Method — Automatic, the alarm will reset once the read-

ing is within the expected range.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the EMM HR.

• Check for a faulty thermistor.

• Confirm unit configuration.

th.21 — Space Temperature Sensor Failure

Criteria for Trip — This alarm criterion is checked whether

the unit is ON or OFF and if Space Temperature Reset has

been enabled. If the outdoor-air temperature as measured by

the thermistor is outside of the range –40 F (–40 C) to 240 F

(115.6 C), the alarm will be triggered.

Action to be Taken — Unit operates under normal control.

Temperature Reset based on Space Temperature is disabled.

Reset Method — Automatic, once the thermistor reading is

within the expected range. The Space Temperature Reset will

resume once the alarm has cleared.

Possible Causes — If this condition is encountered, check the

following items:

• Check the sensor wiring to the energy management

module.

• Check the board for a faulty channel.

• Check for a faulty thermistor.

For thermistor descriptions, identifiers and connections, see

Thermistors below.

Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure

V0-xx — Circuit A

V1-xx — Circuit B

V2-xx — Circuit C

Criteria for Trip — See Table 25 on page 29 and Table 47 on

page 68.

Action to be Taken —

• Alert — No action

• Alarm — Circuit is stopped

Reset Method — Automatic reset.

Possible Causes — See Table 47 on page 68.

Sensors — The electronic control uses up to 12 thermistors

to sense temperatures and up to 8 transducers to sense pressure

for controlling chiller operation. These sensors are outlined

below.

Thermistors (Tables 51-52B) — Thermistors that

are monitoring the chiller’s operation include: cooler entering

water, cooler leaving water, dual chiller leaving water, com-

pressor suction gas temperature, and outside air thermistors.

These thermistors are 5,000 ohmsat 77 F (25 C) and are identi-

cal in temperature versus resistance. The space temperature

thermistor is 10,000 ohmsat 77 F (25 C) and has a different

temperature vs. resistance.

COOLER ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (T1) — On all

sizes, this thermistor is installed in a well in the entering water

nozzle of the cooler.

COOLER LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (T2) — On all siz-

es, this thermistor is installed in a well in the leaving water noz-

zle of the cooler. See Fig. 35 and 36.

OUTDOOR AIR TEMPERATURE (T3) — This sensor is

factory-installed and is attached to the bottom of the condenser

mounting rail.

DUAL CHILLER LWT (T6) — On duplex chillers,

30RB315-390, a factory-supplied, field-installed well and

thermistor are installed in the common supply water header of

the two modules.

COMPRESSOR SUCTION GAS TEMPERATURE (T4,

T5, T7) — This thermistor is installed in a well located in the

common suction line for the circuit. There is one thermistor for

each circuit.

CONDENSING LEAVING FLUID SENSOR (T9) — This

thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This

thermistor is installed in a well in the leaving water nozzle of

the reclaim condenser.

CONDENSING ENTERING FLUID SENSOR (T10) —

This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option only. This

thermistor is installed in a well in the entering water nozzle of

the reclaim condenser.

SUBCOOLED CONDENSER GAS TEMPERATURE (T11,

T12) — This thermistor is on units with heat reclaim option

only. This thermistor is installed in a well in the common liquid

line of each circuit.

REMOTE SPACE TEMPERATURE (T8) — This sensor

(part no. 33ZCT55SPT) is a field-supplied, field-installed ac-

cessory mounted in the indoor space and is used for water tem-

perature reset. The sensor should be installed as a wall-mount-

ed thermostat would be (in the conditioned space where it will

not be subjected to either a cooling or heating source or direct

exposure to sunlight, and 4 to 5 ft above the floor).

Space temperature sensor wires are to be connected to

terminals in the unit main control box. See Fig. 37. The space

temperature sensor includes a terminal block (SEN) and a RJ11

female connector. The RJ11 connector is used access into

the Carrier Comfort Network

(CCN) at the sensor.

To connect the space temperature sensor (see Fig. 37):

1. Using a 20 AWG twisted pair conductor cable rated for

the application, connect one wire of the twisted pair to

one SEN terminal and connect the other wire to the other

SEN terminal located under the cover of the space

temperature sensor.

2. Connect the other ends of the wires to terminals 7 and 8

on TB6 located in the unit control box.

Units on the CCN can be monitored from the space at the

sensor through the RJ11 connector, if desired. To wire the RJ11

connector into the CCN:

1. Cut the CCN wire and strip ends of the red (+), white

(ground), and black (–) conductors. (If another wire color

scheme is used, strip ends of appropriate wires.)

2. Insert and secure the red (+) wire to terminal 5 of the

space temperature sensor terminal block.

3. Insert and secure the white (ground) wire to terminal 4 of

the space temperature sensor.

4. Insert and secure the black (–) wire to terminal 2 of the

space temperature sensor.

5. Connect the other end of the communication bus cable to

the remainder of the CCN communication bus.

NOTE: The energy management module (EMM) is required

for this accessory.

Transducers — Table 53 lists pressure transducers for

controlling chiller operation.

Table 51 — Thermistor Identification

IMPORTANT: The cable selected for the RJ11

connector wiring MUST be identical to the CCN

communication bus wire used for the entire network.

Refer to Table 12 for acceptable wiring.

THERMISTOR ID DESCRIPTION

RESISTANCE AT

77 F (25 C)

CONNECTION POINT COMMENT

EWT (T1) Entering Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH2 —

LWT (T2) Leaving Water Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH1 —

OAT (T3) Outdoor Air Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH4 —

SGTA (T4) Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV1-J3-A, THA —

SGTB (T5) Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV1-J3-B, THB —

SGTC (T7) Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor 5k  EXV2-J3-A, THA —

DUAL (T6) Dual Chiller LWT Thermistor 5k  MBB-J6-CH3 —

SPT (T8) Space Temperature Thermistor 10k  EMM-J6-CH2 —

HLWT (T9) Condenser Leaving Water Thermistor 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH1 Heat Reclaim Option

HEWT (T10) Condenser Entering Water Thermistor 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH2 Heat Reclaim Option

HRT.A (T11) Sub Condenser Gas Temp A 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH3 Heat Reclaim Option

HRT.B (T12) Sub Condenser Gas Temp B 5k  EMM HR-J5-CH4 Heat Reclaim Option

O-RING

BRASS NUT 3/8 - 24 FOR

ASSEMBLY ON BRASS WELL

6" MINIMUM

CLEARANCE FOR

THERMISTOR

REMOVAL

1.188 in.

2.315 in.

1/4-18 NPT

Fig. 35 — 5K Thermistor (P/N 30RB660036)

Fig. 36 — Entering and Leaving Dual Water Thermistor Well (P/N 00PPG000008000A)

Fig. 37 — Typical Remote Space Temperature Sensor Wiring

TB6

SEN

SENSOR

Table 52A — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°F) vs Resistance

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–25 98,010

–24 94,707

–23 91,522

–22 88,449

–21 85,486

–20 82,627

–19 79,871

–18 77,212

–17 74,648

–16 72,175

–15 69,790

–14 67,490

–13 65,272

–12 63,133

–11 61,070

–10 59,081

–9 57,162

–8 55,311

–7 53,526

–6 51,804

–5 50,143

–4 48,541

–3 46,996

–2 45,505

–1 44,066

0 42,679

1 41,339

2 40,047

3 38,800

4 37,596

5 36,435

6 35,313

7 34,231

8 33,185

9 32,176

10 31,202

11 30,260

12 29,351

13 28,473

14 27,624

15 26,804

16 26,011

17 25,245

18 24,505

19 23,789

20 23,096

21 22,427

22 21,779

23 21,153

24 20,547

25 19,960

26 19,393

27 18,843

28 18,311

29 17,796

30 17,297

31 16,814

32 16,346

33 15,892

34 15,453

35 15,027

36 14,614

37 14,214

38 13,826

39 13,449

40 13,084

41 12,730

42 12,387

43 12,053

44 11,730

45 11,416

46 11,112

47 10,816

48 10,529

49 10,250

50 9,979

51 9,717

52 9,461

53 9,213

54 8,973

55 8,739

56 8,511

57 8,291

58 8,076

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

59 7,686

60 7,665

61 7,468

62 7,277

63 7,091

64 6,911

65 6,735

66 6,564

67 6,399

68 6,238

69 6,081

70 5,929

71 5,781

72 5,637

73 5,497

74 5,361

75 5,229

76 5,101

77 4,976

78 4,855

79 4,737

80 4,622

81 4,511

82 4,403

83 4,298

84 4,196

85 4,096

86 4,000

87 3,906

88 3,814

89 3,726

90 3,640

91 3,556

92 3,474

93 3,395

94 3,318

95 3,243

96 3,170

97 3,099

98 3,031

99 2,964

100 2,898

101 2,835

102 2,773

103 2,713

104 2,655

105 2,597

106 2,542

107 2,488

108 2,436

109 2,385

110 2,335

111 2,286

112 2,239

113 2,192

114 2,147

115 2,103

116 2,060

117 2,018

118 1,977

119 1,937

120 1,898

121 1,860

122 1,822

123 1,786

124 1,750

125 1,715

126 1,680

127 1,647

128 1,614

129 1,582

130 1,550

131 1,519

132 1,489

133 1,459

134 1,430

135 1,401

136 1,373

137 1,345

138 1,318

139 1,291

140 1,265

141 1,240

142 1,214

TEMP

(F)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

143 1,190

144 1,165

145 1,141

146 1,118

147 1,095

148 1,072

149 1,050

150 1,029

151 1,007

152 986

153 965

154 945

155 925

156 906

157 887

158 868

159 850

160 832

161 815

162 798

163 782

164 765

165 750

166 734

167 719

168 705

169 690

170 677

171 663

172 650

173 638

174 626

175 614

176 602

177 591

178 581

179 570

180 561

181 551

182 542

183 533

184 524

185 516

186 508

187 501

188 494

189 487

190 480

191 473

192 467

193 461

194 456

195 450

196 445

197 439

198 434

199 429

200 424

201 419

202 415

203 410

204 405

205 401

206 396

207 391

208 386

209 382

210 377

211 372

212 367

213 361

214 356

215 350

216 344

217 338

218 332

219 325

220 318

221 311

222 304

223 297

224 289

225 282

Table 52B — 5K Thermistor Temperature (°C) vs Resistance/Voltage

Table 53 — Pressure Transducers

*00PPG000030600A — High Pressure

00PPG000030700A — Low Pressure

TRANSDUCER ID DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER* CONNECTION POINT COMMENT

DPTA Ckt. A Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A MBB-J7A-CH6 —

SPTA Ckt. A Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A MBB-J7B-CH7 —

DPTB Ckt. B Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A MBB-J7C-CH8 —

SPTB Ckt. B Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A MBB-J7D-CH9 —

DPTC Ckt. C Discharge Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A FB3-J7-CH13 30RB210-300 Only

SPTC Ckt. C Suction Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030700A FB3-J8-CH14 30RB210-300 Only

PD.A Ckt. A Pumpdown Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A EMM HR-J8-CH6 Heat Reclaim Option Only

PD.B Ckt. B Pumpdown Pressure Transducer 00PPG000030600A EMM HR-J8-CH5 Heat Reclaim Option Only

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

–32 100,260

–31 94,165

–30 88,480

–29 83,170

–28 78,125

–27 73,580

–26 69,250

–25 65,205

–24 61,420

–23 57,875

–22 54,555

–21 51,450

–20 48,536

–19 45,807

–18 43,247

–17 40,845

–16 38,592

–15 38,476

–14 34,489

–13 32,621

–12 30,866

–11 29,216

–10 27,633

–9 26,202

–8 24,827

–7 23,532

–6 22,313

–5 21,163

–4 20,079

–3 19,058

–2 18,094

–1 17,184

0 16,325

1 15,515

2 14,749

3 14,026

4 13,342

5 12,696

6 12,085

7 11,506

8 10,959

9 10,441

10 9,949

11 9,485

12 9,044

13 8,627

14 8,231

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

15 7,855

16 7,499

17 7,161

18 6,840

19 6,536

20 6,246

21 5,971

22 5,710

23 5,461

24 5,225

25 5,000

26 4,786

27 4,583

28 4,389

29 4,204

30 4,028

31 3,861

32 3,701

33 3,549

34 3,404

35 3,266

36 3,134

37 3,008

38 2,888

39 2,773

40 2,663

41 2,559

42 2,459

43 2,363

44 2,272

45 2,184

46 2,101

47 2,021

48 1,944

49 1,871

50 1,801

51 1,734

52 1,670

53 1,609

54 1,550

55 1,493

56 1,439

57 1,387

58 1,337

59 1,290

60 1,244

61 1,200

TEMP

(C)

RESISTANCE

(Ohms)

62 1,158

63 1,118

64 1,079

65 1,041

66 1,006

67 971

68 938

69 906

70 876

71 836

72 805

73 775

74 747

75 719

76 693

77 669

78 645

79 623

80 602

81 583

82 564

83 547

84 531

85 516

86 502

87 489

88 477

89 466

90 456

91 446

92 436

93 427

94 419

95 410

96 402

97 393

98 385

99 376

100 367

101 357

102 346

103 335

104 324

105 312

106 299

107 285

Service Test — Main power and control circuit power

must be on for Service Test.

The Service Test function is used to verify proper operation

of various devices within the chiller, such as condenser fan(s),

compressors, minimum load valve solenoid (if installed),

cooler pump(s) and remote alarm relay. This is helpful during

the start-up procedure to determine if devices are installed

correctly. See Fig. 38-45 for 30RB wiring diagrams.

To use the Service Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote Con-

tact switch must be in the OFF position. Use the display keys to

move to the Service Test mode. The items are described in the

Service Test table. There are two sub-modes available. Service

TestT.REQ allows for manual control of the compressors

and minimum load control. In this mode the compressors will

operate only on command. The capacity control and head pres-

sure control algorithms will be active. The condenser fans will

operate along with the EXVs. There must be a load on the

chiller of operate for an extended period of time. All circuit

safeties will be honored during the test. Service TestQUIC

allows for test of EXVs, condenser fans, pumps, low ambient

head pressure control speed control, crankcase and cooler heat-

ers, and status points (alarm relays, running status and chiller

capacity). This mode allows for the testing of non-refrigeration

items. If there are no keys pressed for 5 minutes, the active test

mode will be disabled.

To enter the Manual Control mode, the Enable/Off/Remote

Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to

the Service Test mode. Press to access TEST. Press

to access T.REQ. Press and the display

will show OFF. Press and OFF will flash. Enter the

password if required. Use either arrow key to change the

T.REQ value to ON and press . Manual Control

mode is now active. Press the arrow keys to move to the appro-

priate item. To activate an item locate the item, press

and the display will show OFF. Press and OFF will

flash. Use either arrow key to change the value to ON and

press . The item should be active. To turn the item

off, locate the item, press and the display will show

ON. The chiller must be enabled by turning the Enable/Off/

Remote Contact switch to Enable. Press and ON will

flash. Use either arrow key to change the value to OFF and

press . The item should be inactive.

To enter the Quick Test mode, the Enable/Off/Remote

Contact switch must be in the OFF position. Move the LED to

the Service Test mode. Press to access TEST. Use

the key until the display reads QUIC. Press to

access Q.REQ. Press and the display will show OFF.

Press and OFF will flash. Enter the password if

required. Use either arrow key to change the QUIC value to

ON and press . Quick Test mode is now active. Fol-

low the same instructions for the Manual Control mode to acti-

vate a component.

Example — Test the chilled water pump (see Table 54).

Power must be applied to the unit. Enable/Off/Remote

Contact switch must be in the OFF position.

Test the condenser fans, cooler pump(s) and alarm relay by

changing the item values from OFF to ON. These discrete

outputs are then turned off if there is no keypad activity for

10 minutes. Test the compressor and minimum load valve sole-

noid (if installed) outputs in a similar manner. The minimum

load valve solenoids will be turned off if there is no keypad

activity for 10 minutes. Compressors will stay on until the

operator turns them off. The Service Test mode will remain

enabled for as long as there is one or more compressors

running. All safeties are monitored during this test and will

turn a compressor, circuit or the machine off if required. Any

other mode or sub-mode can be accessed, viewed, or changed

during the Manual Control mode only. The STAT item (Run

StatusVIEW) will display “0” as long as the Service mode is

enabled. The TEST sub-mode value must be changed back to

OFF before the chiller can be switched to Enable or Remote

contact for normal operation.

NOTE: There may be up to a one-minute delay before the

selected item is energized.

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Table 54 — Testing the Chilled Water Pump

MODE

(Red LED)

SUB-MODE

KEYPAD

ENTRY

ITEM

DISPLAY

EXPANSION

VALUE

DESCRIPTION

(Units)

COMMENT

SERVICE TEST

Service Test Mode

TEST Manual Sequence

QUIC Q.REQ

PASS WORD

Password may be required

0111

Each will lock in the next

digit. If 0111 is not the password,

use the arrow keys to change the

password digit and press

when correct.

Q.REQ

Returns to the original field

OFF

OFF will flash

The Enable/Off/Remote Contact

switch must be in the OFF

position.

Q.REQ

EXV.A

EXV.B

PMP.1

Water Exchanger

Pump 1

OFF

OFF will flash

Pump 1 will turn on.

ON will flash

OFF

Pump 1 will turn off.

ENTER

ESCAPE

ENTER

LEGEND FOR FIG. 38-45

ALM R — Alarm Relay

ALT R — Alert Relay

CB — Circuit Breaker

CD-HT — Condenser Heater

CL-HT — Cooler Heater

CWFS — Chilled Water Flow Switch

DLSV — Discharge Line Soleniod Valve

DPT — Discharge Pressure Transducer

ECA-A — Entering Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit A

ECA-B — Entering Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit B

ECW-A — Entering Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit A

ECW-B — Entering Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit B

EMM — Energy Management Module

ENT A/C — Entering Air-Cooled

ENT W/C — Entering Water-Cooled

EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

FIOP — Factory-Installed Option

FM — Fan Motor

FVFD — Fan Motor Variable Frequency Drive

HEVCF — High Efficiency Variable Condenser Fan Option

HOA — Hand/Off/Auto

HOA-A — Hand/Off/Auto, Auto Setting

HR — Heat Reclaim

LCA-A — Leaving Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit A

LCA-B — Leaving Condenser Air-Cooled, Circuit B

LCW — Leaving Condenser Water

LCW-A — Leaving Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit A

LCW-B — Leaving Condenser Water-Cooled, Circuit B

LLSV — Liquid Line Solenoid Valve

LVG A/C — Leaving Air-Cooled

LVG W/C — Leaving Water-Cooled

LWT — Leaving Water Temperature

MLV — Minimum Load Valve

MM — Low Ambient Temperature Head Pressure Control

OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

PDP — Pumpdown Pressure

PMP — Pump, Chilled Water

PMPI — Chilled Water Pump Interlock

PVFD — Pump Variable Frequency Drive

RDY R — Ready Relay

RRB — Reverse Rotation Board

RUN R — Run Relay

SGT — Suction Gas Thermistor

SHD R — Shutdown Relay

SPM — Scroll Protection Module

SPT — Suction Pressure Transducer

TB — Terminal Block

TRAN — Transformer

UPC — Unitary Protocol Controller

Terminal Block Connection

Marked Terminal

Unmarked Terminal

Unmarked Splice

Factory Wiring

Optional Wiring

Indicates common potential.

Does not represent wiring.

FIOP or Accessory

Wire Tag

Fig. 38 — Control Schematic, 30RB060-080

a30-5696



415

Fig. 39 — Control Schematic, 30RB090-150

a30-



415

Fig. 40 — Control Schematic, 30RB160-190

a30-5699



415

Fig. 41 — Control Schematic, 30RB210-300

a30-5701



415

Fig. 42 — Control Schematic, 30RB080-150 with HEVCF Option

a30-5698



415

Fig. 43 — Control Schematic, 30RB160-190 with HEVCF Option

a30-5700



415

Fig. 44 — Control Schematic, 30RB210-300 with HEVCF Option

a30-5702



415

?????

???

?????????????

????????????

???

?????????

????????

?????

??????

????????

???

????

???

????

???

?????????????????????

??????

?????????????????????

?????????????????????????????

????????????????????????????

???

????

???

????

??????????????

??????

?????

???

?????

???

?????

???

?????

???

?????

???

?????

???

?????

???????

???

??????

????

???

?????

???

????????????

?????????

??????????????

???

????

???

?????????

???????

?????????????

???

?????????

???????

?????????????

???

?????????

???????

???????????????

???

?????

???

?????

?????????

???????

???????????????

?????? ??????????????

?????????

???????

???????????????

??????????????

???

?????????

???????

???????????????

???

?????

?????????

???????

???????????????

?????????????

?????????

???????

???????????????

??????????

?????

???????

???

????????

????

???

?????????

???????

?????????????

???

?????????

???????

?????????????

???

?????????

???????

?????????????

???

?????

???

?????

???

?????????

???????

?????????????

???

?????

???

?????

???????

???

????

?????

????

???

?????

????

???

??????

???????

????????

???????

????????

??????

???

Fig. 45 — Heat Reclaim Control Schematic

a30-4622

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES

MODE — RUN STATUS

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

VIEW AUTO VIEW OF RUN STATUS 4,83

EWT Entering Fluid Temp XXXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-100 STATEGEN EWT 24

LWT Leaving Fluid Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-100 STATEGEN LWT 24

SETP Active Setpoint XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-100 GENUNIT SP 47

CTPT Control Point XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-100 GENUNIT CTRL_PNT 24,43,

STAT Unit Run Status 0=Off

1=Running

2=Stopping

3=Delay

GENUNIT STATUS 30,31,

OCC Occupied NO/YES GENUNIT CHIL_OCC 30

CTRL Status Unit Control Typ 0=Local Off

1=Local On

2=CCN

3=Remote

GENUNIT ctr_type 30

CAP Percent Total Capacity XXX (%) 0-100 GENUNIT CAP_T

CAP.S Capacity Indicator XX over_cap 24

LIM Active Demand Limit Val XXX (%) 0-100 GENUNIT DEM_LIM 40

STGE Current Stage XX cur_stag

ALRM Alarm State 0=Normal

1=Partial

2=Shutdown

GENUNIT ALM

HC.ST Heat Cool Status 0=Cooling

1=Heating

2=Standby

GENUNIT HEATCOOL 24

RC.ST Reclaim Select Status NO/YES GENUNIT reclaim_sel

TIME Time of Day XX.XX 00.00-23.59 N/A TIME

MNTH Month of Year 1=January

2=February

3=March

4-April

5=May

6=June

7=July

8=August

9=September

10=October

11=November

12=December

N/A moy

DATE Day of Month XX 1-31 N/A dom

YEAR Year of Century XX 00-99 N/A yoc

R.CCN CCN FOR PRODIALOG

CH.SS CCN Chiller Start Stop ENBL/DSBL forcible GENUNIT CHIL_S_S 75

HC.SL Heat Cool Select 0=Cool

1=Heat

2=Auto

forcible GENUNIT HC_SEL

C.OCC Chiller Occupied NO/YES forcible GENUNIT CHIL_OCC

RECL Reclaim Select NO/YES forcible GENUNIT RECL_SEL

SP.OC Setpoint Occupied NO/YES forcible GENUNIT SP_OCC

D.LIM Active Demand Limit Val XXX (%) 0-100 forcible GENUNIT DEM_LIM

CTRL Control Point XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-100 forcible GENUNIT CTRL_PNT

EMGY Emergency Stop ENBL/DSBL forcible GENUNIT EMSTOP

RUN UNIT RUN HOUR AND START

HRS.U Machine Operating Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible hr_mach

STR.U Machine Starts XXXX 0-9999 forcible STRTHOUR st_mach

HR.P1 Water Pump 1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_cpum1

HR.P2 Water Pump 2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_cpum2

HR.CD Heat Reclaim Pump Hours XXXX (hours) forcible FANHOURS hr_hpump 49

HOUR COMPRESSOR RUN HOURS

HR.A1 Compressor A1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a1

HR.A2 Compressor A2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a2

HR.A3 Compressor A3 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a3

HR.A4 Compressor A4 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_a4

HR.B1 Compressor B1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b1

HR.B2 Compressor B2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b2

HR.B3 Compressor B3 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b3

HR.B4 Compressor B4 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_b4

HR.C1 Compressor C1 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c1

HR.C2 Compressor C2 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c2

HR.C3 Compressor C3 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c3

HR.C4 Compressor C4 Run Hours XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR hr_cp_c4

STRT COMPRESSOR STARTS

ST.A1 Compressor A1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a1

ST.A2 Compressor A2 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a2

ST.A3 Compressor A3 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a3

ST.A4 Compressor A4 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_a4

ST.B1 Compressor B1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b1

ST.B2 Compressor B2 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b2

ST.B3 Compressor B3 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b3

ST.B4 Compressor B4 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_b4

ST.C1 Compressor C1 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c1

ST.C2 Compressor C2 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c2

ST.C3 Compressor C3 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c3

ST.C4 Compressor C4 Starts XXXX 0-999000* forcible STRTHOUR st_cp_c4

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — RUN STATUS (cont)

*As data in all of these categories can exceed 9999 the following display strategy is used:

From 0-9999 display as 4 digits.

From 9999-99900 display xx.xK

From 99900-999000 display as xxxK.

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

FAN FAN RUN HOURS

FR.A1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana1

FR.A2 Fan 2 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana2

FR.A3 Fan 3 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana3

FR.A4 Fan 4 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana4

FR.A5 Fan 5 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana5

FR.A6 Fan 6 Run Hours Cir A XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fana6

FR.B1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb1

FR.B2 Fan 2 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb2

FR.B3 Fan 3 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb3

FR.B4 Fan 4 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb4

FR.B5 Fan 5 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb5

FR.B6 Fan 6 Run Hours Cir B XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanb6

FR.C1 Fan 1 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc1

FR.C2 Fan 2 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc2

FR.C3 Fan 3 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc3

FR.C4 Fan 4 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc4

FR.C5 Fan 5 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc5

FR.C6 Fan 6 Run Hours Cir C XXXX (hours) 0-999000* forcible FANHOURS hr_fanc6

CP.UN COMPRESSOR DISABLE

A1.UN Compressor A1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a1

A2.UN Compressor A2 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a2

A3.UN Compressor A3 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a3

A4.UN Compressor A4 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_a4

B1.UN Compressor B1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b1

B2.UN Compressor B2 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b2

B3.UN Compressor B3 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b3

B4.UN Compressor B4 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_b4

C1.UN Compressor C1 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c1

C2.UN Compressor C2 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c2

C3.UN Compressor C3 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c3

C4.UN

Compressor C4 Disable NO/YES forcible CP_UNABL un_cp_c4

MAIN PREDICTIVE MAINTENANCE

CHRG Refrigerant Charge NO/YES SERMAINT charge_m

WATE Water Loop Size NO/YES SERMAINT wloop_m

PMP.1 Pump 1 (days) (days) SERMAINT cpump1_m

PMP.2 Pump 2 (days) (days) SERMAINT cpump2_m

PMP.C Cond Pump (days) (days) SERMAINT hpump_m

W.FIL Water Filter (days) (days) SERMAINT wfilte_m

VERS SOFTWARE VERSION

NUMBER

Press ENTER

and ESCAPE

simultaneously

to read version

information

APPL CSA-XX-XXXXXXXXX PD5_APPL

MARQ XXXXXX-XX-XX STDU

NAVI XXXXXX-XX-XX Navigator

EXV1 XXXXXX-XX-XX EXV_BRD1

EXV2 XXXXXX-XX-XX EXV_BRD2

AUX1 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD1

AUX2 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD2

AUX3 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD3

AUX4 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD4

AUX5 XXXXXX-XX-XX AUX_BRD5

CPA1 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA1

CPA2 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA2

CPA3 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA3

CPA4 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPA4

CPB1 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB1

CPB2 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB2

CPB3 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB3

CPB4 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPB4

CPC1 XXXXXX-XX-XX

SPM_CPC1

CPC2 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC2

CPC3 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC3

CPC4 XXXXXX-XX-XX SPM_CPC4

EMM XXXXXX-XX-XX EMM_NRCP

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — SERVICE TEST

*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then

place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.

†Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position

to perform Quick Test.

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

TEST COMPRESSORS N/A

T.REQ Manual Sequence OFF/ON* forcible N/A service_test 54,83

CP.A1 Compressor A1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_1 54

CP.A2 Compressor A2 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_2 54

CP.A3 Compressor A3 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_3 54

CP.A4 Compressor A4 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_a_4 54

HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass A Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_a

CP.B1 Compressor B1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_1 54

CP.B2 Compressor B2 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_2 54

CP.B3 Compressor B3 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_3 54

CP.B4 Compressor B4 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_b_4 54

HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass B Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_b

CP.C1 Compressor C1 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_1 54

CP.C2 Compressor C2 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_2 54

CP.C3 Compressor C3 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_3 54

CP.C4 Compressor C4 Output OFF/ON forcible N/A comp_serv_c_4 54

HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass C Output OFF/ON forcible N/A hgbp_serv_c

QUIC QUICK TEST MODE N/A 54,83

Q.REQ Quick Test Mode OFF/ON† forcible N/A test_request

EXV.A Circuit A EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_a 53

EXV.B Circuit B EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_b 53

EXV.C Circuit C EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A exv_qck_c 53

FAN.A Circuit A Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_a

FAN.B Circuit B Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_b

FAN.C Circuit C Fan Stages X 0-6 forcible N/A fan_qck_c

SPD.A Circ A Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_a

SPD.B Circ B Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_b

SPD.C Circ C Varifan position XXX (%) 0-100 forcible N/A hd_qck_c

FRV.A Free Cooling Valve A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1a

FRP.A Refrigerant Pump Out A OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2a

FRV.B Free Cooling Valve B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1b

FRP.B

Refrigerant Pump Out B OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2b

FRV.C Free Cooling Valve C OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_1c

FRP.C Refrigerant Pump Out C OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A fr_qck_2c

RV.A 4 Way Valve Circuit A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A rv_qck_a

RV.B 4 Way Valve Circuit B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. forcible N/A rv_qck_b

BOIL Boiler Command OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A boiler_qck

HR1.A Air Cond Enter Valve A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ea_qck_a

HR2.A Air Cond Leaving Valv A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_la_qck_a

HR3.A Water Cond Enter Valv A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ew_qck_a

HR4.A Water Cond Leav Valve A OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_lw_qck_a

HR1.B Air Cond Enter Valve B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ea_qck_b

HR2.B Air Cond Leaving Valv B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_la_qck_b

HR3.B Water Cond Enter Valv B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_ew_qck_b

HR4.B Water Cond Leav Valve B OPEN/CLSE forcible N/A hr_lw_qck_b

PMP.1 Water Exchanger Pump 1 OFF/ON forcible N/A cpump_qck1

PMP.2 Water Exchanger Pump 2 OFF/ON forcible N/A cpump_qck2

CND.P Reclaim Condenser Pump OFF/ON forcible N/A cond_pump_qck

CL.HT Cooler Heater Output OFF/ON forcible N/A coo_heat_qck

CP.HT Condenser Heater Output OFF/ON forcible N/A cond_htr_qck

CH.A1 Compressor A1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a1

CH.A2 Compressor A2 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a2

CH.A3 Compressor A3 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a3

CH.A4 Compressor A4 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_a4

CH.B1 Compressor B1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b1

CH.B2 Compressor B2 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b2

CH.B3 Compressor B3 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b3

CH.B4 Compressor B4 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_b4

CH.C1 Compressor C1 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c1

CH.C2 Compressor C2 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c2

CH.C3 Compressor C3 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c3

CH.C4 Compressor C4 Heater OFF/ON forcible N/A cp_ht_qck_c4

HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass A Output OFF/ON forcible N/A

HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass B Output OFF/ON forcible N/A

HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass C Output OFF/ON forcible N/A

Q.RDY Chiller Ready Status OFF/ON forcible N/A ready_qck

Q.RUN Chiller Running Status OFF/ON EMM forcible N/A running_qck

SHUT Customer Shutdown Stat OFF/ON EMM forcible N/A shutdown_qck

CATO Chiller Capacity 0-10v XX.X (vdc) 0-100 EMM forcible N/A CAPT_010_qcK

ALRM Alarm Relay OFF/ON forcible N/A alarm_qck

ALRT Alert Relay OFF/ON forcible N/A alert_qck

C.ALM Critical Alarm Relay OFF/ON Not supported. forcible N/A critical_qck

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — TEMPERATURE

MODE — PRESSURE

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

UNIT ENT AND LEAVE UNIT TEMP

EWT Water Exchanger Enter XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

STATEGEN EWT 7,47

LWT Water Exchanger Leaving XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

STATEGEN LWT 7,47

OAT Outside Air Temperature XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

GENUNIT OAT 7,47

CHWS Lead/Lag Leaving Fluid XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

STATEGEN CHWS TEMP 7

HEWT Heat Reclaim Entering XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

RECLAIM HR_EWT 17,49

HLWT Heat Reclaim Leaving XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

RECLAIM HR_LWT 17,49

SPT Optional Space Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

STATEGEN SPACETMP 16

CIR.A TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT A

SCT.A Sat Cond Temp Circ A XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCA_AN SCT_A

SST.A Sat Suction Temp Circ A XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCA_AN SST_A

SGT.A Suction Gas Temp Circ A XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCA_AN SUCT_T_A 9

SUP.A Superheat Temp Circ A XXX.X (F/C) CIRCA_AN SH_A

HRT.A Sub Condenser Gas Tmp A XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

RECLAIM hr_subta 17

HRS.A Sub Cooling Temp A XXX.X (F/C) RECLAIM hr_subca 17,49

CIR.B TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT B

SCT.B

Sat Cond Temp Circ B XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCB_AN SCT_B

SST.B Sat Suction Temp Circ B XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCB_AN SST_B

SGT.B Suction Gas Temp Circ B XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCB_AN SUCT_T_B 9

SUP.B Superheat Temp Circ B XXX.X (F/C) CIRCB_AN SH_B

HRT.B Sub Condenser Gas Tmp B XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

RECLAIM hr_subtb 17

HRS.B Sub Cooling Temp B XXX.X (F/C) RECLAIM hr_subcb 17,49

CIR.C TEMPERATURES CIRCUIT C CIRCC_AN

SCT.C Sat Cond Temp Circ C XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCC_AN SCT_C

SST.C Sat Suction Temp Circ C XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCC_AN SST_C

SGT.C Suction Gas Temp Circ C XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–45-245 F

(–43-118 C)

CIRCC_AN SUCT_T_C 11

SUP.C Superheat Temp Circ C XXX.X (F/C) CIRCC_AN SH_C

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

PRC.A PRESSURE CIRCUIT A

DP.A Discharge Pressure Cir A XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

CIRCA_AN DP_A 7,48

SP.A Suction Pressure Circ A XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

CIRCA_AN SP_A 7

PD.A Pumpdown Pressure Cir A XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

RECLAIM PD_P_A 17

PRC.B PRESSURE CIRCUIT B

DP.B Discharge Pressure Cir B XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

CIRCB_AN DP_B 7,48

SP.B Suction Pressure Circ B XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

CIRCB_AN SP_B 7

PD.B Pumpdown Pressure Cir B XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

RECLAIM PD_P_B 17

PRC.C PRESSURE CIRCUIT C

DP.C Discharge Pressure Cir C XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

CIRCC_AN DP_C 14,48

SP.C Suction Pressure Circ C XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

CIRCC_AN SP_C 14

PD.C Pumpdown Pressure Cir C XXX.X

(psig/kPa)

RECLAIM PD_P_C

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — SET POINTS

MODE — INPUTS

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

COOL COOLING SETPOINTS

CSP.1 Cooling Setpoint 1 XXXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–20-70 F

(–29-21 C),

Default = 44.0

forcible SETPOINT csp1 31,32,

CSP.2 Cooing Setpoint 2 XXXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–20-70 F

(–29-21 C),

Default = 44.0

forcible SETPOINT csp2 31,32

CSP.3 Ice Setpoint XXXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–20-70 F

(–29-21 C),

Default = 44.0

forcible SETPOINT ice_sp 31,47

CRV1 Current No Reset Val XX.X (mA) 0-20,

Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT v_cr_no 37

CRV2 Current Full Reset Val XX.X (mA) 0-20,

Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT v_cr_fu 37

CRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) 0-125 F

(0-69.4 C),

Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT dt_cr_no 32

CRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) 0-125 F

(0-69.4 C),

Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT dt_cr_fu 32

CRO1 OAT No Reset Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-125 F

(–18-52 C),

Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT oatcr_no 32

CRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-25 F

(–18-52 C),

Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT oatcr_fu 32

CRS1 Space T No Reset Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-125 F

(–18-52 C),

Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT spacr_no 37

CRS2 Space T Full Reset Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

0-125 F

(–18-52 C),

Default = 14.0

forcible SETPOINT spacr_fu 37

DGRC Degrees Cool Reset XX.X (F/C) –30-30 F

(–16.7-16.7 C),

Default = 0

forcible SETPOINT cr_deg 32,37

CAUT Cool Changeover Setpt XX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Default = 75.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT cauto_sp



CRMP Cool Ramp Loading X.X 0.2-2.0 F

(0.1-1.1 C),

Default = 1.0

forcible cramp_sp 18,24

HEAT HEATING SETPOINTS

HSP.1 Heating Setpoint 1 XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Default = 100 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT HSP.1

HSP.2 Heating Setpoint 2 XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Default = 100 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT HSP.2

HRV1 Current No Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT v_hr_no

HRV2 Current Full Reset Val XX.X (mA) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT v_hr_fu

HRT1 Delta T No Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT dt_hr_no

HRT2 Delta T Full Reset Temp XXX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT dt_hr_fu

HRO1 OAT No Reset Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Default = 14.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT oathr_no

HRO2 OAT Full Reset Temp XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Default = 14.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT oathr_fu

DGRH Degrees Heat Reset XX.X (F/C) Default = 0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT DGRH

HAUT Heat Changeover Setpt XX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Default = 64 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT hauto_sp

HRMP Heat Ramp Loading X.X Default = 1.0 Not supported. forcible SETPOINT hramp_sp

MISC MISCELLANEOUS SETPOINTS

DLS1 Switch Limit Setpoint 1 XXX (%) 0-100,

Default = 100

forcible SETPOINT lim_sp1 40

DLS2 Switch Limit Setpoint 2 XXX (%) 0-100,

Default = 100

forcible SETPOINT lim_sp2 40

DLS3 Switch Limit Setpoint 3 XXX (%) 0-100,

Default = 100

forcible SETPOINT lim_sp3 40

RSP Heat Reclaim Setpoint XXX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Default = 122 forcible SETPOINT rsp 49

RDB Reclaim Deadband XX.X (F/C) Default = 9.0 forcible SETPOINT hr_deadb 49

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

GEN.I GENERAL INPUTS

ONOF On Off Switch OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN ONOF 7

LOCK Cooler Interlock OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LOCK_1 7,24

DLS1 Demand Limit Switch 1 OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LIM_SW1 7

DLS2 Demand Limit Switch 2 OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN LIM_SW2 16,40

ICE.D Ice Done OFF/ON STATEGEN ICE_SW 16,40

DUAL Dual Setpoint Switch OFF/ON STATEGEN SETP_SW 7

ELEC Electrical Box Safety OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN ELEC_BOX 7

PUMP Pump Run Feedback OFF/ON STATEGEN PUMP_DEF 7

OCCS Occupancy Override Swit OFF/ON STATEGEN OCC_OVSW 16

RECL Heat Reclaim Switch OFF/ON STATEGEN RECL_SW 49

HC.SW Heat Cool Switch Status OFF/ON STATEGEN HC_SW

RLOC Remote Interlock Switch OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN REM-LOCK 16

C.FLO Reclaim Cond Flow OPEN/CLSE STATEGEN CONDFLOW 17

DMND 4-20 mA Demand Signal XXX.X (mA) 4 to 20 STATEGEN LIM_ANAL 16,41

RSET 4-20 mA Reset/Setpoint XXX.X (mA) 4 to 20 STATEGEN SP_RESET 16

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — OUTPUTS

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

CIR.A OUTPUTS CIRCUIT A

CP.A1 Compressor A1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A1 9

CP.A2 Compressor A2 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A2 9

CP.A3 Compressor A3 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A3 9

CP.A4 Compressor A4 Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D CP_A4 9

HGB.A Hot Gas Bypass Circ A OFF/ON CIRCA_D HGBP_A 7

HT.A1 Comp A1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a1_ht 9

HT.A2 Comp A2 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a2_ht 9

HT.A3 Comp A3 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a3_ht 9

HT.A4 Comp A4 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCA_D cp_a4_ht 9

FAN.A Circuit A Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCA_D FAN_ST_A

SPD.A Circ A Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCA_AN hd_pos_a 12

EXV.A Circuit A EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCA_AN EXV_A 9

FRP.A Refrigerant Pump Out A OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_PMP_A

FRVA Free Cooling Valve A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_VLV_A

HR1.A Air Cond Enter Valve A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_ca_a 17

HR2.A Air Cond Leaving Valv A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_la_a 17

HR3.A Water Cond Enter Valv A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_en_a 17

HR4.A Water Cond Leav Valve A OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_lw_a 17

RV.A 4 Way Valve Circuit A OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D RV_A

CIR.B OUTPUTS CIRCUIT B

CP.B1 Compressor B1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B1 9

CP.B2 Compressor B2 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B2 9

CP.B3 Compressor B3 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B3 9

CP.B4 Compressor B4 Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_B4 9

HGB.B Hot Gas Bypass Circ B OFF/ON CIRCB_D HGBP_B 7

HT.B1 Comp B1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B1 9

HT.B2 Comp B2 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B2 9

HT.B3 Comp B3 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B3 9

HT.B4 Comp B4 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCB_D CP_HT_B4 9

FAN.B Circuit B Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCB_D FAN_ST_B

SPD.B Circ B Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCB_AN hd_pos_b 12,13



EXV.B Circuit B EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCB_AN EXV_B 9

FRP.B Refrigerant Pump Out B OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCB_D FR_PMP_B

FRVB Free Cooling Valve B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCA_D FR_VLV_B

HR1.B Air Cond Enter Valve B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_ca_b 17

HR2.B Air Cond Leaving Valv B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_la_b 17

HR3.B Water Cond Enter Valv B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_en_b 17

HR4.B Water Cond Leav Valve B OPEN/CLSE RECLAIM hr_lw_b 17

RV.B 4 Way Valve Circuit B OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCB_D RV_B

CIR.C OUTPUTS CIRCUIT C

CP.C1 Compressor C1 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C1 9

CP.C2 Compressor C2 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C2 9

CP.C3 Compressor C3 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C3 9

CP.C4 Compressor C4 Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D CP_C4 9

HGB.C Hot Gas Bypass Circ C OFF/ON CIRCC_D HGBP_C 14

HT.C1 Comp C1 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c1_ht 9

HT.C2 Comp C2 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c2_ht 9

HT.C3 Comp C3 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c3_ht 9

HT.C4 Comp C4 Heater Relay OFF/ON CIRCC_D cp_c4_ht 9

FAN.C Circuit C Fan Stages X 0-6 CIRCC_D FAN_ST_C

SPD.C Circ C Varifan Position XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCC_AN hd_pos_c 14

EXV.C Circuit C EXV % Open XXX (%) 0-100 CIRCC_AN EXV_C 11

FRP.C Refrigerant Pump Out C OFF/ON Not supported. CIRCC_D FR_PMP_ C

FRVC Free Cooling Valve C OPEN/CLSE Not supported. CIRCC_D FR_VLV_C

GEN.O GENERAL OUTPUTS

PMP.1 Water Exchanger Pump 1 OFF/ON STATEGEN CPUMP_1 7

PMP.2 Water Exchanger Pump 2 OFF/ON STATEGEN CPUMP_2 7

CND.P Reclaim Condenser Pump OFF/ON STATEGEN COND_PUMP 17

CO.HT Cooler Heater Output OFF/ON STATEGEN COOLHEAT 7

CN.HT Condenser Heater Output OFF/ON RECLAIM cond_htr 17

REDY Chiller Ready Status OFF/ON forcible RECLAIM READY 7

RUN Chiller Running Status OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN RUNNING 16

SHUT Customer Shutdown Stat OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN SHUTDOWN 16

CATO Chiller Capacity 0-10 v XX.X forcible STATEGEN CAPT_010 16

ALRM Alarm Relay OFF/ON STATEGEN ALARM 7

ALRT

Alert Relay OFF/ON STATEGEN ALERT 7

BOIL Boiler Command OFF/ON Not supported. STATEGEN BOILER

C.ALM Critical Alarm Relay OFF/ON forcible STATEGEN critical_qck

100

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — CONFIGURATION

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

DEFAULT

CCN

TABLE

CCN

POINT

PAGE

NO.

DISP DISPLAY CONFIGURATION

TEST Test Display LED’s OFF/ON OFF N/A display_test

METR Metric Display US/METR US DISPCONF DISPUNIT

LANG Language Selection 0=English

1=Espanol

2=Francais

3=Portugues

4=Translated

0 DISPCONF LANGUAGE 4

UNIT UNIT CONFIGURATION

TYPE Unit Type 1=Air Cooled

2=Heat Pump

Heat pump not

supported

1 FACTORY unit_typ

TONS Unit Size XXX (tons) 56 to 300

(nominal size —

refer to Table 1 for

unit modular

combinations)

FACTORY unitsize 73

VAR.A Nb Fan on Varifan Cir A X 0-6 0: Std. unit, no fan

drive options

1: Low ambient

option.

For HEVCF option

set to number of

fans on circuit:

Size 60-70 —n/a

Size 80 — 2

Size 90-120 — 3

Size 130-150 — 4

Size 160-190 — 6

Size 210-250 — 4

Size 275-300 — 6

FACTORY varfan_a

VAR.B Nb Fan on Varifan Cir B X 0-6 0: Std. unit, no fan

drive options

1: Low ambient

option.

For HEVCF option

set to number of

fans on circuit:

Size 60-70 —n/a

Size 80 — 2

Size 90-110 — 3

Size 120-170 — 4

Size 190 — 6

Size 210-250 — 4

Size 275-300 — 6

FACTORY varfan_b

VAR.C Nb Fan on Varifan Cir C X 0-6 0: Std. unit, no fan

drive options

1: Low ambient

option.

For HEVCF option

set to number of

fans on circuit:

Size 210-225 — 4

Size 250 — 6

Size 275 — 4

Size 300 — 6

FACTORY varfan_c

HGBP Hot Gas Bypass Control 0=Unused

1=Startup Only

2=Close Ctrl

3=High Ambient

1 is default for

med. temp.

brine units

(FLUD=2)

0 FACTORY hgbp_sel 18,

21-24

60HZ 60 Hz Frequency NO/YES YES FACTORY freq_60H

RECL Heat Reclaim Select NO/YES NO FACTORY recl_opt 48

EHS Electrical Heater Stage 0-4 Not supported 0 FACTORY ehs_sel

EMM EMM Module Installed NO/YES NO FACTORY emm_nrcp 72

PAS.E Password Enable

Password Protection Must Be

Disabled to Change Password

DSBL/ENBL ENBL FACTORY pass_enb

PASS Password XXX 1 to 0150 0111 FACTORY fac_pass

FREE Free Cooling Select NO/YES Not supported. NO FACTORY freecool

PD4.D Pro_Dialog User Display NO/YES Must be set to

NO FACTORY pd4_disp

BOIL Boiler Command Select OFF/ON Not supported. OFF FACTORY boil_sel

VLT.S VLT Fan Drive Select 0=No fan drive

1=Low ambient

option

2=HEVCF option

0 FACTORY Vh_sel

RPM.F VLT Fan Drive RPM XXXX 0 to 1140 1140 Low

Ambient or

HEVCF option

1140 FACTORY Vh_rpm

MCHX MCHX Exchanger Select NO/YES NO FACTORY mchx_sel

FC Factory Country Code X 0 to 1 1=USA 1 FACTORY fac_code

VFDV VFD Voltage for USA Volts 208,380,460,575 Volts Voltage dependent FACTORY vfd_volt

QMFD Special Demand 0 to 255 Not supported 0 FACTORY qm_field

101

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — CONFIGURATION (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT DEFAULT CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

SERV SERVICE CONFIGURATION

FLUD Cooler Fluid Type 1=Water

2=Brine

3=Low Brine

Low Brine is

not supported.

1 SERVICE1 flui_typ 18,23-

25,31,4

6,48,73

,74

MOP EXV MOP Setpoint XX.X

(deg F/deg C)

40-60 F

(4.4-15.6 C)

50 SERVICE1 mop_sp 74

HP.TH High Pressure Threshold XXX.X (psi/kPa) 500-640 psi

(3447 to

4412 kPa)

609 SERVICE1 hp_th 24

SHP.A Cir A Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) 3-14 F

(1.7-7.8 C)

9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_a 74

SHP.B Cir B Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) 3-14 F

(1.7-7.8 C)

9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_b 74

SHP.C Cir C Superheat Setp XX.X (F/C) 3-14 F

(1.7-7.8 C)

9.0 SERVICE1 sh_sp_c 74

HTR Cooler Heater DT Setp XX.X (F/C) 0.5-9 F

(0.3-5.0 C)

2.0 (Number of degrees added

to brine freeze set point to

enable cooler heater.)

SERVICE1 heatersp 46,56

EWTO Entering Water Control NO/YES NO SERVICE1 ewt_opt 31

AU.SM Auto Start When SM Lost NO/YES NO SERVICE1 auto_sm 75

BOTH HSM Both Command Select NO/YES NO USER both_sel

LLWT Brine Min. Fluid Temp. XX

(deg F/deg C)

–20-38 F

(–28.9-3.3)

28.0 (3.3) USER Mini_Lwt

LOSP Brine Freeze Setpoint XX.X

(deg F/deg C)

–4-50 F

(–20-10 C)

34.0 SERVICE1 lowestsp 24,25,3

1,46,48

,56,73

HD.PG Varifan Proportion Gain XX.X –10-10 Std. Unit and Low Amb.: 2.0

HEVCF: 1.0

SERVICE1 hd_pg

HD.DG Varifan Derivative Gain XX.X –10-10 Std. Unit and Low Amb.: 0.4

HEVCF: 0.1

SERVICE1 hd_dg

HD.IG Varifan Integral Gain XX.X –10-10 Std. Unit and Low Amb.: 0.2

HEVCF: 0.1

SERVICE1 hd_ig

HR.MI Reclaim Water Valve Min XXX.X (%) 20 SERVICE1 min_3w

HR.MA Reclaim Water Valve Max XXX.X (%) 100 SERVICE1 max_3w

AVFA Attach Drive to Fan A NO/YES Not supported. NO

AVFB Attach Drive to Fan B NO/YES Not supported. NO

AVFC Attach Drive to Fan C NO/YES Not supported. NO

102

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — CONFIGURATION (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT DEFAULT CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

OPTN UNIT OPTIONS 2 CONTROLS

CCNA CCN Address XXX 1-239 1 N/A CCNA 45

CCNB CCN Bus Number XXX 0-239 0 N/A CCNB 46

BAUD CCN Baud Rate 1=2400

2=4800

3=9600

4=19200

5=38400

3 N/A BAUD

LOAD Loading Sequence Select 0=Equal

1=Staged

0 USER seq_typ 21,22,

LLCS Lead/Lag Circuit Select 0=Automatic

1=Cir A Leads

2=Cir B Leads

3=Cir C Leads

0 USER lead_cir 21,22

RL.S Ramp Load Select ENBL/DSBL DSBL USER ramp_sel 18,24,

DELY Minutes Off Time XX (Minutes) 1 to 15 1 USER off_on_d 18,30,

46,75

ICE.M Ice Mode Enable ENBL/DSBL DSBL USER ice_cnfg 31

PUMP Cooler Pumps Sequence 0=No Pump

1=1 Pump Only

2=2 Pumps Auto

3=PMP 1 Manual

4=PMP 2 Manual

0 USER pump_seq 29,30,

43,46

ROT.P Pump Rotation Delay XXXX (hours) 24 to 3000 48 USER pump_del 46

PM.PS Periodic Pump Start NO-YES NO USER pump_per 30,48

P.SBY Stop Pump In Standby NO-YES NO USER pump_sby

P.LOC Flow Checked if Pmp Off NO-YES YES USER pump_loc 30

LS.ST Night Low Noise Start XX.XX 00.00-23.59 00.00 USER nh_start 30

LS.ND Night Low Noise End XX.XX 00-00-23.59 00.00 USER nh_end 47

LS.LT Low Noise Capacity Lim XXX (%) 0-100 100 USER nh_limit 46,47

OA.TH Heat Mode OAT Threshold XX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Not supported. 5 F USER heat_th

FREE Free Cooling OAT Limit XX.X

(deg F/deg C)

Not supported. 32.0 USER free_oat

BO.TH Boiler OAT Threshold XX.X

(deg F/deg C)

5-32 F

(–15-0 C)

Not supported. 14 USER boil_th

EHST Elec Stag OAT Threshold XX.XX

(deg F/deg C)

23 -70 F

(–5-21 C)

Not supported. 41 USER ehs_th

EHSB Last Heat Elec Backup NO-YES Not supported. NO USER ehs_back

E.DEF Quick EHS in Defrost NO-YES Not supported. NO USER ehs_defr

EHSP Elec Heating Pulldown XX (min) Not supported. 0 USER ehs_pull

AUTO Auto Changeover Select NO-YES Not supported. NO USER auto_sel

RSET

RESET, COOL AND HEAT TEMP

CRST Cooling Reset Type 0=No Reset

1=Out Air Temp

2=Delta T Temp

3=4-20 mA Input

4=Space Temp

0 USER cr_sel 32,37,

HRST Heating Reset Type 0=No Reset

1=Out Air Temp

2=Delta T Temp

3=4-20 mA Input

Not supported. 0 USER hr_sel

DMDC Demand Limit Select 0=None

1=Switch

2=4-20 mA Input

0 USER lim_sel 40,41,

DMMX mA for 100% Demand Lim XX.X (mA) 0.0 USER lim_mx 41

DMZE mA for 0% Demand Limit XX.X (mA) 0.0 USER lim_ze 41

MSSL Master/Slave Select 0=Disable

1=Master

2=Slave

0 MST_SLV ms_sel 46,47,

73,75

SLVA Slave Address XXX 1-236 2 MST_SLV slv_addr

LLBL Lead/Lag Balance Select ENBL/DSBL DSBL MST_SLV ll_bal 18,45,

LLBD Lead/Lag Balance Delta XXX (hours) 40-400 168 MST_SLV ll_bal_d 18,45,

LLDY Lag Start Delay XX (minutes) 2-30 10 MST_SLV lsrt_tim 18,45

LAGP Lag Unit Pump Select 0=Off if Unit

stopped

1=On if Unit

stopped

0 MST_SLV lag_pump 18,21,

LPUL Lead Pulldown Time XX (minutes) 0-60 0 MST_SLV lead_pul 18,45

103

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — TIMECLOCK

*Password protected.

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

TIME TIME OF DAY

HH.MM Hour and Minute XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible* N/A HH.MM

DATE MONTH DATE DAY AND YEAR

MNTH Month of Year 1=January

2=February

3=March

4=April

5=May

6=June

7=July

8=August

9=September

10=October

11=November

12=December

forcible* N/A MNTH

DOM Day of Month XX 1-31 forcible* N/A DOM

DAY Day of Week 1=Monday

2=Tuesday

3=Wednesday

4=Thursday

5=Friday

6=Saturday

7=Sunday

forcible* N/A DAY

YEAR Year of Century XX 00-99 forcible* N/A YEAR

SCH1 TIME SCHEDULE 1 30

PER.1 Period 1 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.1OCC.1 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD1

PER.1UNO.1 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD1

PER.1MON.1 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.1TUE.1 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.1WED.1 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.1THU.1 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.1FRI.1 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.1SAT.1 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.1SUN.1 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.1HOL.1 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW1

PER.2 Period 2 Occ/Unocc Sel OCC1P01S

PER.2OCC.2 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD2

PER.2UNO.2 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD2

PER.2

MON.2 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.2TUE.2 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.2WED.2 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.2THU.2 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.2FRI.2 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.2SAT.2 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.2SUN.2 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.2HOL.2 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW2

PER.3 Period 3 Occ/Unocc Sel OCC1P01S

PER.3OCC.3 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD3

PER.3UNO.3 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD3

PER.3MON.3 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.3TUE.3 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.3WED.3 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.3THU.3 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.3FRI.3 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.3SAT.3 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.3SUN.3 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.3HOL.3 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW3

PER.4 Period 4 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.4OCC.4 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD4

PER.4UNO.4 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD4

PER.4MON.4 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.4TUE.4 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.4WED.4 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.4THU.4 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.4FRI.4 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.4SAT.4 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.4SUN.4 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.4HOL.4 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW4

PER.5 Period 5 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.5OCC.5 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD5

PER.5UNO.5 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD5

PER.5MON.5 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.5TUE.5 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.5WED.5 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.5THU.5 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.5FRI.5 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.5SAT.5 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.5SUN.5 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.5HOL.5 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW5

PER.6 Period 6 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.6

OCC.6 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S OCCTOD6

PER.6UNO.6 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC1P01S UNOCTOD6

PER.6MON.6 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

PER.6TUE.6 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

PER.6WED.6 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

PER.6THU.6 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

PER.6FRI.6 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

PER.6SAT.6 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

PER.6SUN.6 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

PER.6HOL.6 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC1P01S DOW6

104

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — TIMECLOCK (cont)

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

SCH1 TIME SCHEDULE 1 30,32

PER.7 Period 7 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.7OCC.7 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S OCCTOD7

PER.7UNO.7 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S UNOCTOD7

PER.7MON.7 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.7TUE.7 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.7WED.7 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.7THU.7 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.7FRI.7 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.7SAT.7 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.7SUN.7 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.7HOL.7 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW7

PER.8 Period 8 Occ/Unocc Sel OCCP01S

PER.8OCC.8 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S OCCTOD8

PER.8UNO.8 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCP01S UNOCTOD8

PER.8MON.8 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

PER.8TUE.8 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

PER.8WED.8 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

PER.8THU.8 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

PER.8FRI.8 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8



PER.8SAT.8 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

PER.8SUN.8 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

PER.8HOL.8 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCCP01S DOW8

SCH2 TIME SCHEDULE 2 30,32

PER.1 Period 1 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.1OCC.1 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD1

PER.1UNO.1 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD1

PER.1MON.1 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.1TUE.1 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.1WED.1 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.1THU.1 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.1FRI.1 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.1SAT.1 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.1SUN.1 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.1HOL.1 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW1

PER.2 Period 2 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.2OCC.2 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD

PER.2UNO.2 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD2

PER.2MON.2 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.2TUE.2 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.2WED.2 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.2

THU.2 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.2FRI.2 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.2SAT.2 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.2SUN.2 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.2HOL.2 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW2

PER.3 Period 3 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.3OCC.3 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD

PER.3UNO.3 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD3

PER.3MON.3 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.3TUE.3 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.3WED.3 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.3THU.3 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.3FRI.3 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.3SAT.3 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.3SUN.3 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.3HOL.3 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW3

PER.4 Period 4 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.4OCC.4 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD4

PER.4UNO.4 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD4

PER.4MON.4 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.4TUE.4 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.4WED.4 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.4THU.4 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.4FRI.4 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.4SAT.4 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.4SUN.4 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.4HOL.4 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW4

PER.5 Period 5 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.5OCC.5 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD5

PER.5UNO.5 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD5

PER.5MON.5 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.5TUE.5 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.5WED.5 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.5THU.5 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.5FRI.5 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.5SAT.5 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.5SUN.5 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.5HOL.5 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW5

PER.6 Period 6 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.6OCC.6 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD6

PER.6UNO.6 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S UNOCTOD6

PER.6MON.6 Monday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

PER.6

TUE.6 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

PER.6WED.6 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

PER.6THU.6 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

PER.6FRI.6 Friday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

PER.6SAT.6 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

PER.6SUN.6 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

PER.6HOL.6 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible OCC2P02S DOW6

105

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — TIMECLOCK (cont)

*Default=NO.

†Default=0.

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

PER.7 Period 7 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.7OCC.7 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCC2P02S OCCTOD7

PER.7UNO.7 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible UNOCTOD7

PER.7MON.7 Monday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.7TUE.7 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.7WED.7 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.7THU.7 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.7FRI.7 Friday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.7SAT.7 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.7SUN.7 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.7HOL.7 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible DOW7

PER.8 Period 8 Occ/Unocc Sel

PER.8OCC.8 Occupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible OCCTOD8

PER.8UNO.8 Unoccupied Time XX.XX 00.00-23.59 forcible UNOCTOD8

PER.8MON.8 Monday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

PER.8TUE.8 Tuesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

PER.8WED.8 Wednesday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

PER.8THU.8 Thursday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

PER.8FRI.8 Friday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

PER.8

SAT.8 Saturday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

PER.8SUN.8 Sunday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

PER.8HOL.8 Holiday Select NO/YES forcible DOW8

HOLI HOLIDAYS CONFIGURATION

HOL.1 Holidays Config 1

HOL.1MON.1 Holiday Start Month 1=January

2=February

3=March

4=April

5=May

6=June

7=July

8=August

9=September

10=October

11=November

12=December

forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_MON

HOL.1DAY.1 Holiday Start Day XX 1 to 31 forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_DAY

HOL.1DUR.1 Holiday Duration in Day XX 1 to 99 forcible HOLDY_01 HOL_LEN

HOL.1HOL.2 Holidays Config 2

HOL.1MON.2 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1

forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_MON

HOL.2DAY.2 Holiday Start Day See

HOL.1DAY.1

forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_DAY

HOL.2DUR.2 Holiday Duration in Day See

HOL.1DUR.1

forcible HOLDY_02 HOL_LEN

HOL.9 Holidays Config 9

HOL.9MON.9 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1

forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_MON

HOL.9DAY.9 Holiday Start Day See

HOL.1DAY.1

forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_DAY

HOL.9DUR.9 Holiday Duration in Days See

HOL.1DUR.1

forcible HOLDY_09 HOL_LEN

HOL.10HO.10

Holidays Config 10

HOL.10MO.10 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1

forcible HOLDY_09

HOL.10DA.10 Holiday Start Day See

HOL.1DAY.1

forcible HOLDY_09

HOL.10DU.10 Holiday Duration in Days See

HOL.1DUR.1

forcible HOLDY_09

HOL.16HO.16 Holidays Config 16

HOL.16MO.16 Holiday Start Month See

HOL.1MON.1

forcible HOLDY_16

HOL.16DA.16 Holiday Start Day See

HOL.1DAY.1

forcible

HOL.16DU.16 Holiday Duration in Days See

HOL.1DUR.1

forcible

MCFG SERVICE MAINTENANCE CONFIG 76

AL.SV Service Warning Select NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG s_alert

CHRG Refrigerant Charge NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG charge_a

WATE Water Loop Size NO/YES forcible* MAINTCFG wloop_c

PMP.1 Pump 1 (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible† MAINTCFG pump1_c

PMP.2 Pump 2 (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible† MAINTCFG pump2_c

PMP.C Cond Pump (days) XXXX (days) 0-65,500 forcible† MAINTCFG hpump_c

W.FIL Water Filter (days) XXXX (days) forcible† MAINTCFG wfilte_c 43

RS.SV Servicing Alert Reset 0=Default

1=Refrigerant Charge

2=Water loop size

3=Not used

4=Pump 1

5=Pump 2

6=Reclaim Pump

7=Water filter

8=Reset all

forcible† SERMAINT s_reset

106

APPENDIXA—LOCAL DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

MODE — OPERATING MODES

NOTE: See Operating Modes starting on page 46.

MODE — ALARMS

*Expanded display will be actual alarm expansion.

†Up to five current alarms will be displayed.

**History of thirty past alarms will be displayed.

ITEM EXPANSION UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

SLCT OPERATING TYPE CONTROL

OPER Operating Type Control 0=Switch Ctrl

1=Time Sched

2=CCN Control

Default = 0 forcible N/A N/A 30,42,

45,49

SP.SE Setpoint Select 0=Setpoint Occ

1=Setpoint1

2=Setpoint2

3=4-20mA Setp

4=Dual Setp Sw

Default = 0 forcible N/A N/A 31,32

HC.SE Heat Cool Select 0=Cooling

1=Heating

2=Auto Chgover

3=Heat Cool Sw

Default = 0

1-3 not

supported.

forcible GENUNIT HC_SEL 31

RL.SE Reclaim Select 0=No

1=Yes

2=Switch Ctrl

Default = 0

Yes = CCN

control

forcible GENUNIT RECL_SEL 49

MODE MODES CONTROLLING UNIT

MD01 Startup Delay in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_01 46

MD02 Second Setpoint in Use OFF/ON MODES MODE_02 46

MD03 Reset in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_03 46

MD04 Demand Limit Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_04 46

MD05 Ramp Loading Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_05 46

MD06 Cooler Heater Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_06 46

MD07 Water Pumps Rotation OFF/ON MODES MODE_07 46

MD08 Pump Periodic Start OFF/ON MODES MODE_08 46

MD09 Night Low Noise Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_09 47

MD10 System Manager Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_10 47

MD11 Mast Slave Ctrl Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_11 47

MD12 Auto Changeover Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_12 47

MD13 Free Cooling Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_13 47

MD14 Reclaim Active OFF/ON MODES MODE_14 47,49

MD15 Electric Heat Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_15 47

MD16 Heating Low EWT Lockout OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_16 47

MD17 Boiler Active OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_17 47

MD18 Ice Mode in Effect OFF/ON MODES MODE_18 47

MD19 Defrost Active on Cir A OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_19 47

MD20 Defrost Active on Cir B OFF/ON Not supported. MODES MODE_20 47

MD21 Low Suction Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_21 48

MD22 Low Suction Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_22 48

MD23 Low Suction Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_23 48

MD24 High DGT Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_24 48

MD25 High DGT Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_25 48

MD26 High DGT Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_26 48

MD27 High Pres Override Cir A OFF/ON MODES MODE_27 48

MD28 High Pres Override Cir B OFF/ON MODES MODE_28 48

MD29 High Pres OVerride Cir C OFF/ON MODES MODE_29 48

MD30 Low Superheat Circuit A OFF/ON MODES MODE_30 48

MD31 Low Superheat Circuit B OFF/ON MODES MODE_31 48

MD32 Low Superheat Circuit C OFF/ON MODES MODE_32 48

ITEM EXPANSION* UNITS RANGE COMMENT

WRITE

STATUS

CCN TABLE CCN POINT

PAGE

NO.

R.ALM RESET ALL CURRENT ALRM forcible N/A N/A 62

ALRM† CURRENTLY ACTIVE ALARM 62

Current Alarm 1 GENUNIT alarm_1 62

Current Alarm 2 GENUNIT alarm_2 62

Current Alarm 3 GENUNIT alarm_3 62

Current Alarm 4 GENUNIT alarm_4 62

Current Alarm 5 GENUNIT alarm_5 62

H.ALM** ALARM HISTORY

Alarm History #1 ALRMHIST alm_history_01

Alarm History #2 ALRMHIST alm_history_02

ALRMHIST

Alarm History #29 ALRMHIST alm_history_29

Alarm History #30 ALRMHIST alm_history_30

107

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES

STATUS DISPLAY TABLES

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

CIRCA_AN

Percent Total Capacity 0 - 100 % CAPA_T

Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_A

Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_A

Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpa1_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp2 nnn.n AMPS cpa2_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp3 nnn.n AMPS cpa3_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp4 nnn.n AMPS cpa4_cur

Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpa1_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 2 nnnn OHMS cpa2_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 3 nnnn OHMS cpa3_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 4 nnnn OHMS cpa4_tmp

Saturated Condensing Tmp ±nnn.n °F SCT_A

Saturated Suction Temp ±nnn.n °F SST_A

Suction Gas Temperature ±nnn.n °F SUCT_T_A

Suction Superheat Temp ±nnn.n ^F SH_A

EXV Position 0 - 100 % EXV_A

Head Press Actuator Pos 0 - 100 % hd_pos_a

CIRCA_D

Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_A1

Compressor 2 Output On/Off CP_A2

Compressor 3 Output On/Off CP_A3

Compressor 4 Output On/Off CP_A4

Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_a1_ht

Compressor 2 Heater Out On/Off cp_a2_ht

Compressor 3 Heater Out On/Off cp_a3_ht

Compressor 4 Heater Out On/Off cp_a4_ht

Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_A

Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_a1

Fan Output DO # 2 On/Off fan_a2

Fan Output DO # 3 On/Off fan_a3

Fan Output DO # 4 On/Off fan_a4

Fan Output DO # 5 On/Off fan_a5

Fan Output DO # 6 On/Off fan_a6

Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_A

4 Way Refrigerant Valve On/Off RV_A

CIRCB_AN

Percent Total Capacity 0 - 100 % CAPB_T

Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_B

Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_B

Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpb1_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp2 nnn.n AMPS cpb2_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp3 nnn.n AMPS cpb3_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp4 nnn.n AMPS cpb4_cur

Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpb1_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 2 nnnn OHMS cpb2_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 3 nnnn OHMS cpb3_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 4 nnnn OHMS cpb4_tmp

Saturated Condensing Tmp ±nnn.n °F SCT_B

Saturated Suction Temp ±nnn.n °F SST_B

Suction Gas Temperature ±nnn.n °F SUCT_T_B

Suction Superheat Temp ±nnn.n ^F SH_B

EXV Position 0-100 % EXV_B

Head Press Actuator Pos 0-100 % hd_pos_b

CIRCB_D

Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_B1

Compressor 2 Output On/Off CP_B2

Compressor 3 Output On/Off CP_B3

Compressor 4 Output On/Off CP_B4

Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_b1_ht

Compressor 2 Heater Out On/Off cp_b2_ht

Compressor 3 Heater Out On/Off cp_b3_ht

Compressor 4 Heater Out On/Off cp_b4_ht

Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_B

Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_b1

Fan Output DO # 2 On/Off fan_b2

Fan Output DO # 3 On/Off fan_b3

Fan Output DO # 4 On/Off fan_b4

Fan Output DO # 5 On/Off fan_b5

Fan Output DO # 6 On/Off fan_b6

Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_B

4 Way Refrigerant Valve On/Off RV_B

108

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

STATUS DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

CIRCC_AN

Percent Total Capacity 0-100 % CAPC_T

Discharge Pressure nnn.n PSI DP_C

Suction Pressure nnn.n PSI SP_C

Crank Heater Current Cp1 nnn.n AMPS cpc1_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp2 nnn.n AMPS cpc2_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp3 nnn.n AMPS cpc3_cur

Crank Heater Current Cp4 nnn.n AMPS cpc4_cur

Motor Thermistor Comp 1 nnnn OHMS cpc1_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 2 nnnn OHMS cpc2_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 3 nnnn OHMS cpc3_tmp

Motor Thermistor Comp 4 nnnn OHMS cpc4_tmp

Saturated Condensing Tmp ±nnn.n °F SCT_C

Saturated Suction Temp ±nnn.n °F SST_C

Suction Gas Temperature ±nnn.n °F SUCT_T_C

Suction Superheat Temp ±nnn.n ^F SH_C

EXV Position 0-100 % EXV_C

Head Press Actuator Pos 0-100 % hd_pos_c

CIRCC_D

Compressor 1 Output On/Off CP_C1

Compressor 2 Output On/Off CP_C2

Compressor 3 Output On/Off CP_C3

Compressor 4 Output On/Off CP_C4

Compressor 1 Heater Out On/Off cp_c1_ht

Compressor 2 Heater Out On/Off cp_c2_ht

Compressor 3 Heater Out On/Off cp_c3_ht

Compressor 4 Heater Out On/Off cp_c4_ht

Hot Gas Bypass Output On/Off HGBP_V_C

Fan Output DO # 1 On/Off fan_c1

Fan Output DO # 2 On/Off fan_c2

Fan Output DO # 3 On/Off fan_c3

Fan Output DO # 4 On/Off fan_c4

Fan Output DO # 5 On/Off fan_c5

Fan Output DO # 6 On/Off fan_c6

Fan Staging Number 0-6 FAN_ST_C

FANHOURS FAN Operating Hours

Circuit A Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana1

Circuit A Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana2

Circuit A Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana3

Circuit A Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana4

Circuit A Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana5

Circuit A Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana6

Circuit B Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb1

Circuit B Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb2

Circuit B Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb3

Circuit B Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb4

Circuit B Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb5

Circuit B Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb6

Circuit C Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc1

Circuit C Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc2

Circuit C Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc3

Circuit C Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc4

Circuit C Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc5

Circuit C Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc6

WATER PUMPS

Water Pump #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum1

Water Pump #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum2

Heat Reclaim Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_hpump

FREE COOLING PUMPS

Circuit A Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_a

Circuit B Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_b

Circuit C Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_c

109

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

STATUS DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

* Text reflects status of valve “Closed,” “Closing,” “Opened,” “Opening,” “Stopped,” or “Failed.”

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

FREECOOL GENERAL PARAMETER

Free Cooling Disable? Yes/No FC_SW

LWT-OAT Delta nnn.n ^F fc_delta

Current Cooling Power nnn KW cool_pwr

Estimated FreeCool Power nnn KW fc_pwr

Next session allowed in nn min fc_next

Cooling/FreeCool Timeout nn min fc_tmout

Free Cool Conditions OK? Yes/No fc_ready

Free Cool Request ? Yes/No fc_reqst

Valve Actuator Heaters ? On/Off FC_HTR

CIRCUIT A

Free Cooling Active Yes/No fc_on_a

Fan Staging Number 1-6 FAN_ST_A

3 Way Valve Position nnn % fc_vlv_a

3 Way Valve Status text* FC_VLV_A

Refrigerant Pump Out On/Off fc_pmp_a

Pump Inlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_inp_a

Pump Outlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_oup_a

Pump Differential Pressure nnn PSI fc_dp_a

CIRCUIT B

Free Cooling Active Yes/No fc_on_b

Fan Staging Number 1-6 FAN_ST_B

3 Way Valve Position nnn % fc_vlv_b

3 Way Valve Status text* FC_VLV_B

Refrigerant Pump Out On/Off fc_pmp_b

Pump Inlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_inp_b

Pump Outlet Pressure nnn PSI fc_oup_b

Pump Differential Pressure nnn PSI fc_dp_b

110

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

STATUS DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

GENUNIT GENERAL PARAMETER

Control Type Local

CCN

Remote

ctr_type

Run Status 0 = Off

1 = Running

2 = Stopping

3 = Delay

4 = Tripout

5 = Ready

6 = Override

7 = Defrost

8 = Run Test

9 = Test

STATUS

CCN Chiller Start/Stop Enable/Disable CHIL_S_S forcible

Chiller Occupied? Yes/No CHIL_OCC forcible

Minutes Left for Start 0-15 min min_left

Heat/Cool Status 0 = Cool, 1 = Heat

2 = Stand-by

3 = Both

HEATCOOL

Heat/Cool Select (0=Cool, 1=Heat,

2= Auto)

0 = Cool

1 = Heat

2 = Auto

HC_SEL forcible

Heat Reclaim Select Yes/No RECL_SEL forcible

Free Cooling Disable Yes/No FC_DSBLE

Alarm State 0 Normal

1 Partial

2 Shutdown

ALM

Current Alarm 1 nnnnn alarm_1

Current Alarm 2 nnnnn alarm_2

Current Alarm 3 nnnnn alarm_3

Current Alarm 4 nnnnn alarm_4

Current Alarm 5 nnnnn alarm_5

Percent Total Capacity nnn % CAP_T

Active Demand Limit Val nnn % DEM_LIM forcible

Lag Capacity Limit Value nnn % LAG_LIM

Current Setpoint ±nnn.n °F SP

Setpoint Occupied Yes/No SP_OCC forcible

Setpoint Control Setpt 1

Setpt 2

Ice_sp

4-20mA

Auto

sp_ctrl

Control Point ±nnn.n °F CTRL_PNT forcible

Controlled Water Temp ±nnn.n °F CTRL_WT

External Temperature ±nnn.n °F OAT

Emergency Stop Enable/Disable EMSTOP forcible

MODES OPERATING MODES

Startup Delay in Effect Yes/No Mode_01

Second Setpoint in Use Yes/No Mode_02

Reset in Effect Yes/No Mode_03

Demand Limit Active Yes/No Mode_04

Ramp Loading Active Yes/No Mode_05

Cooler Heater Active Yes/No Mode_06

Cooler Pumps Rotation Yes/No Mode_07

Pump Periodic Start Yes/No Mode_08

Night Low Noise Active Yes/No Mode_09

System Manager Active Yes/No Mode_10

Master Slave Active Yes/No Mode_11

Auto Changeover Active Yes/No Mode_12

Free Cooling Active Yes/No Mode_13

Reclaim Active Yes/No Mode_14

Electric Heat Active Yes/No Mode_15

Heating Low EWT Lockout Yes/No Mode_16

Boiler Active Yes/No Mode_17

Ice Mode in Effect Yes/No Mode_18

Defrost Active On Cir A Yes/No Mode_19

Defrost Active On Cir B Yes/No Mode_20

Low Suction Circuit A Yes/No Mode_21

Low Suction Circuit B Yes/No Mode_22

Low Suction Circuit C Yes/No Mode_23

High DGT Circuit A Yes/No Mode_24

High DGT Circuit B Yes/No Mode_25

High DGT Circuit C Yes/No Mode_26

High Pres Override Cir A Yes/No Mode_27

High Pres Override Cir B Yes/No Mode_28

High Pres Override Cir C Yes/No Mode_29

Low Superheat Circuit A Yes/No Mode_30

Low Superheat Circuit B Yes/No Mode_31

Low Superheat Circuit C Yes/No Mode_32

111

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

STATUS DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

* See Table 39, “CCN Table Status Display—RECLAIM” on page 50.

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

RECLAIM Heat Reclaim Select Yes/no RECL_SEL

Reclaim Condenser Pump On/Off CONDPUMP

Reclaim Condenser Flow On/Off condflow

Reclaim Condenser Heater On/Off cond_htr

Reclaim Entering Fluid ±nnn.n °F HR_EWT

Reclaim Leaving Fluid ±nnn.n °F HR_LWT

Reclaim Fluid Setpoint ±nnn.n °F RSP forcible

Reclaim Valve Position ±nnn.n % hr_v_pos

HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT A

Reclaim Status Circuit A n* hrstat_a

Pumpdown Pressure Cir A ±nnn.n psi PD_P_A

Sub Condenser Temp Cir A ±nnn.n °F hr_subta

Pumdown Saturated Tmp A ±nnn.n °F hr_sat_a

Subcooling Temperature A ±nnn.n ^F hr_subca

Air Cond Entering Valv A On/Off hr_ea_a

Water Cond Enter Valve A On/Off hr_ew_a

Air Cond Leaving Valve A On/Off hr_la_a

Water Cond Leaving Val A On/Off hr_lw_a

HEAT RECLAIM CIRCUIT B

Reclaim Status Circuit B n* hrstat_b

Pumpdown Pressure Cir B ±nnn.n psi PD_P_B

Sub Condenser Temp Cir B ±nnn.n °F hr_subtb

Pumdown Saturated Tmp B ±nnn.n °F hr_sat_b

Subcooling Temperature B ±nnn.n ^F hr_subcb

Air Cond Entering Valv B On/Off hr_ea_b

Water Cond Enter Valve B On/Off hr_ew_b

Air Cond Leaving Valve B On/Off hr_la_b

Water Cond Leaving Val B On/Off hr_lw_b

STATEGEN UNIT DISCRETE IN

On/Off – Remote Switch Open/Close ONOFF_SW

Remote Heat/Cool Switch Open/Close HC_SW

Current Control Off, On Cool, On

Heat, On Auto

on_ctrl

Remote Reclaim Switch Open/Close RECL_SW

Free Cooling Disable Sw. Open/close FC_SW

Remote Setpoint Switch Open/Close SETP_SW

Limit Switch 1 Status Open/Close LIM_SW1

Limit Switch 2 Status Open/Close LIM_SW2

Occupied Override Switch Open/Close OCC_OVSW

Ice Done Storage Switch Open/Close ICE_SW

Interlock Status Open/Close LOCK_1

Pump Run Status Open/Close PUMP_DEF

Remote Interlock Status Open/Close REM_ LOCK

Electrical Box Safety Open/Close ELEC_BOX

UNIT DISCRETE OUT

Electrical Heat Stage 0-4/Off EHS_STEP

Boiler Command On/Off BOILER

Water Pump #1 Command On/Off CPUMP_1 forcible

Water Pump #2 Command On/Off CPUMP_2 forcible

Rotate Pumps Now Yes/No ROT_PUMP forcible

Reclaim Condenser Pump On/Off COND_PMP forcible

Cooler Heater Command On/Off COOLHEAT

Shutdown Indicator State On/Off SHUTDOWN

Alarm Relay Status On/Off ALARMOUT

Alert Relay Status On/Off ALERT

Ready or Running Status On/Off READY

Running Status On/Off RUNNING

Critical Alarm Status On/Off CRITICAL

UNIT ANALOG

Water Exchanger Entering ±nnn.n °F EWT

Water Exchanger Leaving ±nnn.n °F LWT

Optional Space Temp ±nnn.n °F SPACETMP

CHWS Temperature ±nnn.n °F CHWSTEMP

Reset /Setpoint 4-20mA In ±nn.n ma SP_RESET

Limit 4-20mA Signal ±nn.n ma LIM_ANAL

Chiller Capacity Signal ±nn.n volts CAPT_010

112

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

STATUS DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

CONFIGURATION DISPLAY TABLES

*Day of week where daylight savings time will occur in the morning

(at 2:00 am). In the default setting, daylight savings time occurs on

Sunday (7) morning, 1 hour shall be added when entering and 1

hour subtracted when leaving.

†Date once selected (from 1) shall occur in the week number

entered. 1: If day of week selected is 7 (Sunday) time change will

occur the first Sunday (week number 1) in the month. 5: If day of

week selected is 7 (Sunday) time change will occur the last

Sunday of the month (week number 4 or 5).

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

STRTHOUR Machine Operating Hours nnnnn hours HR_MACH

Machine Starts Number nnnnn st_mach

Compressor A1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A1

Compressor A2 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A2

Compressor A3 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A3

Compressor A4 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_A4

Compressor A1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a1

Compressor A2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a2

Compressor A3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a3

Compressor A4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a4

Compressor B1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B1

Compressor B2 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B2

Compressor B3 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B3

Compressor B4 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_B4

Compressor B1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b1

Compressor B2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b2

Compressor B3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b3

Compressor B4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b4

Compressor C1 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C1

Compressor C2 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C2

Compressor C3 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C3

Compressor C4 Hours nnnnn hours HR_CP_C4

Compressor C1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c1

Compressor C2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c2

Compressor C4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c3

Compressor C4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c4

CYCLES

Starts Max During 1 Hour nn st_cp_mx

Starts/hr From Last 24 h nn st_cp_av

Circuit A Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_a

Circuit B Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_b

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

ALARMDEF/

ALARMS01

Alarm Routing Control 0 or 1 for each posi-

tion

00000000 ALRM_CNT

Alarm Equipment Priority 0-7 4 EQP_TYP

Comm Failure Retry Time 1-240 10 min RETRY_TM

Realarm Time 1-255 30 min RE_ALARM

Alarm System Name 8 chars PRO_RBRQ ALRM_NAM

BRODEFS/

BROCASTS

Activate 0=Unused

1=Broadcast time,

date, holiday flag

and OAT.

2=For Standalone

chiller. Daylight sav-

ings time & holiday

determination will

be done without

broadcasting

through the bus.

2 — ccnbroad

OAT Broadcast

Bus # 0 to 239 0 oatbusnm

Element # 0 to 239 0 oatlocad

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS SELECT Disable/Enable Disable dayl_sel

ENTERING

Month 1 to 12 3 startmon

Day of week* (1=Monday) 1 to 7 7 startdow

Week Number of Month† 1 to 5 5 startwom

LEAVING

Month 1 to 12 10 stopmon

Day of week* (1=Monday) 1 to 7 7 stopdow

Week Number of Month† 1 to 5 5 stopwom

113

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CONFIGURATION DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

* Enter unit size. This item allows the controls to determine capacity

of each compressor and the total number of fans on each circuit

based on a compressor arrangement array (can be viewed in table

FACTORY2). It is not necessary to enter compressor capacity and

number of fans on each circuit. See the Unit Compressor Configu-

ration table on the next page as a reference.

† Number of fans controlled directly by a variable speed fan actua-

tor using 0 to 10 vdc signal or LEN communication. This will

enable the controls to determine the remaining discrete fan stag-

ing outputs from the total fans on each circuit. Configure to 1 for

low ambient head pressure control. Configuration to match num-

ber of fans on circuit for HEVCF option.

** Must be configured to nameplate voltage. Configure 208/230-v

units for 208.

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

!CtrlD /

PD5_RBRQ:

Device Name 8 chars

Description 24 chars PRO-DIALOG 5

30RB&30RQ

Location 24 chars

Software Part Number 16 chars CSA-SR-20C46xxxx

Model Number 20 chars

Serial Number 12 chars

Reference Number 24 chars

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

DISPCONF Metric Display on STDU Yes/No No DISPUNIT

Language Selection

0=English

1=Espanol

2=Francais

3=Portugues

4=English2

0=English

1=Espanol

2=Francais

3=Portugues

4=English2

0 LANGUAGE

FACTORY Unit Type 1 (Cooling Only),

2 (not supported)

1 unit_typ

Unit Capacity* 56 to 500 Unit Dependent tons unitsize

NB Fans on Varifan Cir A† 0 to 6 0 varfan_a

NB Fans on Varifan Cir B† 0 to 6 0 varfan_b

NB Fans on Varifan Cir C† 0 to 6 0 varfan_c

Air Cooled Reclaim Sel Yes/No No recl_opt

Free Cooling Select Yes/No No free_opt

Electrical Heat Stages 0 to 4 0 ehs_sel

Boiler Command Select Yes/No No boil_sel

Power Frequency 60HZ Sel Yes/No Yes freq_60H

Energy Management Module Yes/No No emm_nrcp

Hot Gas Bypass Select 0-Hot gas bypass valve (not

used)

1=Used for Startup only

2=Close Control

3=High Ambient (if High

pressure mode is active,

close control shall be active)

0 hgbp_sel

Pro_dialog Display Selec No=Use ComfortLink

display as user interface

(factory installed)

Yes=Use Pro_dialog

synopsis as user interface

(not supported)

(Must be set to No for

ComfortLink display)

pd4_disp

Factory Password 0 to 150 111 fac_pass

MCHX Exchanger Select Yes/No Unit Dependent mchx_sel

VLT Fan Drive Select Not Supported 0 vlt_sel

VLT Fan Drive RPM Not Supported 0 vlt_rpm

Desuperheater Select Not Supported No desuper

Dual Speed Fan Select Not Supported No dual_fan

Factory Country Code 0-1 1 (Must be set to 1 for

units manufactured in

USA)

fac_code

VFD Voltage for USA 208,380,460,575** Unit dependent volts vfd_volt

Special Demand 0 0 qm_field

114

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

UNIT COMPRESSOR CAPACITY (%) CONFIGURATION

NOTES:

1. Compressor capacity will be automatically be determined if unit

size entered in FACTORY table matches the values in the unit

compressor configuration table.

2. Total number of fans includes fans controlled by a variable speed

fan. This value will be automatically populated if unit size entered

in FACTORY table matches the values in the unit compressor

configuration table.

30RB UNIT

SIZE

POINT NAME (FACTORY2 TABLE)

cap_a1 cap_a2 cap_a3 cap_a4 cap_b1 cap_b2 cap_b3 cap_b4 cap_c1 cap_c2 cap_c3 cap_c4

060 202000200000000

070 252500200000000

080 2020002020000000

090 2525002020000000

100 2525002525000000

110 25250020202000000

120 25250025252500000

130 252525020202000000

150 252525025252500000

160 2525252520202000000

170 2525252525252500000

190 25252525252525250000

210 25 25 25 0 20 20 20 0 25 25 25 0

225 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0

250 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 0 25 25 25 25

275 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 0

300 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

FACTORY2 Compressor A1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a1

Compressor A2 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a2

Compressor A3 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a3

Compressor A4 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_a4

Compressor B1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b1

Compressor B2 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b2

Compressor B3 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b3

Compressor B4 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_b4

Compressor C1 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c1

Compressor C2 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c2

Compressor C3 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c3

Compressor C4 Capacity 0 to 99 0 cap_c4

Circuit A Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_a

Circuit B Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_b

Circuit C Total Fans NB 0 to 6 0 nb_fan_c

EXV A Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0=EXV not used exva_max

EXV B Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0 exvb_max

EXV C Maximum Steps Numb 0/15000 0 exvc_max

115

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CONFIGURATION DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

HOLIDAY/

HOLDY01S to

HOLDY16S

Holiday Start Month 0-12 0 HOL_MON

Start Day 0-31 0 HOL_DAY

Duration (days) 0-99 0 HOL_LEN

MST_SLV MASTER SLAVE CONTROL

Master/Slave Select

0=Disable

1=Master

2=Slave

0=Disable

1=Master

2=Slave

0 ms_sel

Master Control Type

1=Local Control

2=Remote Control

3=CCN Control

1=Local Control

2=Remote Control

3=CCN Control

1 ms_ctrl

Slave Address 1 to 236 2 slv_addr

Lag Start Timer 2 to 30 10 min lstr_tim

Lead/Lag Balance Yes/No No ll_bal

Lead/Lag Balance Delta 40 to 400 168 hours ll_bal_d

Lag Unit Pump Control

0=Stop if Unit Stops

1=Run if Unit Stops

0=Stop if Unit Stops

1=Run if Unit Stops

0 lag_pump

Lead Pulldown Time 0 to 60 0 min lead_pul

OCCDEFCS/

OCCPC01S and

OCCPC02S

Timed Override Hours 0-4 0 OVR_EXT

Period 1 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 11111111 DOW1

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD1

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 24:00 UNOCTOD1

Period 2 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 11111111 DOW2

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD2

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD2

Period 3 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW3

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD3

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD3

Period 4 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW4

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD4

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD4

Period 5 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW5

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD5

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD5

Period 6 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW6

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD6

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD6

Period 7 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW7

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD7

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD7

Period 8 DOW (MTWTFSSH) 0/1 00000000 DOW8

Occupied From 00:00-24:00 00:00 OCCTOD8

Occupied To 00:00-24:00 00:00 UNOCTOD8

116

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

CONFIGURATION DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

NOTES:

1. Flow checked if pump off needed when a command is sent to the

primary pump to prevent cooler from freezing in winter condi-

tions. Command will set the cooler flow switch to closed while the

controls stop the cooler pump. The controls may then generate

an alarm. If this decision is active, the cooler flow switch is not

checked when the cooler pump is stopped.

2. If cooling reset select set point has been selected the set point

based on 4 to 20 mA input signal through ComfortLink controls,

then a 4 to 20 mA reset function shall be ignored. Configura-

tion 3 (4-20mA Control) and 4 (Space Temperature) shall require

an Energy Management Module.

3. Configuration 2 (4-20mA Control) shall require an Energy Man-

agement Module. Configuration 1 Switch Demand limit provides

3 step demand limit if an Energy Management Module is present.

Otherwise, only one step is allowed.

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

USER Circuit Loading Sequence

0=Auto,1=A Lead

2=B Lead, 3 =C Lead

0-3

0=Auto,

1=A Lead

2=B Lead,

3 =C Lead

0 lead_cir

Staged Loading Sequence No/Yes No seq_typ

Ramp Loading Select No/Yes No ramp_sel

Unit Off to On Delay 1-15 1 Min off_on_d

Cooler Pumps Sequence

0=No Pump

1=One Pump Only

2=Two Pumps Auto

3=Pump#1 Manual

4=Pump#2 Manual

0-4

0=No Pump

1=One Pump Only

2=Two Pumps Auto

3=Pump#1 Manual

4=Pump#2 Manual

0 pump_seq

Pump Auto Rotation Delay 24-3000 48 hours pump_del

Pump Sticking Protection No/Yes No pump_per

Stop Pump During Standby No/Yes No pump_sby

Flow Checked if Pump Off No/Yes Yes pump_loc

Auto Changeover Select No/Yes No auto_sel

Cooling Reset Select 0-4 0 cr_sel

Heating Reset Select

1 =OAT,

0=None

2=Delta T,

3=4-20mA Control

4=Space Temp

0-4

1 =OAT,

0=None

2=Delta T,

3=4-20mA Control

4=Space Temp

0 hr_sel

Demand Limit Type Select

0=None

1=Switch Control

2=4-20mA Control

0-2

0=None

1=Switch Control

2=4-20mA Control

0 lim_sel

mA For 100% Demand Limit 0-20 0 ma lim_mx

mA For 0% Demand Limit 0-20 0 ma lim_ze

Heating OAT Threshold -4-32 5 °F heat_th

Boiler OAT Threshold 5-59 14 °F boil_th

Free Cooling -4-37.4 32 °F free_oat

OAT Threshold -4-37.4 32.0 °F free_th

Full Load Timeout 5-60 15 min fc_tmout

Pre_Cooling Selected No/Yes No pre_cool

HSM Both Command Select No/Yes No both_sel

Elec Stage OAT Threshold 23-70 41 °F ehs_th

1 Elec Stage for backup No/Yes No ehs_back

Electrical Pulldown Time 0-60 0 min ehs_pull

Quick EHS for Defrost No/Yes No ehs_defr

Night control

Start Hour 00:00-24:00 00:00 nh_start

End Hour 00:00-24:00 00:00 nh_end

Capacity Limit 0-100 100 % nh_cnfg

Ice Mode Enable No/Yes No ice_cnfg

Menu Description Select No/Yes Yes menu_des

Pass For All User Config No/Yes No all_pass

117

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

SETPOINT DISPLAY TABLES

MAINTENANCE DISPLAY TABLES

NOTES: Tables for display only. Forcing shall not be supported on this maintenance screen.

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME

SETPOINT COOLING

Cooling Setpoint 1 –20.0-78.8 44.0 °F csp1

Cooling Setpoint 2 –20.0-78.8 44.0 °F csp2

Cooling Ice Setpoinp –20.0-32.0 44.0 °F ice_sp

OAT No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oatcr_no

OAT Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oatcr_fu

Delta T No Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_cr_no

Delta T Full Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_cr_fu

Current No Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_cr_no

Current Full Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_cr_fu

Space T No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F spacr_no

Space T Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F spacr_fu

Cooling Reset Deg. Value –30-30 0.0 ^F cr_deg

Cooling Ramp Loading 0.2-2.0 1.0 ^F cramp_sp

HEATING

Heating Setpoint 1 68.0-122.0 100.0 °F hsp1

Heating Setpoint 2 68.0-122.0 100.0 °F hsp2

OAT No Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oathr_no

OAT Full Reset Value 14-125 14.0 °F oathr_fu

Delta T No Reset Value 0-25 0.0 ^F dt_hr_no

Delta T Full Reset Value 0- 25 0.0 ^F dt_hr_fu

Current No Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_hr_no

Current Full Reset Value 0-20 0.0 ma v_hr_fu

Heating Reset Deg. Value –30-30 0.0 ^F hr_deg

Heating Ramp Loading 0.2-2.0 1.0 ^F hramp_sp

AUTO CHANGEOVER

Cool Changeover Setpt 39-122 75.0 °F cauto_sp

Heat Changeover Setpt 32-115 64.0 °F hauto_sp

MISCELLANEOUS

Switch Limit Setpoint 1 0-100 100 % lim_sp1

Switch Limit Setpoint 2 0-100 100 % lim_sp2

Switch Limit Setpoint 3 0-100 100 % lim_sp3

Reclaim Setpoint 95.0-122.0 122.0 °F rsp

Reclaim Deadband 5-27 9.0 ^F hr_deadb

Head Setpoint 40.0-122.0 95.0 °F head_stp

Fan Max Speed 0-100 100 % fan_smax

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

DEFROSTM CIR A DEFROST CONTROL

Exchanger Frost Factor 0-100 % frost_a

Next Sequence Allowed in nnn min def_se_a

Defrost Active? True/False mode[19]

Defrost Temperature ±nnn.n °F DEFRT_A

Defrost Duration nnn min defr_dua

Fan Sequence Started n def_fa_a

Override State nn over_d_a

Mean SST Calculation ±nnn.n °F sst_dm_a

Delta: OAT - Mean SST ±nnn.n ^F delt_a

Reference Delta ±nnn.n ^F delt_r_a

Delta - Reference Delta ±nnn.n °F delt_v_a

Frost Integrator Gain n.n fr_int_a

Defrost Fan Start Cal A 0.00 psi def_ca_a

Defrost Fan Offset Cal A 0.00 psi def_of_a

CIR B DEFROST CONTROL

Exchanger Frost Factor 0-100 % frost_b

Next Sequence Allowed in nnn min def_se_b

Defrost Active? True/False mode[20]

Defrost Temperature ±nnn.n °F DEFRT_B

Defrost Duration nnn min defr_dub

Fan Sequence Started? n def_fa_b

Override State nn over_d_b

Mean SST calculation ±nnn.n °F sst_dm_b

Delta: OAT - Mean SST ±nnn.n ^F delt_b

Reference Delta ±nnn.n ^F delt_r_b

Delta - Reference Delta ±nnn.n ^F delt_v_b

Frost Integrator Gain n.n fr_int_b

Defrost Fan Start Cal B 0.00 psi def_ca_b

Defrost Fan Offset Cal B 0.00 psi def_of_b

118

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

MAINTENANCE DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

FANCTRL Cir A SCT Control Point °F sct_sp_a

Cir A SCT Candidate °F sct_fu_a

Cir A Fan Drive Power kW drva_pwr

Cir A Fan Drive Version drva_ver

Cir B SCT Control Point °F sct_sp_b

Cir B SCT Candidate °F sct_fu_b

Cir B Fan Drive Power kW drvb_pwr

Cir B Fan Drive Version drvb_ver

Cir C SCT Control Point °F sct_sp_c

Cir C SCT Candidate °F sct_fu_c

Cir C Fan Drive Power kW drvc_pwr

Cir C Fan Drive Version drvc_ver

LAST_POR Power On 1: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on1

Power On 1: hour-minute nnnn time_on1

PowerDown 1:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of1

PowerDown 1:hour-minute nnnn time_of1

Power On 2: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on2

Power On 2: hour-minute nnnn time_on2

PowerDown 2:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of2

PowerDown 2:hour-minute nnnn time_of2

Power On 3: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on3

Power On 3: hour-minute nnnn time_on3

PowerDown 3:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of3

PowerDown 3:hour-minute nnnn time_of3

Power On 4: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on4

Power On 4: hour-minute nnnn time_on4

PowerDown 4:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of4

PowerDown 4:hour-minute nnnn time_of4

Power On 5: day-mon-year nnnnnn date_on5

Power On 5: hour-minute nnnn time_on5

PowerDown 5:day-mon-year nnnnnn date_of5

PowerDown 5:hour-minute nnnn time_of5

LOADFACT

Average Ctrl Water Temp ±nnn.n °F ctrl_avg

Differential Water Temp ±nnn.n °F diff_wt

Water Delta T ±nnn.n ^F delta_t

Control Point ±nnn.n °F CTRL_PNT

Reset Amount ±nnn.n ^F reset

Controlled Temp Error ±nnn.n ^F tp_error

Actual Capacity nnn % cap_t

Actual Capacity Limit nnn % cap_lim

Current Z Multiplier Val ±n.n zm

Load/Unload Factor ±nnn.n % smz

Active Stage Number nn cur_stag

Active Capacity Override nn over_cap

EXV Position Limit Cir A nnn.n % exvlim_a

SH Setpoint Circuit A nn.n ^F sh_sp_a

Cooler Exchange DT Cir A nn.n ^F pinch_a

Cooler Pinch Ctl Point A nn.n ^F pinch_spa

EXV Override Circuit A nn ov_exv_a

EXV Position Limit Cir B nnn.n % exvlim_b

SH Setpoint Circuit B nn.n ^F sh_sp_b

Cooler Exchange DT Cir B nn.n ^F pinch_b

Cooler Pinch Ctl Point B nn.n ^F pinch_spb

EXV Override Circuit B nn ov_exv_b

EXV Position Limit Cir C nnn.n % exvlim_c

SH Setpoint Circuit C nn.n ^F sh_sp_c

Cooler Exchange DT Cir C nn.n ^F pinch_c

Cooler Pinch Ctl Point C nn.n ^F pinch_spc

EXV Override Circuit C nn ov_exv_c

EHS Ctrl Override nn over_ehs

Requested Electric Stage nn eh_stage

Electrical Pulldown? True/False Ehspulld

Required Cooling Power req_pow

Free Cool Override Cir A ov_fc_a

Free Cool Override Cir B ov_fc_b

119

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

MAINTENANCE DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

*Always CCN for the slave chiller.

†Slave chiller chillstat value.

**This decision is consistent for Master chiller only. It shall be set by default to 0 for the slave chiller.

††This item is true when chiller has loaded its total available capacity tonnage.

*** 0 — Off and available

1—OnCCN

2 — Not used

3 — Local mode

4 — Restart after power failure

5 — Shut down due to fault

6 — Communication failure

NOTE: Table for display only. Used for Cooling and Heat Pump Compressor Envelope.

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

MSTSLAVE MASTER/SLAVE CONTROL

Unit is Master or Slave Disable/Master/Slave mstslv

Master Control Type* Local/Remote/CCN ms_ctrl

Master/Slave Ctrl Active True/False ms_activ

Lead Unit is the Master/Slave lead_sel

Slave Chiller State† 0/1/2/3/4/5/6*** slv_stat

Slave Chiller Total Cap 0-100 % slv_capt

Lag Start Delay** 1-30 min l_strt_d

Lead/Lag Hours Delta* ±nnnnn hours ll_hr_d

Lead/Lag Changeover?** Yes/No ll_chang

Lead Pulldown? Yes/No ll_pull

Master/Slave Error nn ms_error

Max Available Capacity?†† Yes/No cap_max

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

OCCDEFCM/

OCC1PO1S

OCC2PO2S

Current Mode (1=occup.) 0/1 MODE

Current Occp Period # 1 to 8 PER_NO

Timed-Override in Effect Yes/No OVERLAST

Timed-Override Duration 0-4 hours OVR_HRS

Current Occupied Time 00:00-23:59 STRTTIME

Current Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 ENDTIME

Next Occupied Day Mon-Sun NXTOCDAY

Next Occupied Time 00:00-23:59 NXTOCTIM

Next Unoccupied Day Mon-Sun NXTUNDAY

Next Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 NXTUNTIM

Prev Unoccupied Day Mon-Sun PRVUNDAY

Prev Unoccupied Time 00:00-23:59 PRVUNTIM

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

PR_LIMIT Discharge A Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sdt_m_a

Discharge A Temp Rate ±nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_a

Discharge A Gas Limit ±nnn.n °F sdtlim_a

Suction A Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sst_m_a

Discharge A Tp Average 2 ±nnn.n ^F sdt_m2_a

Discharge A Temp Limit2 ±nnn.n ^F sdtlim2a

Discharge B Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sdt_m_b

Discharge B Temp Rate ±nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_b

Discharge B Gas Limit ±nnn.n °F sdtlim_b

Suction B Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sst_m_b

Discharge C Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sdt_m_c

Discharge C Temp Rate ±nnn.n ^F sdt_mr_c

Discharge C Gas Limit ±nnn.n °F sdtlim_c

Suction C Temp Average ±nnn.n °F sst_m_c

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

SERMAINT Reset Maintenance Alert

1 to 6: reset individually

7: reset all

nn S_RESET forcible

OPERATION WARNINGS

1 — Refrigerant Charge Normal/Low/Disable charge_m

2 — Water Loop Size Normal/Low/Disable wloop_m

GENERAL SERVICING DELAYS

3 — Pump 1 (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable cpump1_m

4 — Pump 2 (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable cpump2_m

5 — Reclaim Pump (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable hpump_m

6 — Water Filter (days) 0-1000/Alert/Disable wfilte_m



1115

120

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

SERVICE DISPLAY TABLES

NOTES:

1. Table used to disable compressors for maintenance purposes.

The capacity control will consider that these compressors (once

set to YES) are failed manually (no alarm will appear).

2. All data will be re-initialized to “NO” at Power on reset on units

using pro_dialog display. For ComfortLink display, data shall be

saved.

NOTE: This table shall be downloadable at any time. However, modified value shall not be used by tasks until the unit is in OFF state. This shall not

apply to the Varifan gains that shall be modified at any time and used immediately by the head pressure control tasks even if the unit is in operation.

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

CP_UNABL Compressor A1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a1

Compressor A2 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a2

Compressor A3 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a3

Compressor A4 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_a4

Compressor B1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b1

Compressor B2 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b2

Compressor B3 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b3

Compressor B4 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_b4

Compressor C1 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c1

Compressor C2 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c2

Compressor C3 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c3

Compressor C4 Disable No/Yes No un_cp_c4

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

MAINTCFG

MAINTENANCE CONFIG

Servicing Alert Enable/Disable Disable s_alert

Refrigerant Charge Ctrl Enable/Disable Disable charge_c

Water Loop Control Enable/Disable Disable wloop_c

CPump 1 Ctl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 cpump1_c

CPump 2 Ctl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 cpump2_c

HPump Ctrl Delay (days) 0-1000 0 hpump_c

Water Filter Ctrl (days) 0-1000 0 wfilte_c

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE DEFAULT UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

SERVICE1 Cooler Fluid Type 1-3 1 flui_typ

Entering Fluid Control Yes/No No ewt_opt

Prop PID Gain Varifan –20.0-20.0 2.0 hd_pg

Int PID Gain Varifan –5.0-5.0 0.2 hd_ig

Deri PID Gain Varifan –20.0-20.0 0.4 hd_dg

EXV A Superheat Setpoint 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_a

EXV B Superheat Setpoint 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_b

EXV C Superheat Setpoint 2.5-54.0 9.0 ^F sh_sp_c

EXV MOP Setpoint 30.8-50.0 50.0 °F mop_sp

High Pressure Threshold 500-640 609 psi hp_th

Cooler Heater Delta Spt 1-6 2 ^F heatersp

Brine Freeze Setpoint –20-34 34 °F lowestsp

Minimum LWT Setpoint 38 °F mini_lwt

Auto Start When SM Lost Enable/Disable Disable auto_sm

Auto Z Multiplier Setpt 4-10 6 zm_spt

Maximum Z Multiplier 1.0-6.0 6.0 hc_zm

Recl Valve Min Position 0-50 20 % min_3w

Recl Valve Max Position 20-100 100 % max_3w

User Password 0-150 11 N/A use_pass

Service Password 0-150 88 N/A ser_pass

SPM Board Configuration 0 or 1 for each digit 00001010 spm_conf

Maximum Ducted Fan Speed 0-100 100 % fan_max

121

APPENDIX B — CCN TABLES (cont)

SERVICE DISPLAY TABLES (cont)

NOTE: This table shall be used for purposes of transplanting the devices on time in the event of a module hardware failure or software upgrade via

downloading. It shall be usable only if all items are still null. Afterwards, its access shall be denied.

NOTE: This table shall be used for purposes of transplanting the devices on time in the event of a module hardware failure or software upgrade via

downloading. It shall be usable only if all items are still null. Afterwards, its access shall be denied.

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

UPDHRFAN TABLE TO BE USED FOR

RUN TIMES AND START

UPDATE IN CASE OF

CONTROL RETROFIT

FAN Operating Hours

Circuit A Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana1

Circuit A Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana2

Circuit A Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana3

Circuit A Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana4

Circuit A Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana5

Circuit A Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fana6

Circuit B Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb1

Circuit B Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb2

Circuit B Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb3

Circuit B Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb4

Circuit B Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb5

Circuit B Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanb6

Circuit C Fan #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc1

Circuit C Fan #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc2

Circuit C Fan #3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc3

Circuit C Fan #4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc4

Circuit C Fan #5 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc5

Circuit C Fan #6 Hours nnnnn hours hr_fanc6

WATER PUMP

WATER PUMP #1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum1

WATER PUMP #2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cpum2

Heat Reclaim Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_hpump

FREE COOLING PUMPS

Free Cool A Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_a

Free Cool B Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_b

Free Cool C Pump Hours nnnnn hours hr_fcp_c

TABLE DISPLAY NAME RANGE UNITS POINT NAME WRITE STATUS

UPDTHOUR TABLE TO BE USED FOR

RUN TIMES UPDATE IN

CASE OF CONTROL

RETROFIT

Machine Operating Hours nnnnn hours hr_mach

Machine Starts nnnnn st_mach

Compressor A1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a1

Compressor A2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a2

Compressor A3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a3

Compressor A4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_a4

Compressor A1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a1

Compressor A2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a2

Compressor A3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a3

Compressor A4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_a4

Compressor B1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b1

Compressor B2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b2

Compressor B3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b3

Compressor B4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_b4

Compressor B1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b1

Compressor B2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b2

Compressor B3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b3

Compressor B4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_b4

Compressor C1 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_c1

Compressor C2 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_c2

Compressor C3 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_c3

Compressor C4 Hours nnnnn hours hr_cp_c4

Compressor C1 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c1

Compressor C2 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c2

Compressor C3 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c3

Compressor C4 Starts nnnnn st_cp_c4

Circuit A Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_a

Circuit B Defrost Number nnnnn nb_def_b

122

APPENDIX C — CCN ALARM DESCRIPTION

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE

Thermistor Failure

th-01 Water exchanger Entering Fluid Thermistor

th-02 Water exchanger Leaving Fluid Thermistor

th-03 Circuit A Defrost Thermistor

th-04 Circuit B Defrost Thermistor

th-08 Reclaim Condenser Entering Thermistor

th-09 Reclaim Condenser Leaving Thermistor

th-10 OAT Thermistor

th-11 MASTER/Slave Common Fluid Thermistor

th-12 Circuit A Suction Gas Thermistor

th-13 Circuit B Suction Gas Thermistor

th-14 Circuit C Suction Gas Thermistor

th-18 Circuit A Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor

th-19 Circuit B Condenser Subcooling Liquid Thermistor

th-21 Space Temperature Thermistor

Pressure Transducer Failure

Pr-01 Circuit A Discharge Transducer

Pr-02 Circuit B Discharge Transducer

Pr-03 Circuit C Discharge Transducer

Pr-04 Circuit A Suction Transducer

Pr-05 Circuit B Suction Transducer

Pr-06 Circuit C Suction Transducer

Pr-07 Circuit A Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer

Pr-08 Circuit B Reclaim Pumpdown Pressure Transducer

Communication with Slave Board Failure

Co-A1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A1

Co-A2 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A2

Co-A3 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A3

Co-A4 Loss of communication with Compressor Board A4

Co-B1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B1

Co-B2 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B2

Co-B3 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B3

Co-B4 Loss of communication with Compressor Board B4

Co-C1 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C1

Co-C2 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C2

Co-C3 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C3

Co-C4 Loss of communication with Compressor Board C4

Co-E1 Loss of communication with EXV Board Number 1

Co-E2 Loss of communication with EXV Board Number 2

Co-F1 Loss of communication with Fan Board Number 1

Co-F2 Loss of communication with Fan Board Number 2

Co-F3 Loss of communication with Fan Board Number 3

Co-O1 Loss of communication with Free Cooling Board

Co-O2 Loss of communication with Electrical Heaters Board

Co-O3 Loss of communication with Energy Management NRCP2 Board

Co-O4 Loss of communication with Heat Reclaim Board

Ct-01 Circuit A Welded Contactor Failure

Ct-02 Circuit B Welded Contactor Failure

Ct-03 Circuit C Welded Contactor Failure

123

APPENDIX C — CCN ALARM DESCRIPTION (cont)

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE

Process Failure

FC-n0 No factory configuration

FC-01 Illegal factory configuration Number #1 to nn

MC-nn Master chiller configuration error Number #1 to nn

P-01 Water Exchanger Freeze Protection

P-05 Circuit A Low Suction Temperature

P-06 Circuit B Low Suction Temperature

P-07 Circuit C Low Suction Temperature

P-08 Circuit A High Superheat

P-09 Circuit B High Superheat

P-10 Circuit C High Superheat

P-11 Circuit A Low Superheat

P-12 Circuit B Low Superheat

P-13 Circuit C Low Superheat

P-14 Cooler Interlock Failure

P-15 Condenser Flow Switch Failure

P-16 Compressor A1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-17 Compressor A2 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-18 Compressor A3 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-19 Compressor A4 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-20 Compressor B1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-21 Compressor B2 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-22 Compressor B3 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-23 Compressor B4 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-24 Compressor C1 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-25 Compressor C2 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-26 Compressor C3 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-27 Compressor C4 Not Started or Pressure Increase not established

P-28 Electrical Box Thermostat or Power Reverse Phase Detection

P-29 Loss of communication with System Manager

P-30 Master/Slave communication Failure

P-31 Unit is in CCN emergency stop

P-32 Water pump #1 default

P-33 Water pump #2 default

P-34 Circuit A Reclaim Operation Failure

P-35 Circuit B Reclaim Operation Failure

P-37 Circuit A — Repeated high discharge gas overrides

P-38 Circuit B — Repeated high discharge gas overrides

P-39 Circuit C — Repeated high discharge gas overrides

P-40 Circuit A — Repeated low suction temp overrides

P-41 Circuit B — Repeated low suction temp overrides

P-42 Circuit C — Repeated low suction temp overrides

P-43 Low entering water temperature in heating

P-97 Water Exchanger Temperature Sensors Swapped

124

APPENDIX C — CCN ALARM DESCRIPTION (cont)

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE

Service Failure

Sr-nn Service maintenance alert Number # nn (see Table 49)

Compressor Failure

A1-01 Compressor A1 Motor Temperature Too High

A1-02 Compressor A1 Crankcase Heater Failure

A1-03 Compressor A1 High Pressure Switch

A1-04 Compressor A1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

A1-05 Compressor A1 Power Reset

A1-06 Compressor A1 Low Control Voltage Alert

A2-01 Compressor A2 Motor Temperature Too High

A2-02 Compressor A2 Crankcase Heater Failure

A2-03 Compressor A2 High Pressure Switch

A2-04 Compressor A2 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

A2-05 Compressor A2 Power Reset

A2-06 Compressor A2 Low Control Voltage Alert

A3-01 Compressor A3 Motor Temperature Too High

A3-02 Compressor A3 Crankcase Heater Failure

A3-03 Compressor A3 High Pressure Switch

A3-04 Compressor A3 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

A3-05 Compressor A3 Power Reset

A3-06 Compressor A3 Low Control Voltage Alert

A4-01 Compressor A4 Motor Temperature Too High

A4-02 Compressor A4 Crankcase Heater Failure

A4-03 Compressor A4 High Pressure Switch

A4-04 Compressor A4 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

A4-05 Compressor A4 Power Reset

A4-06 Compressor A4 Low Control Voltage Alert

B1-01 Compressor B1 Motor Temperature Too High

B1-02 Compressor B1 Crankcase Heater Failure

B1-03 Compressor B1 High Pressure Switch

B1-04 Compressor B1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

B1-05 Compressor B1 Power Reset

B1-06 Compressor B1 Low Control Voltage Alert

B2-01 Compressor B2 Motor Temperature Too High

B2-02 Compressor B2 Crankcase Heater Failure

B2-03 Compressor B2 High Pressure Switch

B2-04 Compressor B2 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

B2-05 Compressor B2 Power Reset

B2-06 Compressor B2 Low Control Voltage Alert

B3-01 Compressor B3 Motor Temperature Too High

B3-02 Compressor B3 Crankcase Heater Failure

B3-03 Compressor B3 High Pressure Switch

B3-04 Compressor B3 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

B3-05 Compressor B3 Power Reset

B3-06 Compressor B3 Low Control Voltage Alert

B4-01 Compressor B4 Motor Temperature Too High

B4-02 Compressor B4 Crankcase Heater Failure

B4-03 Compressor B4 High Pressure Switch

B4-04 Compressor B4 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

B4-05 Compressor B4 Power Reset

B4-06 Compressor B4 Low Control Voltage Alert

125

APPENDIX C — CCN ALARM DESCRIPTION (cont)

ALARM CODE ALARM TEXT DESCRIPTION AND CCN MESSAGE

Compressor Failure

C1-01 Compressor C1 Motor Temperature Too High

C1-02 Compressor C1 Crankcase Heater Failure

C1-03 Compressor C1 High Pressure Switch

C1-04 Compressor C1 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

C1-05 Compressor C1 Power Reset

C1-06 Compressor C1 Low Control Voltage Alert

C2-01 Compressor C2 Motor Temperature Too High

C2-02 Compressor C2 Crankcase Heater Failure

C2-03 Compressor C2 High Pressure Switch

C2-04 Compressor C2 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

C2-05 Compressor C2 Power Reset

C2-06 Compressor C2 Low Control Voltage Alert

C3-01 Compressor C3 Motor Temperature Too High

C3-02 Compressor C3 Crankcase Heater Failure

C3-03 Compressor C3 High Pressure Switch

C3-04 Compressor C3 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

C3-05 Compressor C3 Power Reset

C3-06 Compressor C3 Low Control Voltage Alert

C4-01 Compressor C4 Motor Temperature Too High

C4-02 Compressor C4 Crankcase Heater Failure

C4-03 Compressor C4 High Pressure Switch

C4-04 Compressor C4 Motor Temperature Sensor PTC Out Of Range

C4-05 Compressor C4 Power Reset

C4-06 Compressor C4 Low Control Voltage Alert

V0-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit A

V1-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit B

V2-xx Variable Speed Fan Motor Failure, Circuit C

126

APPENDIXD—R-410A PRESSURE VS. TEMPERATURE CHART

PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C PSIG °F °C

12 –37.7 –38.7 114 37.8 3.2 216 74.3 23.5 318 100.2 37.9 420 120.7 49.3 522 137.6 58.7

14 –34.7 –37.1 116 38.7 3.7 218 74.9 23.8 320 100.7 38.2 422 121.0 49.4 524 137.9 58.8

16 –32.0 –35.6 118 39.5 4.2 220 75.5 24.2 322 101.1 38.4 424 121.4 49.7 526 138.3 59.1

18 –29.4 –34.1 120 40.5 4.7 222 76.1 24.5 324 101.6 38.7 426 121.7 49.8 528 138.6 59.2

20 –26.9 –32.7 122 41.3 5.2 224 76.7 24.8 326 102.0 38.9 428 122.1 50.1 530 138.9 59.4

22 –24.5 –31.4 124 42.2 5.7 226 77.2 25.1 328 102.4 39.1 430 122.5 50.3 532 139.2 59.6

24 –22.2 –30.1 126 43.0 6.1 228 77.8 25.4 330 102.9 39.4 432 122.8 50.4 534 139.5 59.7

26 –20.0 –28.9 128 43.8 6.6 230 78.4 25.8 332 103.3 39.6 434 123.2 50.7 536 139.8 59.9

28 –17.9 –27.7 130 44.7 7.1 232 78.9 26.1 334 103.7 39.8 436 123.5 50.8 538 140.1 60.1

30 –15.8 –26.6 132 45.5 7.5 234 79.5 26.4 336 104.2 40.1 438 123.9 51.1 540 140.4 60.2

32 –13.8 –25.4 134 46.3 7.9 236 80.0 26.7 338 104.6 40.3 440 124.2 51.2 544 141.0 60.6

34 –11.9 –24.4 136 47.1 8.4 238 80.6 27.0 340 105.1 40.6 442 124.6 51.4 548 141.6 60.9

36 –10.1 –23.4 138 47.9 8.8 240 81.1 27.3 342 105.4 40.8 444 124.9 51.6 552 142.1 61.2

38 –8.3 –22.4 140 48.7 9.3 242 81.6 27.6 344 105.8 41.0 446 125.3 51.8 556 142.7 61.5

40 –6.5 –21.4 142 49.5 9.7 244 82.2 27.9 346 106.3 41.3 448 125.6 52.0 560 143.3 61.8

42 –4.5 –20.3 144 50.3 10.2 246 82.7 28.2 348 106.6 41.4 450 126.0 52.2 564 143.9 62.2

44 –3.2 –19.6 146 51.1 10.6 248 83.3 28.5 350 107.1 41.7 452 126.3 52.4 568 144.5 62.5

46 –1.6 –18.7 148 51.8 11.0 250 83.8 28.8 352 107.5 41.9 454 126.6 52.6 572 145.0 62.8

48 0.0 –17.8 150 52.5 11.4 252 84.3 29.1 354 107.9 42.2 456 127.0 52.8 576 145.6 63.1

50 1.5 –16.9 152 53.3 11.8 254 84.8 29.3 356 108.3 42.4 458 127.3 52.9 580 146.2 63.4

52 3.0 –16.1 154 54.0 12.2 256 85.4 29.7 358 108.8 42.7 460 127.7 53.2 584 146.7 63.7

54 4.5 –15.3 156 54.8 12.7 258 85.9 29.9 360 109.2 42.9 462 128.0 53.3 588 147.3 64.1

56 5.9 –14.5 158 55.5 13.1 260 86.4 30.2 362 109.6 43.1 464 128.3 53.5 592 147.9 64.4

58 7.3 –13.7 160 56.2 13.4 262 86.9 30.5 364 110.0 43.3 466 128.7 53.7 596 148.4 64.7

60 8.6 –13.0 162 57.0 13.9 264 87.4 30.8 366 110.4 43.6 468 129.0 53.9 600 149.0 65.0

62 10.0 –12.2 164 57.7 14.3 266 87.9 31.1 368 110.8 43.8 470 129.3 54.1 604 149.5 65.3

64 11.3 –11.5 166 58.4 14.7 268 88.4 31.3 370 111.2 44.0 472 129.7 54.3 608 150.1 65.6

66 12.6 –10.8 168 59.0 15.0 270 88.9 31.6 372 111.6 44.2 474 130.0 54.4 612 150.6 65.9

68 13.8 –10.1 170 59.8 15.4 272 89.4 31.9 374 112.0 44.4 476 130.3 54.6 616 151.2 66.2

70 15.1 –9.4 172 60.5 15.8 274 89.9 32.2 376 112.4 44.7 478 130.7 54.8 620 151.7 66.5

72 16.3 –8.7 174 61.1 16.2 276 90.4 32.4 378 112.6 44.8 480 131.0 55.0 624 152.3 66.8

74 17.5 –8.1 176 61.8 16.6 278 90.9 32.7 380 113.1 45.1 482 131.3 55.2 628 152.8 67.1

76 18.7 –7.4 178 62.5 16.9 280 91.4 33.0 382 113.5 45.3 484 131.6 55.3 632 153.4 67.4

78 19.8 –6.8 180 63.1 17.3 282 91.9 33.3 384 113.9 45.5 486 132.0 55.6 636 153.9 67.7

80 21.0 –6.1 182 63.8 17.7 284 92.4 33.6 386 114.3 45.7 488 132.3 55.7 640 154.5 68.1

82 22.1 –5.5 184 64.5 18.1 286 92.8 33.8 388 114.7 45.9 490 132.6 55.9 644 155.0 68.3

84 23.2 –4.9 186 65.1 18.4 288 93.3 34.1 390 115.0 46.1 492 132.9 56.1 648 155.5 68.6

86 24.3 –4.3 188 65.8 18.8 290 93.8 34.3 392 115.5 46.4 494 133.3 56.3 652 156.1 68.9

88 25.4 –3.7 190 66.4 19.1 292 94.3 34.6 394 115.8 46.6 496 133.6 56.4 656 156.6 69.2

90 26.4 –3.1 192 67.0 19.4 294 94.8 34.9 396 116.2 46.8 498 133.9 56.6 660 157.1 69.5

92 27.4 –2.6 194 67.7 19.8 296 95.2 35.1 398 116.6 47.0 500 134.0 56.7 664 157.7 69.8

94 28.5 –1.9 196 68.3 20.2 298 95.7 35.4 400 117.0 47.2 502 134.5 56.9 668 158.2 70.1

96 29.5 –1.4 198 68.9 20.5 300 96.2 35.7 402 117.3 47.4 504 134.8 57.1 672 158.7 70.4

98 30.5 –0.8 200 69.5 20.8 302 96.6 35.9 404 117.7 47.6 506 135.2 57.3 676 159.2 70.7

100 31.2 –0.4 202 70.1 21.2 304 97.1 36.2 406 118.1 47.8 508 135.5 57.5 680 159.8 71.0

102 32.2 0.1 204 70.7 21.5 306 97.5 36.4 408 118.5 48.1 510 135.8 57.7 684 160.3 71.3

104 33.2 0.7 206 71.4 21.9 308 98.0 36.7 410 118.8 48.2 512 136.1 57.8 688 160.8 71.6

106 34.1 1.2 208 72.0 22.2 310 98.4 36.9 412 119.2 48.4 514 136.4 58.0 692 161.3 71.8

108 35.1 1.7 210 72.6 22.6 312 98.9 37.2 414 119.6 48.7 516 136.7 58.2 696 161.8 72.1

110 35.5 1.9 212 73.2 22.9 314 99.3 37.4 416 119.9 48.8 518 137.0 58.3

112 36.9 2.7 214 73.8 23.2 316 99.7 37.6 418 120.3 49.1 520 137.3 58.5

127

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS

30RB Maintenance Interval Requirements

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Main-

tenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

WEEKLY

Compressor Check Oil Level.

Condenser

Check condenser coils for debris, clean as necessary.

Periodic clean water rinse, especially in coastal and industrial applications.

Controls Review Alarm/Alert History.

MONTHLY

Cooler Inspect water pumps.

Controls

Check accuracy of thermistors, replace if greater than ±2° F (1.2° C) variance from calibrated ther-

mometer.

Check accuracy of transducers, replace if greater than ±5 psi (34.47 kPa) variance.

Refrigerant System

Check refrigerant charge level.

Check moisture indicating sight glass for possible refrigerant loss and presence of moisture.

Perform leak test.

QUARTERLY

Compressor Check crankcase heater operation.

Controls Check chilled water flow switch operation.

Condenser Check all condenser fans for proper operation.

Refrigerant System Check all refrigerant joints and valves for refrigerant leaks, repair as necessary.

Hydronic System

Inspect pump seal, if equipped with a hydronic pump package.

Lubricate pump motor as required.

Starter Inspect all contactors.

ANNUALLY

Cooler

Check to be sure that the proper concentration of antifreeze is present in the chilled water loop, if appli-

cable.

Verify that the chilled water loop is properly treated.

Check chilled water strainers, clean as necessary.

Check cooler heater operation, if equipped.

Condenser Check condition of condenser fan blades and that they are securely fastened to the motor shaft.

Controls

Perform Service Test to confirm operation of all components.

Check all electrical connections, tighten as necessary.

Inspect all contactors and relays, replace as necessary.

Refrigerant System Check refrigerant filter driers for excessive pressure drop, replace as necessary.

Hydronic System Check pump heater operation if equipped.

128

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RB Maintenance Log

Plant ___________________________

Machine Model No. ________________

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Main-

tenance Interval Requirements are not covered under warranty.

DATE OIL LEVEL

CHECK

CONDENSER

COIL

CHECK

ALARMS /

FAULTS

OPERATOR

INITIALS

REMARKS

129

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RB Maintenance Log for Monthly, Quarterly, and Annual Checks

Annually

NOTE: Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements

are not covered under warranty.

Month 123456789101112

Date // // // // // // // // // // // //

Operator

UNIT SECTION ACTION UNIT ENTRY

Compressor

Check Oil Level yes/no

Check Crankcase Heater Operation yes/no

Send Oil Sample Out for Analysis yes/no

Cooler

Check Cooler Heater Operation yes/no

Check Chiller Water Loop yes/no

Check Chilled Water Strainers yes/no

Record Water Pressure Differential (PSI) PSI

Inspect Water Pumps yes/no

Condenser

Inspect and Clean All Coils yes/no

Check all Condenser Fans for Proper Operation yes/no

Check Condition of Condenser Fan Blades yes/no

Controls

General Cleaning and Tightening Connections yes/no

Check Chilled Water Flow Switch Operation yes/no

Perform Service Test yes/no

Confirm Accuracy of Pressure Transducers yes/no

Confirm Accuracy of Thermistors yes/no

Starter

General Tightening and Cleaning Connections yes/no

Inspect All Contactors yes/no

System

Check Refrigerant Charge Level yes/no

Verify Operation of EXVs and Record Position 0-100%

Record System Superheat deg. F

Check Moisture Sight Glass yes/no

Perform Leak Test yes/no

Check all Refrigerant Joints and Valves for Refrig-

erant Leaks

yes/no

Check Filter Driers yes/no

130

APPENDIX E — MAINTENANCE SUMMARY AND LOG SHEETS (cont)

30RB Seasonal Shutdown Log

NOTES:

1. Equipment failures caused by lack of adherence to the Maintenance Interval Requirements

are not covered under warranty.

2. Refer to Installation Instructions for proper Winterization procedure.

Month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Date / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / /

Operator

UNIT SECTION ACTION ENTRY

Cooler Isolate and Drain Cooler

Controls

Do Not Disconnect Control Power Unless Cooler is

Completely Drained

131

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION

The following section is used to configure the UPC Open

controller which is used when the BACnet* communication

option is selected. The UPC Open controller is mounted in a

separate enclosure below the main control box.

TO ADDRESS THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER — The

user must give the UPC Open controller an address that is

unique on the BACnet network. Perform the following proce-

dure to assign an address:

1. If the UPC Open controller is powered, pull the screw ter-

minal connector from the controller's power terminals la-

beled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the address

each time power is applied to it.

2. Using the rotary switches (see Fig. A and B), set the con-

troller's address. Set the Tens (10's) switch to the tens dig-

it of the address, and set the Ones (1's) switch to the ones

digit.

As an example in Fig. B, if the controller’s address is 25,

point the arrow on the Tens (10's) switch to 2 and the arrow on

the Ones (1's) switch to 5.

BACNET DEVICE INSTANCE ADDRESS — The UPC

Open controller also has a BACnet Device Instance address.

This Device Instance MUST be unique for the complete BAC-

net system in which the UPC Open controller is installed. The

Device Instance is auto generated by default and is derived by

adding the MAC address to the end of the Network Number.

The Network Number of a new UPC Open controller is 16101,

but it can be changed using i-Vu

Tools or BACView device.

By default, a MAC address of 20 will result in a Device In-

stance of 16101 + 20 which would be a Device Instance of

1610120.

10's

1's

Fig. B — Address Rotary Switches

Fig. A — UPC Open Controller

BACNET

BAUD RATE

DIP SWITCHES

ADDRESS

ROTARY

SWITCHES

POWER LED

RUN LED

ERROR LED

BACNET

CONNECTION

(BAS PORT)

BT485

TERMINATOR

Tx2 LED

Rx2 LED

Tx1 LED

Rx1 LED

EIA-485

JUMPERS

* Sponsored by ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating

and Air-Conditioning Engineers).

132

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

CONFIGURING THE BAS PORT FOR BACNET MS/

TP — Use the same baud rate and communication settings for

all controllers on the network segment. The UPC Open con-

troller is fixed at 8 data bits, No Parity, and 1 Stop bit for this

protocol's communications.

If the UPC Open controller has been wired for power, pull

the screw terminal connector from the controller's power termi-

nals labeled Gnd and HOT. The controller reads the DIP

Switches and jumpers each time power is applied to it.

Set the BAS Port DIP switch DS3 to “enable.” Set the BAS

Port DIP switch DS4 to “E1-485.” Set the BMS Protocol DIP

switches DS8 through DS5 to “MSTP.” See Table A.

TableA—SW3Protocol Switch Settings

for MS/TP

Verify that the EIA-485 jumpers below the CCN Port are

set to EIA-485 and 2W.

The example in Fig. C shows the BAS Port DIP Switches

set for 76.8k (Carrier default) and MS/TP.

Set the BAS Port DIP Switches DS2 and DS1 for the appro-

priate communications speed of the MS/TP network (9600,

19.2k, 38.4k, or 76.8k bps). See Fig. D and Table B.

Table B — Baud Selection Table

WIRING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER TO THE MS/

TP NETWORK — The UPC Open controller communicates

using BACnet on an MS/TP network segment communications

at 9600 bps, 19.2 kbps, 38.4 kbps, or 76.8 kbps.

Wire the controllers on an MS/TP network segment in a

daisy-chain configuration. Wire specifications for the cable are

22 AWG (American Wire Gage) or 24 AWG, low-capacitance,

twisted, stranded, shielded copper wire. The maximum length

is 2000 ft.

Install a BT485 terminator on the first and last controller on

a network segment to add bias and prevent signal distortions

due to echoing. See Fig. A, D, and E.

To wire the UPC Open controller to the BAS network:

1. Pull the screw terminal connector from the controller's

BAS Port.

2. Check the communications wiring for shorts and

grounds.

3. Connect the communications wiring to the BAS port’s

screw terminals labeled Net +, Net -, and Shield.

NOTE: Use the same polarity throughout the network

segment.

4. Insert the power screw terminal connector into the UPC

Open controller's power terminals if they are not current-

ly connected.

5. Verify communication with the network by viewing a

module status report. To perform a module status report

using the BACview keypad/display unit, press and hold

the “FN” key then press the “.” Key.

DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3

Off Off Off Off On Off

BAUD RATE DS2 DS1

9,600 Off Off

19,200 On Off

38,400 Off On

76,800 On On

Fig. C — DIP Switches

Fig. D — Network Wiring

133

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

To install a BT485 terminator, push the BT485 terminator

on to the BT485 connector located near the BACnet connector.

NOTE: The BT485 terminator has no polarity associated with

it.

To order a BT485 terminator, consult Commercial Products

i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.

MS/TP WIRING RECOMMENDATIONS — Recommen-

dations are shown in Tables C and D. The wire jacket and UL

temperature rating specifications list two acceptable alterna-

tives. The Halar specification has a higher temperature rating

and a tougher outer jacket than the SmokeGard specification,

and it is appropriate for use in applications where the user is

concerned about abrasion. The Halar jacket is also less likely to

crack in extremely low temperatures.

NOTE: Use the specified type of wire and cable for maximum

signal integrity.

TableC—MS/TP Wiring Recommendations

LEGEND

Fig. E — BT485 Terminator Installation

SPECIFICATION RECOMMMENDATION

Cable Single twisted pair, low capacitance, CL2P, 22 AWG (7x30), TC foam FEP, plenum rated cable

Conductor 22 or 24 AWG stranded copper (tin plated)

Insulation Foamed FEP 0.015 in. (0.381 mm) wall 0.060 in. (1.524 mm) O.D.

Color Code Black/White

Twist Lay 2 in. (50.8 mm) lay on pair 6 twists/foot (20 twists/meter) nominal

Shielding Aluminum/Mylar shield with 24 AWG TC drain wire

Jacket

SmokeGard Jacket (SmokeGard PVC) 0.021 in. (0.5334 mm) wall 0.175 in. (4.445 mm) O.D.

Halar Jacket (E-CTFE) 0.010 in. (0.254 mm) wall 0.144 in. (3.6576 mm) O.D.

DC Resistance 15.2 Ohms/1000 feet (50 Ohms/km) nominal

Capacitance 12.5 pF/ft (41 pF/meter) nominal conductor to conductor

Characteristic Impedance 100 Ohms nominal

Weight 12 lb/1000 feet (17.9 kg/km)

UL Temperature Rating

SmokeGard 167°F (75°C)

Halar -40 to 302°F (-40 to 150°C)

Voltage 300 Vac, power limited

Listing UL: NEC CL2P, or better

AWG — American Wire Gage

CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable

DC — Direct Current

FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer

NEC — National Electrical Code

O.D. — Outside Diameter

TC — Tinned Copper

UL — Underwriters Laboratories

134

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table D — Open System Wiring Specifications and Recommended Vendors

LEGEND

LOCAL ACCESS TO THE UPC OPEN CONTROL-

LER — The user can use a BACview

handheld keypad dis-

play unit or the Virtual BACview software as a local user inter-

face to an Open controller. These items let the user access the

controller network information. These are accessory items and

do not come with the UPC Open controller.

The BACview

unit connects to the local access port on the

UPC Open controller. See Fig. F. The BACview software must

be running on a laptop computer that is connected to the local

access port on the UPC Open controller. The laptop will re-

quire an additional USB link cable for connection.

See the BACview Installation and User Guide for instruc-

tions on connecting and using the BACview

device.

To order a BACview

Handheld (BV6H), consult Commer-

cial Products i-Vu Open Control System Master Prices.

CONFIGURING THE UPC OPEN CONTROLLER'S

PROPERTIES — The UPC Open device and ComfortLink

control must be set to the same CCN Address (Element)

number and CCN Bus number. The factory default settings for

CCN Element and CCN Bus number are 1 and 0 respectively.

If modifications to the default Element and Bus number are

required, both the ComfortLink and UPC Open configurations

must be changed.

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-

dress and Bus number in the ComfortLink control. These con-

figurations can be changed using the scrolling marquee display

or accessory Navigator handheld device.

Configuration→CCN→CCN.A (CCN Address)

Configuration→CCN→CCN.B (CCN Bus Number)

The following configurations are used to set the CCN Ad-

dress and Bus Number in the UPC Open controller. These con-

figurations can be changed using the accessory BACview

dis-

play.

Navigation: BACview→CCN

Home: Element Comm Stat

Element: 1

Bus: 0

WIRING SPECIFICATIONS RECOMMENDED VENDORS AND PART NUMBERS

Wire Type Description

Connect Air

International

Belden RMCORP

Contractors

Wire and Cable

MS/TP

Network (RS-485)

22 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,

TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide for

specifications.

W221P-22227 — 25160PV CLP0520LC

24 AWG, single twisted shielded pair, low capacitance, CL2P,

TC foam FEP, plenum rated. See MS/TP Installation Guide

for specifications.

W241P-2000F 82841 25120-OR —

Rnet 4 conductor, unshielded, CMP, 18 AWG, plenum rated. W184C-2099BLB 6302UE 21450 CLP0442

AWG — American Wire Gage

CL2P — Class 2 Plenum Cable

CMP — Communications Plenum Rated

FEP — Fluorinated Ethylene Polymer

TC — Tinned Copper

Fig. F — BACview

Device Connection

135

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

If the UPC Open is used with the chiller application of

Lead/Lag/Standby, all chillers and UPC Open's CCN element

numbers must be changed to a unique number in order to fol-

low CCN specifications. In this application, there can only be a

maximum of 3 UPC Open controllers on a CCN bus.

For the CCN Alarm Acknowledger configuration, the UPC

Open defaults to CCN Acknowledger. If a Chiller Lead/Lag/

Standby application is being used, then the Carrier technician

must change the configuration to only one CCN Acknowledger

on the CCN bus.

For the CCN Time Broadcaster configuration, the UPC

Open defaults to CCN Time Broadcaster. If the Chiller Lead/

Lag/Standby application is used, then the Carrier technician

must change the configuration to only one CCN Time Broad-

caster on the CCN bus.

TROUBLESHOOTING — If there are problems wiring or

addressing the UPC Open controller, contact Carrier Technical

Support.

COMMUNICATION LEDS

— The LEDs indicate if the

controller is communicating with the devices on the network.

See Tables E and F. The LEDs should reflect communication

traffic based on the baud rate set. The higher the baud rate the

more solid the LEDs become. See Fig. A for location of LEDs

on UPC Open module.

REPLACING THE UPC OPEN BATTERY — The UPC

Open controller's 10-year lithium CR2032 battery provides a

minimum of 10,000 hours of data retention during power

outages.

Remove the battery from the controller, making note of the

battery's polarity. Insert the new battery, matching the battery's

polarity with the polarity indicated on the UPC Open

controller.

NETWORK POINTS LIST — The points list for the control-

ler is shown in Table G.

Table E — LED Status Indicators

Table F — Run and Error LEDs Controller and Network Status Indication

IMPORTANT: Power must be ON to the UPC Open when

replacing the battery, or the date, time, and trend data will

be lost.

LED STATUS

Power

Lights when power is being supplied to the controller. The UPC Open controller is protected by internal solid-state polyswitches on

the incoming power and network connections. These polyswitches are not replaceable and will reset themselves if the condition

that caused the fault returns to normal.

Rx Lights when the controller receives data from the network segment; there is an Rx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Tx Lights when the controller transmits data to the network segment; there is a Tx LED for Ports 1 and 2.

Run Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

Error Lights based on controller status. See Table F.

RUN LED ERROR LED STATUS

2 flashes per second Off Normal

2 flashes per second 2 flashes, alternating with Run LED Five minute auto-restart delay after system error

2 flashes per second 3 flashes, then off Controller has just been formatted

2 flashes per second 1 flash per second Controller is alone on the network

2 flashes per second On Exec halted after frequent system errors or control programs halted

5 flashes per second On Exec start-up aborted, Boot is running

5 flashes per second Off Firmware transfer in progress, Boot is running

7 flashes per second 7 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Ten second recovery period after brownout

14 flashes per second 14 flashes per second, alternating with Run LED Brownout

136

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Active Demand Limit Val DEM_LIM R/W % N/A 0-100 AV:1 dem_lim_1

Air Cond Entering Valv A hr_ea_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:4 hr_ea_a_1

Air Cond Entering Valv B hr_ea_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:5 hr_ea_b_1

Air Cond Leaving Valve A hr_la_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:6 hr_la_a_1

Air Cond Leaving Valve B hr_la_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:7 hr_la_b_1

Alarm Relay Status ALARMOUT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:8 alarmout_1

Alarm State ALM R N/A N/A

0=Normal,

1=Partial,

2=Shutdown

AV:2 alm_1

Alert Relay Status ALERT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:9 alert_1

Auto Changeover Active Mode_12 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:10 mode_12_1

Boiler Active Mode_17 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:11 mode_17_1

Boiler Command BOILER R N/A N/A On/Off BV:12 boiler_1

CCN Chiller Start/Stop CHIL_S_S R/W N/A N/A Enable/Disable BV:1500 chil_s_s_1

Chiller Capacity Signal CAPT_010 R volts N/A ±nn.n AV:3 capt_010_1

Chiller Occupied? CHIL_OCC R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:1501 chil_occ_1

CHWS Temperature - Prime Variable CHWSTEMP R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:1612 chwstemp_1

Cir A Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_a1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:13 cp_a1_ht_1

Cir A Compressor 1 Output CP_A1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:14 cp_a1_1

Cir A Compressor 2 Heater Out cp_a2_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:15 cp_a2_ht_1

Cir A Compressor 2 Output CP_A2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:16 cp_a2_1

Cir A Compressor 3 Heater Out cp_a3_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:17 cp_a3_ht_1

Cir A Compressor 3 Output CP_A3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:18 cp_a3_1

Cir A Compressor 4 Heater Out cp_a4_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:19 cp_a4_ht_1

Cir A Compressor 4 Output CP_A4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:20 cp_a4_1

Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpa1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:4 cpa1_cur_1

Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp2 cpa2_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:5 cpa2_cur_1

Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp3 cpa3_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:6 cpa3_cur_1

Cir A Crank Heater Current Cp4 cpa4_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:7 cpa4_cur_1

Cir A Discharge Pressure DP_A R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1601 dp_a_1

Cir A EXV Position EXV_A R % N/A 0-100 AV:8 exv_a_1

Cir A Fan Output DO # 1 fan_a1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:21 fan_a1_1

Cir A Fan Output DO # 2 fan_a2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:22 fan_a2_1

Cir A Fan Output DO # 3 fan_a3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:23 fan_a3_1

Cir A Fan Output DO # 4 fan_a4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:24 fan_a4_1

Cir A Fan Output DO # 5 fan_a5 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:25 fan_a5_1

Cir A Fan Output DO # 6 fan_a6 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:26 fan_a6_1

Cir A Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_A R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:9 fan_st_a_1

Cir A Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_a R % N/A 0-100 AV:10 hd_pos_a_1

Cir A Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_A R N/A N/A On/Off BV:27 hgbp_v_a_1

Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpa1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:11 cpa1_tmp_1

Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 2 cpa2_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:12 cpa2_tmp_1

Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 3 cpa3_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:13 cpa3_tmp_1

Cir A Motor Thermistor Comp 4 cpa4_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:14 cpa4_tmp_1

Cir A Percent Total Capacity CAPA_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:15 capa_t_1

Cir A Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_A R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:1602 sct_a_1

Cir A Saturated Suction Temp SST_A R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:1603 sst_a_1

Cir A Suction Gas Temperature SUCT_T_A R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:16 suct_t_a_1

Cir A Suction Pressure SP_A R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:1600 sp_a_1

Cir A Suction Superheat Temp SH_A R ^F N/A ±nnn.n AV:17 sh_a_1

Cir B Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_b1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:28 cp_b1_ht_1

Cir B Compressor 1 Output CP_B1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:29 cp_b1_1

Cir B Compressor 2 Heater Out cp_b2_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:30 cp_b2_ht_1

Cir B Compressor 2 Output CP_B2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:31 cp_b2_1

Cir B Compressor 3 Heater Out cp_b3_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:32 cp_b3_ht_1

Cir B Compressor 3 Output CP_B3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:33 cp_b3_1

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature R—Read

DO — Discrete Output W—Write

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

137

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Cir B Compressor 4 Heater Out cp_b4_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:34 cp_b4_ht_1

Cir B Compressor 4 Output CP_B4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:35 cp_b4_1

Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpb1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:18 cpb1_cur_1

Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp2 cpb2_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:19 cpb2_cur_1

Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp3 cpb3_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:20 cpb3_cur_1

Cir B Crank Heater Current Cp4 cpb4_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:21 cpb4_cur_1

Cir B Discharge Pressure DP_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1605 dp_b_1

Cir B EXV Position EXV_B R % N/A 0-100 AV:22 exv_b_1

Cir B Fan Output DO # 1 fan_b1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:36 fan_b1_1

Cir B Fan Output DO # 2 fan_b2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:37 fan_b2_1

Cir B Fan Output DO # 3 fan_b3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:38 fan_b3_1

Cir B Fan Output DO # 4 fan_b4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:39 fan_b4_1

Cir B Fan Output DO # 5 fan_b5 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:40 fan_b5_1

Cir B Fan Output DO # 6 fan_b6 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:41 fan_b6_1

Cir B Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_B R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:23 fan_st_b_1

Cir B Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_b R % N/A 0-100 AV:24 hd_pos_b_1

Cir B Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_B R N/A N/A On/Off BV:42 hgbp_v_b_1

Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpb1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:25 cpb1_tmp_1

Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 2 cpb2_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:26 cpb2_tmp_1

Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 3 cpb3_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:27 cpb3_tmp_1

Cir B Motor Thermistor Comp 4 cpb4_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:28 cpb4_tmp_1

Cir B Percent Total Capacity CAPB_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:29 capb_t_1

Cir B Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_B R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:30 sct_b_1

Cir B Saturated Suction Temp SST_B R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:31 sst_b_1

Cir B Suction Gas Temperature UCT_T_B R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:32 suct_t_b_1

Cir B Suction Pressure SP_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:33 sp_b_1

Cir B Suction Superheat Temp SH_B R psi N/A nnn.n AV:34 sh_b_1

Cir C Compressor 1 Heater Out cp_c1_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:43 cp_c1_ht_1

Cir C Compressor 1 Output CP_C1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:44 cp_c1_1

Cir C Compressor 2 Heater Out cp_c2_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:45 cp_c2_ht_1

Cir C Compressor 2 Output CP_C2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:46 cp_c2_1

Cir C Compressor 3 Heater Out cp_c3_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:47 cp_c3_ht_1

Cir C Compressor 3 Output CP_C3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:48 cp_c3_1

Cir C Compressor 4 Heater Out cp_c4_ht R N/A N/A On/Off BV:49 cp_c4_ht_1

Cir C Compressor 4 Output CP_C4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:50 cp_c4_1

Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp1 cpc1_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:35 cpc1_cur_1

Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp2 cpc2_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:36 cpc2_cur_1

Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp3 cpc3_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:37 cpc3_cur_1

Cir C Crank Heater Current Cp4 cpc4_cur R amps N/A nnn.n AV:38 cpc4_cur_1

Cir C Discharge Pressure DP_C R psi N/A nnn.n AV:1609 dp_c_1

Cir C EXV Position EXV_C R % N/A 0-100 AV:39 exv_c_1

Cir C Fan Output DO # 1 fan_c1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:51 fan_c1_1

Cir C Fan Output DO # 2 fan_c2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:52 fan_c2_1

Cir C Fan Output DO # 3 fan_c3 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:53 fan_c3_1

Cir C Fan Output DO # 4 fan_c4 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:54 fan_c4_1

Cir C Fan Output DO # 5 fan_c5 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:55 fan_c5_1

Cir C Fan Output DO # 6 fan_c6 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:56 fan_c6_1

Cir C Fan Staging Number FAN_ST_C R N/A N/A 0-6 AV:40 fan_st_c_1

Cir C Head Press Actuator Pos hd_pos_c R % N/A 0-100 AV:41 hd_pos_c_1

Cir C Hot Gas Bypass Output HGBP_V_C R N/A N/A On/Off BV:57 hgbp_v_c_1

Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 1 cpc1_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:42 cpc1_tmp_1

Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 2 cpc2_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:43 cpc2_tmp_1

Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 3 cpc3_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:44 cpc3_tmp_1

Cir C Motor Thermistor Comp 4 cpc4_tmp R ohms N/A nnnn AV:45 cpc4_tmp_1

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature R—Read

DO — Discrete Output W—Write

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

138

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Cir C Percent Total Capacity CAPC_T R % N/A 0-100 AV:46 capc_t_1

Cir C Saturated Condensing Tmp SCT_C R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:47 sct_c_1

Cir C Saturated Suction Temp SST_C R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:48 sst_c_1

Cir C Suction Gas Temperature SUCT_T_C R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:49 suct_t_c_1

Cir C Suction Pressure SP_C R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:50 sp_c_1

Cir C Suction Superheat Temp SH_C R ^F N/A ±nnn.n AV:51 sh_c_1

Circuit A Fan #1 Hours hr_fana1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:52 hr_fana1_1

Circuit A Fan #2 Hours hr_fana2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:53 hr_fana2_1

Circuit A Fan #3 Hours hr_fana3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:54 hr_fana3_1

Circuit A Fan #4 Hours hr_fana4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:55 hr_fana4_1

Circuit A Fan #5 Hours hr_fana5 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:56 hr_fana5_1

Circuit A Fan #6 Hours hr_fana6 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:57 hr_fana6_1

Circuit B Fan #1 Hours hr_fanb1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:58 hr_fanb1_1

Circuit B Fan #2 Hours hr_fanb2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:59 hr_fanb2_1

Circuit B Fan #3 Hours hr_fanb3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:60 hr_fanb3_1

Circuit B Fan #4 Hours hr_fanb4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:61 hr_fanb4_1

Circuit B Fan #5 Hours hr_fanb5 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:62 hr_fanb5_1

Circuit B Fan #6 Hours hr_fanb6 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:63 hr_fanb6_1

Circuit C Fan #1 Hours hr_fanc1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:64 hr_fanc1_1

Circuit C Fan #2 Hours hr_fanc2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:65 hr_fanc2_1

Circuit C Fan #3 Hours hr_fanc3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:66 hr_fanc3_1

Circuit C Fan #4 Hours hr_fanc4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:67 hr_fanc4_1

Circuit C Fan #5 Hours hr_fanc5 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:68 hr_fanc5_1

Circuit C Fan #6 Hours hr_fanc6 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:69 hr_fanc6_1

Circuit Loading Sequence lead_cir R/W N/A 0

0=Auto

1=A Lead

2=B Lead

3=C Lead

AV:70 lead_cir_1

Compressor A1 Hours HR_CP_A1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:71 hr_cp_a1_1

Compressor A1 Starts st_cp_a1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:72 st_cp_a1_1

Compressor A2 Hours HR_CP_A2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:73 hr_cp_a2_1

Compressor A2 Starts st_cp_a2 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:74 st_cp_a2_1

Compressor A3 Hours HR_CP_A3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:75 hr_cp_a3_1

Compressor A3 Starts st_cp_a3 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:76 st_cp_a3_1

Compressor A4 Hours HR_CP_A4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:77 hr_cp_a4_1

Compressor A4 Starts st_cp_a4 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:78 st_cp_a4_1

Compressor B1 Hours HR_CP_B1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:79 hr_cp_b1_1

Compressor B1 Starts st_cp_b1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:80 st_cp_b1_1

Compressor B2 Hours HR_CP_B2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:81 hr_cp_b2_1

Compressor B2 Starts st_cp_b2 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:82 st_cp_b2_1

Compressor B3 Hours HR_CP_B3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:83 hr_cp_b3_1

Compressor B3 Starts st_cp_b3 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:84 st_cp_b3_1

Compressor B4 Hours HR_CP_B4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:85 hr_cp_b4_1

Compressor B4 Starts st_cp_b4 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:86 st_cp_b4_1

Compressor C1 Hours HR_CP_C1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:87 hr_cp_c1_1

Compressor C1 Starts st_cp_c1 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:88 st_cp_c1_1

Compressor C2 Hours HR_CP_C2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:89 hr_cp_c2_1

Compressor C2 Starts st_cp_c2 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:90 st_cp_c2_1

Compressor C3 Hours HR_CP_C3 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:91 hr_cp_c3_1

Compressor C3 Starts st_cp_c3 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:92 st_cp_c3_1

Compressor C4 Hours HR_CP_C4 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:93 hr_cp_c4_1

Compressor C4 Starts st_cp_c4 R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:94 st_cp_c4_1

Control Point CTRL_PNT R/W °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:96 ctrl_pnt_1

Controlled Water Temp CTRL_WT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:95 ctrl_wt_1

Cooler Fluid Type flui_typ R N/A 1

1=Water,

2=Brine

3=Low Brine

AV:97 flui_typ_1

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature R—Read

DO — Discrete Output W—Write

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

139

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Cooler Heater Active Mode_06 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:58 mode_06_1

Cooler Heater Command COOLHEAT R N/A N/A On/Off BV:59 coolheat_1

Cooler Pumps Rotation Mode_07 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:60 mode_07_1

Cooler Pumps Sequence pump_seq R/W N/A 0

0=No pump,

1=1 pump

only,

2=2 pumps

auto,

3=Pump 1

manual,

4=Pump 2

manual

AV:98 pump_seq_1

Cooling Ice Setpoint ice_sp R/W ^F 1 -20-+32 AV:99 ice_sp_1

Cooling Ramp Loading cramp_sp R/W ^F 0 0.2-2.0 AV:100 cramp_sp_1

Cooling Reset Deg. Value cr_deg R/W °F 44 -30 -+30 AV:101 cr_deg_1

Cooling Setpoint 1 csp1 R/W °F 44 -20.0-+78.8 AV:102 csp1_1

Cooling Setpoint 2 csp2 R/W min N/A -20.0-+78.8 AV:103 csp2_1

Critical Alarm Status CRITICAL R N/A N/A On/Off BV:61 critical_1

Current Full Reset Value v_cr_fu R/W ma 0 0-20 AV:104 v_cr_fu_1

Current No Reset Value v_cr_no R/W ma 0 0-20 AV:105 v_cr_no_1

Current Setpoint SP R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:3500 chws_sp_1

Defrost Active On Cir A Mode_19 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:62 mode_19_1

Defrost Active On Cir B Mode_20 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:63 mode_20_1

Delta T Full Reset Value dt_cr_fu R/W ^F 0 0-25 AV:106 dt_cr_fu_1

Delta T No Reset Value dt_cr_no R/W ^F 0 0-25 AV:107 dt_cr_no_1

Demand Limit Active Mode_04 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:64 mode_04_1

Demand Limit Type Select lim_sel R/W N/A 0

0=None,

1=Switch

control,

2=4-20mA

Control

AV:108 lim_sel_1

Electric Heat Active Mode_15 R N/A N/A 0-4/Off BV:67 mode_15_1

Electrical Box Safety ELEC_BOX R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:65 elec_box_1

Electrical Heat Stage EHS_STEP R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:66 ehs_step_1

Element Comm Status R N/A N/A BV:2999 element_stat_1

Emergency Stop EMSTOP R/W N/A N/A Enable/Disable BV:68 emstop_1

Equipment Alarm R N/A N/A BV:146 element_alarm_1

External Temperature OAT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:109 oat_1

Flow Checked if Pump Off pump_loc R/W N/A Yes Yes/No BV:69 pump_loc_1

Free Cooling Active Mode_13 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:70 mode_13_1

Free Cooling Disable Sw. FC_SW R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:72 fc_sw_1

Free Cooling Disable? FC_DSBLE R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:71 fc_dsble_1

Heat Reclaim Pump Hours hr_hpump R hours N/A nnnnn AV:112 hr_hpump_1

Heat Reclaim Select RECL_SEL R/W N/A N/A Yes/No BV:74 recl_sel_1

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature R—Read

DO — Discrete Output W—Write

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

140

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G— Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Heat/Cool Select HC_SEL R/W N/A N/A

0=Cool,

1=Heat,

2=Auto

AV:110 hc_sel_1

Heat/Cool Status HEATCOOL R N/A N/A

0=Cool,

1=Heat

2=Stand-by,

3=Both

AV:111 heatcool_1

Heating Low EWT Lockout Mode_16 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:73 mode_16_1

High DGT Circuit A Mode_24 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:75 mode_24_1

High DGT Circuit B Mode_25 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:76 mode_25_1

High DGT Circuit C Mode_26 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:77 mode_26_1

High Pres Override Cir A Mode_27 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:78 mode_27_1

High Pres Override Cir B Mode_28 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:79 mode_28_1

High Pres Override Cir C Mode_29 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:80 mode_29_1

Ice Done Storage Switch ICE_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:81 ice_sw_1

Ice Mode in Effect Mode_18 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:82 mode_18_1

Interlock Status LOCK_1 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:83 lock_1_1

Lag Capacity Limit Value LAG_LIM R % N/A nnn AV:113 lag_lim_1

Limit 4-20mA Signal LIM_ANAL R ma N/A ±nn.n AV:114 lim_anal_1

Limit Switch 1 Status LIM_SW1 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:84 lim_sw1_1

Limit Switch 2 Status LIM_SW2 R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:85 lim_sw2_1

Local Schedule R N/A N/A BV:2 schedule_1

Low Suction Circuit A Mode_21 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:86 mode_21_1

Low Suction Circuit B Mode_22 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:87 mode_22_1

Low Suction Circuit C Mode_23 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:88 mode_23_1

mA For 0% Demand Limit lim_ze R/W mA 0 0-20 AV:117 lim_ze_1

mA For 100% Demand Limit lim_mx R/W mA 0 0-20 AV:118 lim_mx_1

Machine Operating Hours HR_MACH R hours N/A nnnnn AV:115 hr_mach_1

Machine Starts Number st_mach R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:116 st_mach_1

Master/Slave Select ms_sel R/W N/A 0

0= Disable,

1=Master,

2=Slave

AV:119 ms_sel_1

Minutes Left for Start min_left R min N/A 0-15 AV:120 min_left_1

Night Low Noise Active Mode_09 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:89 mode_09_1

OAT Full Reset Value oatcr_fu R/W °F 14 14-125 AV:121 oatcr_fu_1

OAT No Reset Value oatcr_no R/W °F 0 0-25 AV:122 oatcr_no_1

Occupied Override Switch OCC_OVSW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:90 occ_ovsw_1

On/Off - Remote Switch ONOFF_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:91 onoff_sw_1

Optional Space Temp SPACETMP R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:123 spacetmp_1

Pass For All User Config all_pass R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:92 all_pass_1

Percent Total Capacity CAP_T R % N/A nnn AV:1700 cap_t_1

Pump Auto Rotation Delay pump_del R/W hours 48 24-3000 AV:124 pump_del_1

Pump Periodic Start Mode_08 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:93 mode_08_1

Pump Run Status PUMP_DEF R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:94 pump_def_1

Pump Sticking Protection pump_per R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:95 pump_per_1

Pumpdown Pressure Cir A PD_P_A R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:125 pd_p_a_1

Pumpdown Pressure Cir B PD_P_B R psi N/A ±nnn.n AV:126 pd_p_b_1

Pumpdown Saturated Tmp A hr_sat_a R °F N/A n AV:127 hr_sat_a_1

Pumpdown Saturated Tmp B hr_sat_b R °F N/A n AV:128 hr_sat_b_1

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature R—Read

DO — Discrete Output W—Write

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

141

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Ramp Loading Active Mode_05 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:96 mode_05_1

Ramp Loading Select ramp_sel R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:97 ramp_sel_1

Ready or Running Status READY R N/A N/A On/Off BV:98 ready_1

Reclaim Active Mode_14 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:99 mode_14_1

Reclaim Condenser Flow condflow R N/A N/A On/Off BV:100 condflow_1

Reclaim Condenser Heater cond_htr R N/A N/A On/Off BV:101 cond_htr_1

Reclaim Condenser Pump CONDPUMP R N/A N/A On/Off BV:102 condpump_1

Reclaim Condenser Pump COND_PMP R N/A N/A On/Off BV:103 cond_pmp_1

Reclaim Deadband hr_deadb R/W ^F 9.0 5-27 AV:129 hr_deadb_1

Reclaim Entering Fluid HR_EWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:130 hr_ewt_1

Reclaim Leaving Fluid HR_LWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:131 hr_lwt_1

Reclaim Setpoint rsp R/W °F 122 95-122 AV:132 rsp_1

Reclaim Status Circuit A hrstat_a R N/A N/A n AV:133 hrstat_a_1

Reclaim Status Circuit B hrstat_b R N/A N/A n AV:134 hrstat_b_1

Reclaim Valve Position hr_v_pos R % N/A ±nnn.n AV:135 hr_v_pos_1

Remote Heat/Cool Switch HC_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:104 hc_sw_1

Remote Interlock Status REM_LOCK R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:105 rem_lock_1

Remote Reclaim Switch RECL_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:106 recl_sw_1

Remote Setpoint Switch SETP_SW R N/A N/A Open/Close BV:107 setp_sw_1

Reset in Effect Mode_03 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:108 mode_03_1

Reset/Setpoint 4-20mA In SP_RESET R ma N/A ±nn.n AV:136 sp_reset_1

Rotate Pumps Now? ROT_PUMP R/W N/A N/A Yes/No BV:109 rot_pump_1

Run Status STATUS R N/A N/A

0=Off,

1=Running

2=Stopping,

3= Delay

4=Tripout,

5=Ready

6=Override,

7=Defrost

8=Run Test,

9=Test

AV:137 status_1

Running Status RUNNING R N/A N/A On/Off BV:110 running_1

Second Setpoint in Use Mode_02 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:111 mode_02_1

Setpoint Occupied? SP_OCC R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:112 sp_occ_1

Shutdown Indicator State SHUTDOWN R N/A N/A On/Off BV:113 shutdown_1

Space T Full Reset Value spacr_fu R °F 14 14-125 AV:138 spacr_fu_1

Space T No Reset Value spacr_no R °F 14 14-125 AV:139 spacr_no_1

Staged Loading Sequence seq_typ R/W N/A No No/Yes BV:114 seq_typ_1

Starts Max During 1 Hour st_cp_mx R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:141 st_cp_mx_1

Starts/hr From Last 24 h st_cp_av R N/A N/A nnnnn AV:140 st_cp_av_1

Startup Delay in Effect Mode_01 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:115 mode_01_1

Sub Condenser Temp Cir A hr_subta R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:142 hr_subta_1

Sub Condenser Temp Cir B hr_subtb R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:143 hr_subtb_1

Subcooling Temperature A hr_subca R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:144 hr_subca_1

Subcooling Temperature B hr_subcb R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:145 hr_subcb_1

Superheat Override Cir A Mode_30 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:116 mode_30_1

Superheat Override Cir B Mode_31 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:117 mode_31_1

Superheat Override Cir C Mode_32 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:118 mode_32_1

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature R—Read

DO — Discrete Output W—Write

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

142

APPENDIX F — BACNET COMMUNICATION OPTION (cont)

Table G — Network Points List (cont)

LEGEND

POINT DESCRIPTION

CCN POINT

NAME

READ/

WRITE

UNITS

DEFAULT

VALUE

RANGE

BACNET

OBJECT ID

BACNET

OBJECT NAME

Switch Limit Setpoint 1 lim_sp1 R/W % 100 0-100 AV:146 lim_sp1_1

Switch Limit Setpoint 2 lim_sp2 R/W % 100 0-100 AV:147 lim_sp2_1

Switch Limit Setpoint 3 lim_sp3 R/W % 100 0-100 AV:148 lim_sp3_1

System Cooling Demand Level R N/A N/A AV:9006 cool_demand_level_1

System Demand Limiting R N/A N/A BV:3 dem_lmt_act_1

System Manager Active Mode_10 R N/A N/A Yes/No BV:119 mode_10_1

System OAT Master R N/A N/A AV:80001 mstr_oa_temp_1

Unit Off to On Delay off_on_d R/W min 1 1-15 AV:149 off_on_d_1

User Defined Analog 1 R N/A N/A AV:2901 user_analog_1_1

User Defined Analog 2 R N/A N/A AV:2902 user_analog_2_1

User Defined Analog 3 R N/A N/A AV:2903 user_analog_3_1

User Defined Analog 4 R N/A N/A AV:2904 user_analog_4_1

User Defined Analog 5 R N/A N/A AV:2905 user_analog_5_1

User Defined Binary 1 R N/A N/A BV:2911 user_binary_1_1

User Defined Binary 2 R N/A N/A BV:2912 user_binary_2_1

User Defined Binary 3 R N/A N/A BV:2913 user_binary_3_1

User Defined Binary 4 R N/A N/A BV:2914 user_binary_4_1

User Defined Binary 5 R N/A N/A BV:2915 user_binary_5_1

Water Cond Enter Valve A hr_ew_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:120 hr_ew_a_1

Water Cond Enter Valve B hr_ew_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:121 hr_ew_b_1

Water Cond Leaving Val A hr_lw_a R N/A N/A On/Off BV:122 hr_lw_a_1

Water Cond Leaving Val B hr_lw_b R N/A N/A On/Off BV:123 hr_lw_b_1

Water Exchanger Entering Temp EWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:150 ewt_1

Water Exchanger Leaving Temp LWT R °F N/A ±nnn.n AV:151 lwt_1

Water Pump #1 Command CPUMP_1 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:124 cpump_1_1

Water Pump #1 Hours hr_cpum1 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:152 hr_cpum1_1

Water Pump #2 Command CPUMP_2 R N/A N/A On/Off BV:125 cpump_2_1

Water Pump #2 Hours hr_cpum2 R hours N/A nnnnn AV:153 hr_cpum2_1

CCN — Carrier Comfort Network EXV — Electronic Expansion Valve

CHWS — Chilled Water Setpoint OAT — Outdoor Air Temperature

DGT — Discharge Gas Temperature R—Read

DO — Discrete Output W—Write

EWT — Entering Water Temperature

143

APPENDIXG—SIEMENS OR SCHNEIDER LOW AMBIENT DRIVES

LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE HEAD PRESSURE

CONTROL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS — The

30RB low ambient control is a variable frequency drive (VFD)

that varies the speed of the lead condenser fan in each circuit to

maintain the calculated head pressure control set point. The fan

speed varies in proportion to the 0 to 10 vdc analog signal pro-

duced by the AUX1 fan board. The display indicates motor

speed in Hz by default. These units may use a Siemens Micro-

master 420/440 VFD or a Schneider Altivar 21 and 212. The

Schneider Altivar VFD performs the same functions as

Siemens drive. However, there are different control wiring

connections and parameter programming.

Siemens VFD Operation — The low ambient temperature

head pressure controller is pre-configured to operate from a

0 to 10 vdc analog input signal present on terminals 3 (AIN+)

and 4 (AIN–). Jumpers between terminals 2 and 4 and termi-

nals 5 and 8 are required for proper operation. The drive is en-

abled based on an increase in the analog input signal above

0 vdc. Output is varied from 0 Hz to 60 Hz as the analog signal

increases from 0 vdc to 10 vdc. When the signal is at 0 vdc the

drive holds the fan at 0 rpm. The head pressure control set point

is not adjustable. The MBB determines the control set point as

required.

Siemens VFD Replacement — If the controller is replaced

the parameters in Table H must be configured. See Fig. G and

Table H — Siemens VFD Head Pressure Control

Parameters

*Remove jumper from terminals 5 and 8 (or terminals 5 and 9 for

575-v units) before configuring parameter. Reinstall jumper after

configuration is complete.

DIP switch settings:

DIP switch 1 is not used.

DIP switch 2 is the motor frequency. (OFF = 50 Hz,

ON = 60 Hz)

Siemens VFD Programming — Parameter values can be al-

tered via the operator panel. The operator panel features a five-

digit, seven-segment display for displaying parameter numbers

and values, alarm and fault messages, set points, and actual val-

ues. See Fig. I. See Table I for additional information on the

operator panel.

NOTE: The operator panel motor control functions are dis-

abled by default. To control the motor via the operator panel,

parameter P0700 should be set to 1 and P1000 set to 1. The

operator panel can be fitted to and removed from the drive

while power is applied. If the operator panel has been set as the

I/O control (P0700 = 1), the drive will stop if the operator

panel is removed.

Changing Single Digits in Parameter Values with the Sie-

mens VFD Operator Panel — For changing the parameters

value rapidly, the single digits of the display can be changed by

performing the following actions:

1. Press (parameter button) to enter the parameter val-

ue changing level.

2. Press (function button), which causes the farthest

right digit to blink.

PARAMETER* VALUE DESCRIPTION

P0010 1 Enter Quick Commissioning

P0311 1140 Rated Motor Speed

P3900 1 End of Quick Commissioning

P0003 3 User Access Level

P0757 0.50 Control Signal Scaling Offset

P0761 0.50 Control Signal Scaling Offset

P1210 6 Automatic Restart Setting

P1310 10 Continuous Boost Parameter

Fig. G — Low Ambient Temperature Control

Power Wiring

TO CONDENSER

FAN MOTOR

DIN1

DIN2 DIN3

24V+

AOUT+ AOUT- P+

N-

12 13 14 15

DIP SWITCH 2

RLB

RLC

10 11

10V+ 0V AIN+ AIN-

–

0-10 VDC FROM FAN BOARD

ENABLE

JUMPER

ig. H — Low Ambient Temperature Control Signal

Wiring

NOTE: For 575-v units, jumper terminals are 5 and 9.

Fig. I — Siemens VFD Low Ambient

Temperature Controller

144

3. Change the value of this digit by pressing or .

4. Pressing (function button) again to cause the next

digit to blink.

5. Perform steps 2 to 4 until the required value is displayed.

6. Press (parameter button) to exit the parameter value

changing level.

NOTE: The function button may also be used to acknowledge

a fault condition.

Quick Commissioning with the Siemens VFD Operator

Panel (P0010=1) — It is important that parameter P0010 is

used for commissioning and P0003 is used to select the num-

ber of parameters to be accessed. The P0010 parameter allows

a group of parameters to be selected that will enable quick

commissioning. Parameters such as motor settings and ramp

settings are included. At the end of the quick commissioning

sequences, P3900 should be selected, which, when set to 1,

will carry out the necessary motor calculations and clear all

other parameters (not included in P0010=1 to the default set-

tings. This will only occur in Quick Commissioning mode. See

Fig. J.

Reset the Siemens VFD to Factory Default — To reset all

parameters to the factory default settings, the following param-

eters should be set as follows:

1. Set P0010=30.

2. Set P0970 =1.

NOTE: The reset process can take up to 3 minutes to complete.

Troubleshooting the Siemens VFD with the Operating Panel

— Warnings and faults are displayed on the operating panel

with Axxx and Fxxx. The individual messages are shown in

Table J.

If the motor fails to start, check the following:

• Power is present on T1, T2 and T3.

• Configuration jumpers are in place.

• Control signal between 1 vdc and 10 vdc is present on

terminals 3 and 4.

• P0010 = 0.

• P0700 = 2.

Siemens VFD Fault Messages (Tables J and K) — In the

event of a failure, the drive switches off and a fault code ap-

pears on the display.

NOTE: To reset the fault code, one of the following methods

can be used:

1. Cycle the power to the drive.

2. Press the button on the operator panel.

Table I — Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Operator Panel

PANEL/BUTTON FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

Indicates Status The LCD displays the settings currently used by the converter.

Start Converter The Start Converter button is disabled by default. To enable this button set P0700 = 1.

Stop Converter Press the Stop Converter button to cause the motor to come to a standstill at the selected

ramp down rate. Disabled by default, to enable set P0700 = 1.

Press the Stop Converter button twice (or hold) to cause the motor to coast to a standstill.

This function is always enabled.

Change Direction Press the Change Direction button to change the direction of rotation of the motor.

Reverse is indicated by a minus (–) sign or a flashing decimal point. Disabled by default, to

enable set P0700 = 1.

Jog Motor Press the Jog Motor button while the inverter has no output to cause the motor to start and

run at the preset jog frequency. The motor stops when the button is released. The Jog

Motor button is not enabled when the motor is running.

Functions Use the Functions button to view additional information. Press and hold the button to dis-

play the following information starting from any parameter during operation:

1. DC link voltage (indicated by d – units V).

2. Output current. (A)

3. Output frequency (Hz)

4. Output voltage (indicated by o – units V).

5. The value selected in P0005 (If P0005 is set to show any of the above [3, 4, or 5] then

this will not be shown when toggling through the menu).

Press the Functions button repeatedly to toggle through displayed values.

Jump Function

Press of the Fn button from any parameter (rXXXX or PXXXX) to immediately jump to

R0000, when another parameter can be changed, if required. Return to R0000 and press

the Functions again to return.

Access Parameters Allows access to the parameters.

Increase Value Press the Increase Value button to increase the displayed value. To change the Frequency

Setpoint using the operator panel set P1000 = 1.

Decrease Value Press the Decrease Value button to decrease the displayed value. To change the

Frequency Setpoint using the operating panel set P1000 = 1.

jog

145

P0010 Start Quick Commissioning

0 Ready to Run

1 Quick Commissioning

30 Factory Setting

NOTE: P0010 must always be set back to ‘0’ before operating

the motor. However if P3900 = 1 is set after commissioning this

is done automatically.

P0100 Operation

0 Power in kW; f default 50 Hz

1 Power in hp; f default 60 Hz

2 Power in kW; f default 60 Hz

NOTE: Settings 0 and 1 should be changed using the DIP

switches to allow permanent setting.

P0304 Rated Motor Voltage*

10 V — 2000 V

Nominal motor voltage (V) from rating plate

P0305 Rated Motor Current*

0—2xinverter rated current (A)

Nominal motor current (A) from rating plate

P0307 Rated Motor Power*

0 kW — 2000 kW

Nominal motor power (kW) from rating plate.

If P0100 = 1, values will be in hp

P0310 Rated Motor Frequency*

12 Hz — 650 Hz

Nominal motor frequency (Hz) from rating plate

P0311 Rated Motor Speed*

0 — 4000 1/min

Nominal motor speed (rpm) from rating plate

P0700 Selection of Command Source

(on/off/reverse)

0 Factory Setting

1 Basic Operator Panel

2 Terminal/Digital Inputs (default)

P1000 Selection of Frequency Setpoint

0 No frequency setpoint

1 Operator panel frequency control 

2 Analog Setpoint (default)

P1080 Min. Motor Frequency

Sets minimum motor frequency (0-650Hz) at which the motor

will run independent of the frequency setpoint. The value set

here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.

P1082 Max. Motor Frequency

Sets maximum motor frequency (0-650Hz) at which the motor

will run at independent of the frequency setpoint. The value set

here is valid for both clockwise and counterclockwise rotation.

P1120 Ramp-Up Time

0 s - 650 s

Time taken for the motor to accelerate from standstill up to

maximum motor frequency.

P1121 Ramp-Down Time

0 s - 650 s

Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor

frequency down to a standstill.

P3900 End Quick Commissioning

0 End Quick Commissioning without motor calculation or

factory reset.

1 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation and

factory reset (Recommended)

2 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation and with

I/O reset

3 End Quick Commissioning with motor calculation but

without I/O reset

*Motor-specific parameters — see motor rating plate.

NOTE: Shaded boxes are for reference only.

Fig. J — Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Flow Chart Quick Commissioning

146

Table J — Siemens VFD Low Ambient Temperature Controller Fault Messages

LEGEND

t—Current Squared Time

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSES TROUBLESHOOTING

F0001

Overcurrent

• Motor power does not correspond to the

inverter power

• Motor lead short circuit

• Ground fault

Check the following:

1. Motor power (P0307) must correspond to inverter power (P0206)

2. Motor cable and motor must have no short-circuits or ground faults

3. Motor parameters must match the motor in use

4. Motor must not be obstructed or overloaded

After Steps 1-4 have been checked, increase the ramp time (P1120) and reduce the

boost level (P1310, P1311, P1312).

F0002

Overvoltage

• DC-link voltage (r0026) exceeds trip level

(P2172)

• Overvoltage can be caused either by too high

main supply voltage or if motor is in regenera-

tive mode

• Regenerative mode can be caused by fast

ramp downs or if the motor is driven from an

active load

Check the following:

1. Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on rating plate

2. DC-link voltage controller must be enabled (P1240) and have parameters set

correctly

3. Ramp-down time (P1121) must match inertia of load

F0003

Undervoltage

• Main supply failed

• Shock load outside specified limits

Check the following:

1. Supply voltage (P0210) must lie within limits indicated on rating plate

2. Supply must not be susceptible to temporary failures or voltage reductions

F0004

Drive

Overtemperature

• Ambient temperature outside of limits

• Fan failure

Check the following:

1. Fan must turn when inverter is running

2. Pulse frequency must be set to default value

3. Air inlet and outlet points are not obstructed

4. Ambient temperature could be higher than specified for the drive.

F0005

Drive I

• Drive overloaded

• Duty cycle too demanding

• Motor power (P0307) exceeds drive power

capability (P0206)

Check the following:

1. Load duty cycle must lie within specified limits

2. Motor power (P0307) must match drive power (P0206)

F0011

Motor

Overtemperature I

• Motor overloaded

• Motor data incorrect

• Long time period operating at low speeds

1. Check motor data

2. Check loading on motor

3. Boost settings too high (P1310, P1311, P1312)

4. Check parameter for motor thermal time constant

5. Check parameter for motor I

t warning level

F0041

Stator Resistance

Measurement Failure

Stator resistance measurement failure 1. Check if the motor is connected to the drive

2. Check that the motor data has been entered correctly

F0051

Parameter EEPROM Fault

Reading or writing of the non-volatile parameter

storage has failed

1. Factory reset and new parameters set

2. Replace drive

F0052

Powerstack Fault

Reading of the powerstack information has

failed or the data is invalid

Replace drive

F0060

Asic Timeout

Internal communications failure 1. Acknowledge fault

2. Replace drive if repeated

F0070

Communications

Board Setpoint Error

No setpoint received from communications

board during telegram off time

1. Check connections to the communications board

2. Check the master

F0071

No Data for USS (RS232

Link) During

Telegram Off Time

No response during telegram off time via USS

(BOP link)

1. Check connections to the communications board

2. Check the master

F0072

No Data from USS (RS485

Link) During

Telegram Off Time

No response during telegram off time via USS

(COM link)

1. Check connections to the communications board

2. Check the master

F0080

Analog Input -

Lost Input Signal

• Broken wire

• Signal out of limits

Check connection to analog input

F0085

External Fault

External fault is triggered via terminal inputs Disable terminal input for fault trigger

F0101

Stack Overflow

Software error or processor failure 1. Run self test routines

2. Replace drive

F0221

PI Feedback

Below Minimum Value

PID Feedback below minimum value P2268 1. Change value of P2268

2. Adjust feedback gain

F0222

PI Feedback Above

Maximum Value

PID Feedback above maximum value P2267 1. Change value of P2267

2. Adjust feedback gain

F0450

(Service Mode Only)

BIST Tests Failure

Fault value

1 Some of the power section tests have failed

2 Some of the control board tests have failed

4 Some of the functional tests have failed

8 Some of the IO module tests have failed

16 The Internal RAM has failed its check on

power-up

1. Inverter may run but certain actions will not function correctly

2. Replace drive

147

Table K — Siemens VFD Alarm Messages

LEGEND

t—Current Squared Time

Schneider Altivar VFD Operation — The low ambient tem-

perature head pressure controller is pre-configured to operate

from a 0 to 10 vdc analog input signal present on terminals

VIA and CC. A jumper between terminals P24 and F is re-

quired for proper operation. The drive is enabled based on an

increase in the analog input signal above 0 vdc. Output is var-

ied from 0 Hz to 60 Hz as the analog signal increases from

0 vdc to 10 vdc. When the signal is at 0 vdc the drive holds the

fan at 0 rpm. The head pressure control set point is not adjust-

able. The MBB determines the control set point as required.

The operating panel is shown in Fig. K. Refer to the Quick

Start Guide for how to access the programming mode, or the

documentation available at http://www.schneider-electric.com

for a complete set of VFD parameters, fault codes and trouble-

shooting information.

Schneider Altivar VFD Replacement — For Altivar 212

VFDs, if the controller is replaced the parameters in Table E

must be configured. It is recommended that the configuration

of the VFD is verified per Table L prior to proceeding. Also,

the following must be wired (see Fig. G, H, and 36-43):

1. A jumper must be in place from terminal P24 to F.

2. Connect the red and black wires from fan board 0-10

VDC output to terminal VIA and CC respectively.

3. Connect the motor power wires T1, T2 and T3 respec-

tively to terminal U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 of the drive.

4. Connect the line power wires L1, L2 and L3 from control

box respectively to terminal R/L1, S/L2 and T/L3 of the

drive.

Table L — Schneider Altivar 212 VFD Operating Parameters

FAULT POSSIBLE CAUSES TROUBLESHOOTING

A0501

Current Limit

• Motor power does not correspond to the

drive power

• Motor leads are too short

• Ground fault

1. Check whether the motor power corresponds to the drive power

2. Check that the cable length limits have not been exceeded

3. Check motor cable and motor for short-circuits and ground faults

4. Check whether the motor parameters correspond with the motor being used

5. Check the stator resistance

6. Increase the ramp-up-time

7. Reduce the boost

8. Check whether the motor is obstructed or overloaded

A0502

Overvoltage Limit

• Mains supply too high

• Load regenerative

• Ramp-down time too short

1. Check that mains supply voltage is within allowable range

2. Increase ramp down times

NOTE: If the vdc-max controller is active, ramp-down times will be automatically

increased

A0503

Undervoltage Limit

• Mains supply too low

• Short mains interruption

Check main supply voltage (P0210)

A0504

Drive

Overtemperature

Warning level of inverter heat-sink temperature

(P0614) is exceeded, resulting in pulse fre-

quency reduction and/or output frequency

reduction depending on parameters set

(P0610)

1. Check if ambient temperature is within specified limits

2. Check load conditions and duty cycle

3. Check if fan is turning when drive is running

A0505

Drive I

Warning level is exceeded; current will be

reduced if parameters set (P0610 = 1)

Check if duty cycle is within specified limits

A0506

Drive Duty Cycle

Heatsink temperature and thermal junction

model are outside of allowable range

Check if duty cycle is within specified limits

A0511

Motor

Overtemperature I

Motor overloaded Check the following:

1. P0611 (motor I

t time constant) should be set to appropriate value

2. P0614 (Motor I

t overload warning level) should be set to suitable level

3. Are long periods of operation at low speed occurring

4. Check that boost settings are not too high

A0541

Motor Data

Identification Active

Motor data identification (P1910) selected or

running

Wait until motor identification is finished

A0600

RTOS Overrun Warning

Software error —

PARAMETER NAME VALUE

uLu Rated Motor Voltage Nominal motor voltage(V) from rating plate

F201 VIA Speed Reference Level 1 5

F202 VIA Output Frequency Level 1 0

F203 VIA Speed Reference Level 2 100

F204 VIA Output Frequency Level 2 60

F401 Slip compensation 60%

F415 Rated Motor Current Nominal motor current(A) from rating plate

F417 Rated Motor Speed Nominal motor speed(RPM) from rating plate

F701 Keypad display: % or A/V 1

tHr Motor Rated Current Overload Setting Nominal motor current(A) from rating plate

uL Rated Motor Frequency 60 Hz

FH Maximum Frequency 60 Hz

LL Low Speed 0 Hz

UL High Speed 60 Hz

ACC Ramp-up Time 10 Sec

dEC Ramp-down Time 10 Sec

cnod Remote Mode Start/Stop Control 0 (Control terminal logic inputs)

fnod

Remote Mode Primary Speed reference

Source

1 (VIA)

148

RUN

PRG

MON

MODE

Loc

Rem

ENT

RUN STOP

Fig. K — Schneider Altivar 212 VFD Display Panel

CALL

OUT

LED/KEY DESCRIPTION

Display

RUN LED

Illuminates when a run command is applied to the drive

controller. Flashes when a speed reference is present

with the run command.

Display

PRG LED

Illuminates when Programming mode is active. Flashes

when -GrU menus are active.

Display

MON LED

Illuminates when Monitoring mode is active. Flashes in

fault record display mode.

Display

Unit

4 digits, 7 segments

Display

Unit LED

The % LED illuminates when a displayed numeric

value is a percentage. The Hz LED illuminates when a

displayed numeric value is in hertz.

Up/Down

arrows

Depending on the mode, use the arrows to: navigate

between the menus, change a value, or change the

speed reference when Up/Down LED (7) is lit.

Up/Down

LED

Illuminates when the Up/Down arrows are controlling

the speed reference.

Loc/Rem

LED

Illuminates when Local mode is selected.

CALL

OUT

LED/KEY DESCRIPTION

MODE Press to select the Keypad mode. Modes are: Run

mode (default on power-up), Programming mode, and

Monitoring mode. Can also be used to go back to the

previous menu.

10 Loc/Rem Switches between Local and Remote modes.

ENT Press to display a parameter’s value or to save a

changed value.

12 RUN LED Illuminates when the Run key is enabled.

RUN Pressing this key when the RUN LED is illuminated

starts the drive controller.

STOP Stop/reset key. In Local mode, pressing the STOP key

causes the drive controller to stop based on the setting

of parameter F721. In Remote mode, pressing the

STOP key causes the drive controller to stop based on

the setting of parameter F603. The display will indicate

a flashing “E.” If F735 is set to 0 (default setting), press-

ing the stop key twice will reset all resettable faults if

the fault condition has been resolved.

149

INDEX

Actual start-up 43

Alarms and alerts 62

Alarm codes 63-69

Alarm descriptions 71, 122-125

BACnet communication option 131-142

Boards

Board addresses 17

Capacity control 21

Capacity control overrides 24

Compressor stages and circuit

cycling 22, 23

Compressor starts and run hours 21

CCN

ComfortLink CCN communication

wiring 17, 18

Interface 17

CCN alarm description 122-125

CCN control 30

CCN global schedule 30

CCN tables 107-121

Chilled water flow switch 57

Compressor protection 60

Compressors 61

Oil charge 61

Replacement 61

System burnout cleanup procedure 61

Condenser coils

Cleaning round tube plate fin coils 57

Cleaning MCHX coils 60

Condenser fans 60

Configuration point description conven-

tions 3

Configuration set point limits 31

Control methods 30

CCN control 31

CCN global schedule 30

Switch control 30

Time schedule 30

Unit run status 31

Controls 6-43

Board addresses 17

Capacity control 21

Carrier Comfort Network

interface 17

ComfortLink display menu structure 5

Configuring the master chiller 19

Configuring the slave chiller 20

Control methods 30

Control module communication 17

Cooler pump control 29

Demand limit 40

Dual chiller control 18

Electronic expansion valve (EXV)

Board 9,10

Emergency on/off switch 15

Enable-off-remote contact switch 15

Energy management module

(EMM) 15, 16

Energy management module (EMM)

inputs and outputs 16

EXV1 board inputs and outputs 9

EXV2 inputs and outputs 11

Fan board 1 outputs 12

Fan board 2 outputs 13

Fan board 3 inputs and outputs 14

Fan boards 10

General 3-5

Heat reclaim 48

Local equipment network 17

Low ambient head pressure

control 27, 143-148

Machine control 30

Main Base Board 6

Main Base Board inputs and outputs 7

Minimum load control 18

Minutes off time 18

Navigator™ module 4

Ramp loading 18

Remote alarm and alert relays 42

Reverse rotation board 15

Scroll protection module (SPM) 8

Scroll protection module inputs and

outputs 9

Scrolling marquee display 4

Temperature reset 32

Cooler head bolts

Tightening 57-59

Cooler protection 56

Chilled water flow switch 57

Flow rate 57

Freeze protection 56

Loss of fluid flow protection 56

Low fluid temperature 56

Plug components 56

Tightening cooler head bolts 57-69

Tube plugging 56

Cooler pump control 29

Cooling set point selection 31

4 to 20 mA input 31

Configuration set point limits 31

Control methods and cooling set points

table 31

Dual switch 31

Ice mode 31

Set point 1 31

Set point 2 31

Set point occupancy 32

Crankcase heaters 61

Demand limit 40

switch controlled 40

switch controlled configuration

table 41

CCN controlled 42

Externally powered 41

Externally powered demand limit

configuration table 41

Electronic expansion valve 9, 53

Cutaway view of 54

Filter drier 55

Inspecting/opening 54

Installing motor 54

Liquid line service valve 55

Moisture liquid indicator 54,55

Troubleshooting procedure 53

Flow rate 57

Freeze protection 56

Head pressure control 25

Fan staging 26

High efficiency variable

condenser (HEVCF) 27

Low ambient 27

Standard unit 25

Heat Reclaim Option 48

EMM Board 16

Mode 14 47

Operation 49

Control Schematic 93

Local Display Table 97

CCN Display Table 111

Alarm Code Co.04 64, 72

Alarm Code P.15 66, 75

Alarm Code P.34 66, 76

Alarm Code P.35 66, 76

Alarm Code Pr.07 67, 77

Alarm Code th.08 67, 77

Alarm Code th.09 67, 78

Alarm Code th.18, 19 67, 78

HEVCF. See High-efficiency variable con-

denser fans

High-efficiency variable condenser

fans (HEVCF)

Alarms, common 29

Alarms, details 68, 69

Danfoss VLT required

configurations 27

Fan drive operation 27

Parameters, 6-fan circuits 28

Parameters, common 28

Parameters reset at power cycle 28

High-side protection 60

Local display tables 94-106

Loss of fluid flow protection 56

Low ambient head pressure control 27

Danfoss VLT required

configurations 27

Siemens or Schneider operating

instructions 143-148

Low fluid temperature 56

Machine control 30

Maintenance 61, 62, 127-130

Minimum and maximum cooler flow rates

table (sizes 060-300) 45

Minimum and maximum cooler flow rates

table (sizes 315-390) 45

Minimum fluid loop volume 44

Modular unit combinations 3

Navigator display 4

Alarms mode 106

Configuration mode 100-102

Inputs mode 98

Operating mode 106

Outputs mode 99

Password 5

Pressure mode 97

Run status mode 94, 95

Service test mode 96

Set points mode 98

Temperature mode 97

Time clock mode 103-105

Navigator module 4

Adjusting the backlight brightness 5

Adjusting the contrast 5

Operating limitations 44

Flow rate requirements 44

Minimum and maximum cooler flow

rates (sizes 060-300) 45

Minimum and maximum cooler flow

rates (sizes 315-390) 45

Minimum fluid loop volume 44

Voltage 44

Plug components 56

Recommended maintenance schedule

61, 62, 127-130

Refrigerant circuit 60

Refrigerant feed components

Electronic expansion valve 53

Relief devices 60

High-side protection 60

Low-side protection 60

Safety considerations 2, 3

Safety devices 60

Compressor protection 60

Crankcase heaters 60

Scrolling marquee display 4

Alarms mode 106

Configuration mode 100-102

Display menu structure 5

Inputs mode 98

Operating mode 106

Outputs mode 99

Password 4

Pressure mode 97

Run status mode 94, 95

Service test mode 96

Set points mode 98

Temperature mode 97

Time clock mode 103-105

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300125-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-7T Pg 150 1115 1-14 Replaces: 30RB-6T

Service 53-61

Coil maintenance and cleaning 57

Compressors 61

Condenser fans 60

Cooler protection 56

Electronic expansion valve (EXV) 53

MCHX (microchannel) 60

Refrigerant circuit 60

Relief devices 60

RTPF (round tube, plate fin) 57

Safety devices 60

Start-up 43, 44

Actual start-up 43

Operating limitations 44

Pre-start-up 43

System check 43

Start-up and operation. See Start-up

Checklist

Start-up checklist CL-1 to Cl-10

Switch control 30

System check 43

Temperature limits

Standard units 44

Low ambient operation 44

Temperature reset 32

4 to 20mA temperature reset 32, 37

4 to 20mA temperature reset

configuration table 39

Chilled water temperature control 33

Outdoor air temperature reset 34

Outdoor air temperature reset

configuration table 36

Space temperature reset 37

Space temperature reset

configuration 38

Water temperature difference reset

configuration 35

Thermistors 78

Compressor suction gas temperature 79

Condensing entering fluid sensor 79

Condensing leaving fluid sensor 79

Cooler entering fluid sensor 79

Cooler leaving fluid sensor 79

Dual chiller LWT 79

Outdoor air temperature 79

Remote space temperature 79

Subcooled condenser gas

temperature 79

Typical space temperature sensor

wiring 80

Time schedule 30

Transducers 79

Troubleshooting 62-93

Sensors 78

Service test 83

Thermistors 78

Transducers 79

Tube plugging 56

Variable speed fan motors

Alarm details 68, 69

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300125-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-7T Pg CL-1 1115 1-14 Replaces: 30RB-6T

START-UP CHECKLIST FOR 30RB LIQUID CHILLER

A. PROJECT INFORMATION

Job Name ______________________________________

Address ________________________________________

City __________________ State _______ Zip ________

Installing Contractor ______________________________

Sales Office ____________________________________

Start-Up Performed By ___________________________

Unit

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

B. PRELIMINARY EQUIPMENT CHECK (This section to be completed by installing contractor)

1. Is there any physical damage? Yes No

a. If yes, was it noted on the freight bill and has a claim been filed with the shipper? Yes No

b. Will this prevent start-up? Yes No

Description _____________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________

2. Unit is installed level as per the installation instructions. Yes No

3. Power supply agrees with the unit nameplate. Yes No

4. Correct control voltage ________vac. Check transformer primary on 208/230 v. Yes No

5. Electrical power wiring is installed properly. Yes No

6. Unit is properly grounded. Yes No

7. Electrical circuit protection has been sized and installed properly. Yes No

8. Crankcase heaters energized for 24 hours before start-up. Yes No

9. Will this machine be controlled by a third party using BACnet/Lon/Modbus? Yes No

If yes, will the controls contractor be present at start-up? Yes No

Chilled Water System Check (This section to be completed by installing contractor)

1. All chilled water valves are open. Yes No

2. All piping is connected properly. Yes No

3. All air has been purged from the system. Yes No

4. Chilled water pump is operating with the correct rotation. Yes No

5. Chilled water pump starter interlocked with chiller. Yes No

6. Units without hydronic package, and units with hydronic package

installed on an open loop: inlet piping to cooler includes a 20 mesh strainer

within 10 ft. of unit. Yes No

7. Water loop volume greater than 3 gal/ton for air conditioning Yes No

or 6 gal/ton for process cooling and low ambient operation.

8. Has the water system been cleaned and flushed per the installation instructions?

9. Proper loop freeze protection provided to ____ F (C). Yes No

Antifreeze type__________________ Concentration _____%.

(If antifreeze solution is not utilized on 30RB machines and the

minimum outdoor ambient is below 32 F (0 C)

then items 10, 11, and 12 have to be completed to provide cooler

freeze protection to –20 F. Refer to Installation Instructions

for proper cooler winterization procedure.)

IMPORTANT: Adding antifreeze solution is the only certain means of

protecting the unit from freeze-up if the heater fails or electrical power is

interrupted or lost while temperatures are below 32 F (0 C).

10. Outdoor piping wrapped with electric heater tape. Yes No

11. Cooler heaters installed and operational. Yes No

12. Is the unit equipped with low ambient head pressure control? Yes No

If yes, are wind baffles installed? (Required if chiller will run below 32 F Yes No

and be exposed to the wind.)

CL-2

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

13. Are there any VFDs on the chilled water pumps? Yes No

a. Primary loop Yes No

b. Secondary loop Yes No

14. Chiller controls the pump(s)? Yes No

a. If yes, have the pump interlocks been wired? Yes No

Preliminary start-up complete.

Installing/Mechanical Contractor ___________________________________________ Date ________________________

CL-3

C. UNIT START-UP (Qualified individuals only. Factory start-up recommended!)

Cooler

Model ________________________________________

Serial _________________________________________

Compressors

A1)

Model ________________________________________

Serial _________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

A2)

Model ________________________________________

Serial _________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

A3)

Model ________________________________________

Serial _________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

A4)

Model ________________________________________

Serial _________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

B1)

Model ________________________________________

Serial _________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

B2)

Model ________________________________________

Serial _________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

B3)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

B4)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

C1)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

C2)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

C3)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

C4)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

SPM Address __________________________________

NOTE: SPM = Scroll Protection Module

Hydronic Package

P1)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

P2)

Model ________________________________________

Serial ________________________________________

1. All liquid line service valves located near EXVs are open. Yes No

2. All discharge service valves are open. Yes No

3. All suction service valves are open. Yes No

4. All compressor rack holddown bolts and the RED compressor

shipping brackets removed. Yes No

5. Leak check unit. Locate, repair and report any refrigerant leaks. Yes No

6. All terminals are tight. Yes No

7. All plug assemblies are tight. Yes No

8. All cables, thermistors and transducers have been inspected for cross wires. Yes No

9. All thermistors are fully inserted into wells. Yes No

10. All armatures move freely on contactors. Yes No

11. Cooler heaters installed and operational if equipped. Yes No

12. Voltage at terminal block is within unit nameplate range. Yes No

13. Check voltage imbalance: A-B______ A-C______B-C______

Average voltage = __________ (A-B + A-C + B-C)/3

Maximum deviation from average voltage = _______

Voltage imbalance = ______% (max. deviation / average voltage) X 100

Is voltage imbalance less than 2%? Yes No

(DO NOT start chiller if voltage imbalance is greater than 2%.

Contact local utility for assistance.)

CL-4

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

14. Verify cooler flow rate Yes No

Pressure entering cooler _____ psig (kpa)

Pressure leaving cooler _____ psig (kpa)

Cooler pressure drop _____ psig (kpa)

Psig x 2.31 ft/psi = _____ ft of water

kPa x 0.334 m/psi = _____ m of water

Cooler flow rate _____ gpm (l/s) (See Cooler Pressure Drop Curve provided in the 30RB Installation Instructions.)

15. Verify that isolation valves on factory-installed pump packages are properly Yes No

positioned and locked prior to start-up (slot in-line with piping on both sides of pump).

16. Chilled water flow switch operational. Yes No

Start and operate machine. Complete the following:

1. Complete component test (make sure EXVs are checked after liquid line service valves are opened).

2. Check refrigerant and oil charge. Record charge information below.

3. Record compressor and condenser fan motor current.

4. Record operating data.

5. Provide operating instructions to owner’s personnel. Instruction time _______ hours

Circuit A Circuit B Circuit C

Refrigerant Charge __________ ___________ ___________

Additional charge required __________ ___________ ___________

Oil Charge

Indicate level in sight glass of compressors A1, B1 and C1.

Level should be

of a full sight glass when off.

Additional oil charge required.

Circuit A ______

Circuit B ______

Circuit C ______

Record Software Versions

MODE — RUN STATUS

(Press ENTER and ESCAPE simultaneously to obtain software versions)

A1 B1 C1

A2 B2 C2

A3 B3 C3

A4 B4 C4

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION

VERS

APPL CSA-SR- __ __ __ __ __ __

MARQ

EXV1

EXV2

AUX1

AUX2

AUX3

CL-5

Component Test — Complete the following tests to make sure all peripheral components are

operational before the compressors are started.

MODE — SERVICE TEST

*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then

place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.

†Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position

to perform Quick Test.

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY

TEST* T.REQ OFF/ON Manual Sequence

CP.A1 OFF/ON Compressor A1 Output

CP.A2 OFF/ON Compressor A2 Output

CP.A3 OFF/ON Compressor A3 Output

CP.A4 OFF/ON Compressor A4 Output

HGB.A OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass A Output

CP.B1 OFF/ON Compressor B1 Output

CP.B2 OFF/ON Compressor B2 Output

CP.B3 OFF/ON Compressor B3 Output

CP.B4 OFF/ON Compressor B4 Output

HGB.B OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass B Output

CP.C1 OFF/ON Compressor C1 Output

CP.C2 OFF/ON Compressor C2 Output

CP.C3 OFF/ON Compressor C3 Output

CP.C4 OFF/ON Compressor C4 Output

HGB.C OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass C Output

QUIC† Q.REQ OFF/ON Quick Test Mode

EXV.A xxx% Circuit A EXV % Open

EXV.B xxx% Circuit B EXV % Open

EXV.C xxx% Circuit C EXV % Open

FAN.A X Circuit A Fan Stages

FAN.B X Circuit B Fan Stages

FAN.C X Circuit C Fan Stages

SPD.A xxx% Circ A Varifan Position

SPD.B xxx% Circ B Varifan Position

SPD.C xxx% Circ C Varifan Position

FRV.A OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve A

FRP.A OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out A

FRV.B OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve B

FRP.B OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out B

FRV.C OPEN/CLSE Free Cooling Valve C

FRP.C OFF/ON Refrigerant Pump Out C

RV.A OPEN/CLSE 4 Way Valve Circuit A

RV.B OPEN/CLSE 4 Way Valve Circuit B

BOIL OFF/ON Boiler Command

HR1.A OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Enter Valve A

HR2.A OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Leaving Valve A

HR3.A OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Enter Valve A

HR4.A OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Leaving Valve A

HR1.B OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Enter Valve B

HR2.B OPEN/CLSE Air Cond Leaving Valve B

HR3.B OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Enter Valve B

HR4.B OPEN/CLSE Water Cond Leaving Valve B

PMP.1 OFF/ON Water Exchanger Pump 1

PMP.2 OFF/ON Water Exchanger Pump 2

CND.P OFF/ON Reclaim Condenser Pump

CL.HT OFF/ON Cooler Heater Output

CP.HT OFF/ON Condenser Heater Output

CL-6

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

MODE — SERVICE TEST (cont)

*Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring T.REQ to ON. Configure the desired item to ON, then

place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Enable position.

†Place the Enable/Off/Remote Contact switch to the Off position prior to configuring Q.REQ to ON. The switch should be in the Off position

to perform Quick Test.

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY

QUIC†(cont) CH.A1 OFF/ON Compressor A1 Heater

CH.A2 OFF/ON Compressor A2 Heater

CH.A3 OFF/ON Compressor A3 Heater

CH.A4 OFF/ON Compressor A4 Heater

CH.B1 OFF/ON Compressor B1 Heater

CH.B2 OFF/ON Compressor B2 Heater

CH.B3 OFF/ON Compressor B3 Heater

CH.B4 OFF/ON Compressor B4 Heater

CH.C1 OFF/ON Compressor C1 Heater

CH.C2 OFF/ON Compressor C2 Heater

CH.C3 OFF/ON Compressor C3 Heater

CH.C4 OFF/ON Compressor C4 Heater

HGB.A OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass A Output

HGB.B OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass B Output

HGB.C OFF/ON Hot Gas Bypass C Output

Q.RDY OFF/ON Chiller Ready Status

Q.RUN OFF/ON Chiller Running Status

SHUT OFF/ON Customer Shut Down Stat

CATO xx.x Chiller Capacity 0-10v

ALRM OFF/ON Alarm Relay

ALRT OFF/ON Alert Relay

C.ALM OFF/ON Critical Alarm Relay

CL-7

Operating Data:

Record the following information from the Run Status, Temperatures and Outputs Modes when machine is in a

stable operating condition. If cooling load is insufficient, these readings must be obtained by putting the chiller in

test mode (Service Test) and running each compressor.

TEMPERATURES

COOLER ENTERING FLUID EWT _______________

COOLER LEAVING FLUID LWT _______________

CONTROL POINT CTPT _______________

CAPACITY CAP _______________

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE OAT _______________

LEAD/LAG LEAVING FLUID CHWS_______________ (Dual Chiller Control Only)

OPTIONAL HEAT RECLAIM

ENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE HEWT _______________

LEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE HLWT _______________

Install a manifold gage set to obtain readings and verify these against pressure transducers.

CIRCUIT A CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT C

SCT.A __________ SCT.B __________ SCT.C___________

SST.A __________ SST.B __________ SST.C ___________

SGT.A __________ SGT.B __________ SGT.C ___________

SUP.A __________ SUP.B __________ SUP.C ___________

EXV.A__________ EXV.B __________ EXV.C ___________

NOTE: EXV A,B,C positions are found in the output mode.

COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT

L1 L2 L3

COMPRESSOR A1 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR A2 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR A3 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR A4 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR B1 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR B2 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR B3 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR B4 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR C1 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR C2 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR C3 ______ ______ ______

COMPRESSOR C4 ______ ______ ______

CONDENSER FAN MOTOR CURRENT

L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3

FAN MOTOR 1 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 10 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 2 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 11 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 3 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 12 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 4 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 13 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 5 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 14 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 6 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 15 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 7 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 16 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 8 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 17 ______ ______ ______

FAN MOTOR 9 ______ ______ ______ FAN MOTOR 18 ______ ______ ______

CL-8

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

Record Configuration Information

MODE — CONFIGURATION

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY

DISP TEST OFF/ON Test Display LED’s

METR US-METR Metric Display

LANG x Language

UNIT TYPE x Unit Type

TONS xxx Unit Size

VAR.A x NB Fan on Varifan CIR A

VAR.B x NB Fan on Varifan CIR B

VAR.C x NB Fan on Varifan CIR C

HGBP x Hot Gas Bypass Control

60HZ NO/YES 60 Hz Frequency

RECL NO/YES Heat Reclaim Select

EHS x Electric Heater Stage

EMM NO/YES EMM Module Installed

PAS.E DSBL/ENBL Password Enable

PASS xxxx Password Protection Must be Disabled

FREE NO/YES Free Cooling Select

PD4.D NO/YES Pro_Dialog Users Display

BOIL OFF/ON Boiler Command Select

VLT.S x VLT Fan Drive Select

RPM.F xxxx VLT Fan Drive RPM

MCHX NO/YES MCHX Exchanger Select

FC x Factory Country Code

VFDV xxx VFD Voltage for USA

SERV FLUD x Cooler Fluid Type

MOP xx.x EXV MOP Setpoint

HP.TH xxx.x High Pressure Threshold

SHP.A xx.x Circuit A Superheat Setp

SHP.B xx.x Circuit B Superheat Setp

SHP.C xx.x Circuit C Superheat Setp

HTR xx.x Cooler Heater DT Setp

EWTO NO/YES Entering Water Control

AU.SM NO/YES Auto Start When SM Lost

BOTH NO/YES HSM Both Command Select

LLWT xx Brine Min. Fluid Temp.

LOSP xx.x Brine Freeze Setpoint

HD.PG xx.x Varifan Proportion Gain

HD.DG xx.x Varifan Derivative Gain

HD.IG xx.x Varifan Integral Gain

HR.MI xxx.x Reclaim Water Valve Min

HR.MA xxx.x Reclaim Water Valve Max

AVFA NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan A

AVFB NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan B

AVFC NO/YES Attach Drive to Fan C

OPTN CCNA xxx CCN Address

CCNB xxx CCN Bus Number

BAUD x CCN Baud Rate

LOAD x Loading Sequence Select

LLCS x Lead/Lag Circuit Select

RL.S ENBL/DSBL Ramp Load Select

DELY xx Minutes Time Off

ICE.M ENBL/DSBL Ice Mode Enable

PUMP x Cooler Pumps Sequence

ROT.P xxxx Pump Rotation Delay

PM.PS NO/YES Periodic Pump Start

P.SBY NO/YES Stop Pump in Standby

P.LOC NO/YES Flow Checked if Pump Off

LS.ST xx.xx Night Low Noise Start

LS.ND xx.xx Night Low Noise End

LS.LT xxx Low Noise Capacity Lim

OA.TH xx.x Heat Mode OAT Threshold

FREE xx.x Free Cooling OAT Limit

BO.TH xx.x Boiler OAT Threshold

EHST xx.xx Elec Stag OAT Threshold

EHSB NO/YES Last Heat Elec Backup

E.DEF NO/YES Quick EHS in Defrost

EHSP xx Elec Heat Pulldown

AUTO NO/YES Auto Changeover Select

CL-9

MODE — CONFIGURATION (cont)

MODE — SETPOINT

MODE — OPERATING MODE

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY

RSET CRST x Cooling Reset Type

HRST x Heating Reset Type

DMDC x Demand Limit Select

DMMX xx.x mA for 100% Demand Lim

DMZE xx.x mA for 0% Demand Limit

MSSL x Master/Slave Select

SLVA xxx Slave Address

LLBL ENBL/DSBL Lead/Lag Balance Select

LLBD xxx Lead/Lag Balance Delta

LLDY xx Lag Start Delay

LAGP x Lag Unit Pump Select

LPUL xx Lead Pulldown Time

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY

COOL CSP.1 xxx.x Cooling Setpoint 1

CSP.2 xxx.x Cooling Setpoint 2

CSP.3 xxx.x Ice Setpoint

CRV1 xx.x Current No Reset Value

CRV2 xx.x Current Full Reset Value

CRT1 xxx.x Delta T No Reset Temp

CRT2 xxx.x Delta T Full Reset Value

CRO1 xxx.x OAT No Reset Temp

CRO2 xxx.x OAT Full Reset Temp

CRS1 xxx.x Space T No Reset Temp

CRS2 xxx.x Space T Full Reset Temp

DGRC xx.x Degrees Cool Reset

CAUT xx.x Cool Changeover Setpt N/A

CRMP x.x Cool Ramp Loading

HEAT HSP.1 xxx.x Heating Setpoint 1 N/A

HSP.2 xxx.x Heating Setpoint 2 N/A

HRV1 xx.x Current No Reset Val N/A

HRV2 xx.x Current Full Reset Val N/A

HRT1 xxx.x Delta T No Reset Temp N/A

HRT2 xxx.x Delta T Full Reset Temp N/A

HRO1 xxx.x OAT No Reset Temp N/A

HRO2 xxx.x OAT Full Reset Temp N/A

DGRH xx.x Degrees Heat Reset N/A

HAUT xx.x Heat Changeover Setpt N/A

HRMP x.x Heat Ramp Loading N/A

MISC DLS1 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 1

DLS2 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 2

DLS3 xxx Switch Limit Setpoint 3

RSP xxx.x Heat Reclaim Setpoint

RDB xx.x Reclaim Deadband

SUB-MODE ITEM DISPLAY ITEM EXPANSION ENTRY

SLCT OPER x Operating Control Type

SP.SE x Setpoint Select

HC.SE x Heat Cool Select

RL.SE x Reclaim Select

Manufacturer reserves the right to discontinue, or change at any time, specifications or designs without notice and without incurring obligations.

Catalog No. 04-53300125-01 Printed in U.S.A. Form 30RB-7T Pg CL-10 1115 1-14 Replaces: 30RB-6T

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE CUT ALONG DOTTED LINE

COMMENTS:

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________

SIGNATURES:

Start-up

Technician______________________________________________________ Date___________________________________

Customer

Representative __________________________________________________ Date___________________________________